nodeb initial configuration guide-(v100r010_01)
TRANSCRIPT
NodeB
V100R010
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
Issue 01
Date 2008-06-25
Part Number
Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For anyassistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: [email protected]
Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2008. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................1
1 Introduction to NodeB Initial Configuration.......................................................................1-11.1 Definition of NodeB Initial Configuration......................................................................................................1-21.2 NodeB Initial Configuration Scenarios...........................................................................................................1-21.3 NodeB Initial Configuration Tool...................................................................................................................1-21.4 NodeB Initial Configuration Methods.............................................................................................................1-2
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration.....................................2-12.1 NodeB Basic Data...........................................................................................................................................2-22.2 NodeB Equipment Layer Data........................................................................................................................2-42.3 NodeB Transport Layer Data........................................................................................................................2-322.4 NodeB Radio Layer Data..............................................................................................................................2-72
3 NodeB Initial Configuration....................................................................................................3-1
4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)........................................................4-14.1 NodeB Template File......................................................................................................................................4-24.2 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial)..................................................................................................................4-24.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing the Template File (Initial).............................................................4-64.4 Reconfiguring NodeB Data (Initial)................................................................................................................4-84.5 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial)..........................................................................4-9
5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)...............................................5-15.1 NodeB Configuration File...............................................................................................................................5-25.2 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial)..................................................................................................................5-25.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing a Configuration File (Initial).........................................................5-65.4 Reconfiguring NodeB Data (Initial)................................................................................................................5-85.5 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial)..........................................................................5-9
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial).......................................................................................6-16.1 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial)..................................................................................................................6-36.2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial).......................................................6-7
6.2.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).......................................................................................6-96.2.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial)..........................................................................6-166.2.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial, Macro NodeB)........6-206.2.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Macro NodeB)..............................................................................................6-24
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
i
6.2.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial)................................................................................................................6-326.2.6 Adding an NGRU (Initial)....................................................................................................................6-336.2.7 Adding an NCMU (Initial, BTS3812AE)............................................................................................6-346.2.8 Adding an NPMU (Initial, Macro NodeB)...........................................................................................6-366.2.9 Adding NPSUs (Initial, BTS3812AE/BTS3812A)..............................................................................6-386.2.10 Adding Batteries (Initial, BTS3812AE/BTS3812A).........................................................................6-396.2.11 Adding an ALD (Initial).....................................................................................................................6-40
6.3 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812E (Initial)...........................................................................6-456.3.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).....................................................................................6-486.3.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial)..........................................................................6-546.3.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial, Macro NodeB)........6-596.3.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Macro NodeB)..............................................................................................6-636.3.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial)................................................................................................................6-716.3.6 Adding an NGRU (Initial)....................................................................................................................6-726.3.7 Adding an NEMU (Initial, BTS3812E)...............................................................................................6-736.3.8 Adding an NPMU (Initial, Macro NodeB)...........................................................................................6-756.3.9 Adding NPSUs (Initial, BTS3812E)....................................................................................................6-776.3.10 Adding Batteries (Initial, BTS3812E)................................................................................................6-796.3.11 Adding an ALD (Initial).....................................................................................................................6-80
6.4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial).............................................................................6-856.4.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).....................................................................................6-876.4.2 Adding a BBU (Initial).........................................................................................................................6-936.4.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial, Distributed NodeB).......................................................................................................................................................................6-986.4.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Distributed NodeB)....................................................................................6-1026.4.5 Adding an NEMU (Initial, Distributed NodeB).................................................................................6-1106.4.6 Adding an NPMU (Initial, Distributed NodeB).................................................................................6-1116.4.7 Adding an ALD (Initial).....................................................................................................................6-112
6.5 Manually Adding the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over ATM)....................................................6-1176.5.1 Adding Links at the Physical Layer (Initial)......................................................................................6-1186.5.2 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial, over ATM)..............................................................6-1446.5.3 Adding SAAL Links (Initial).............................................................................................................6-1466.5.4 Adding an NBAP (Initial)..................................................................................................................6-1506.5.5 Adding an ALCAP (Initial)................................................................................................................6-1536.5.6 Adding AAL2 Path Data (Initial).......................................................................................................6-1556.5.7 Adding an OMCH of the NodeB (Initial, over ATM).......................................................................6-1606.5.8 Adding a Treelink PVC (Initial).........................................................................................................6-164
6.6 Manually Adding Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over IP)...............................................................6-1686.6.1 Adding a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial)..................................................................................6-1696.6.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial)...............................................................................................................6-1886.6.3 Adding SCTP Links (Initial)..............................................................................................................6-1916.6.4 Adding an IPCP (Initial)....................................................................................................................6-1956.6.5 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial, over IP)...................................................................6-197
ContentsNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
ii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
6.6.6 Adding IP Path Data (Initial).............................................................................................................6-2006.6.7 Adding an OMCH of the NodeB (Initial, over IP).............................................................................6-2056.6.8 Adding A Bound Destination Network Segment to the Transmission Resource Group (Initial, IP).....................................................................................................................................................................6-2096.6.9 Adding IP Clock Links (Initial).........................................................................................................6-2116.6.10 Modifying IP QoS Data (Initial)......................................................................................................6-215
6.7 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial)......................................................................6-2166.8 Adding Radio Layer Data...........................................................................................................................6-220
6.8.1 Adding Sites.......................................................................................................................................6-2216.8.2 Adding Sectors and Cells (Macro NodeB).........................................................................................6-2226.8.3 Adding Sectors and Cells (Distributed NodeB).................................................................................6-236
7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration..............................................................7-17.1 Cell Related Concepts.....................................................................................................................................7-2
7.1.1 Sector, Carrier, and Cell.........................................................................................................................7-27.1.2 Physical Resources of Cells...................................................................................................................7-37.1.3 Local Cell and Logical Cell...................................................................................................................7-6
7.2 ATM Protocol-Related Terms.........................................................................................................................7-67.2.1 ATM User Plane, ATM Control Plane, and ATM Management Plane.................................................7-77.2.2 ATM Physical Layer, ATM Layer, and AAL........................................................................................7-7
7.3 IP Protocol-Related Terms..............................................................................................................................7-87.3.1 Data Link Layer Protocols.....................................................................................................................7-97.3.2 IP..........................................................................................................................................................7-117.3.3 SCTP....................................................................................................................................................7-14
7.4 NodeB Treelink PVC....................................................................................................................................7-157.5 NodeBs in Direct/Cascading Connections....................................................................................................7-17
7.5.1 Definitions of NodeBs in Direct/Cascading Connections....................................................................7-177.5.2 Configuration Differences Between NodeBs in Direct/Cascading Connections.................................7-18
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide Contents
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
iii
Figures
Figure 4-1 Physical NodeB Basic Information window......................................................................................4-6Figure 4-2 Physical NodeB Basic Information window......................................................................................4-7Figure 4-3 Create Physical NodeB dialog box.....................................................................................................4-8Figure 4-4 Matching relations............................................................................................................................4-10Figure 4-5 NodeB Selection window.................................................................................................................4-12Figure 4-6 Port Match window..........................................................................................................................4-13Figure 5-1 Physical NodeB Basic Information window......................................................................................5-6Figure 5-2 NodeB Data Configuration File..........................................................................................................5-8Figure 5-3 Matching relations............................................................................................................................5-10Figure 5-4 NodeB Selection window.................................................................................................................5-12Figure 5-5 Port Match window..........................................................................................................................5-13Figure 6-1 Physical NodeB Basic Information window......................................................................................6-6Figure 6-2 BTS3812AE/BTS3812A panel...........................................................................................................6-7Figure 6-3 Create Physical NodeB dialog box...................................................................................................6-14Figure 6-4 NodeB Equipment Layer window....................................................................................................6-15Figure 6-5 Adding the boards in the baseband subrack.....................................................................................6-19Figure 6-6 Adding an uplink baseband resource group......................................................................................6-23Figure 6-7 Adding the RRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A/BTS3812E).................................................................6-31Figure 6-8 Adding the MTRU and MAFU........................................................................................................6-33Figure 6-9 Adding the NGRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A for instance).............................................................6-34Figure 6-10 Adding an NCMU..........................................................................................................................6-36Figure 6-11 Adding an NPMU...........................................................................................................................6-37Figure 6-12 Modifying the NPMU attributes.....................................................................................................6-38Figure 6-13 Adding an NPSU............................................................................................................................6-39Figure 6-14 Adding Batteries.............................................................................................................................6-40Figure 6-15 Adding the ALD.............................................................................................................................6-45Figure 6-16 BTS3812E panel.............................................................................................................................6-46Figure 6-17 Create Physical NodeB dialog box.................................................................................................6-53Figure 6-18 NodeB Equipment Layer window..................................................................................................6-54Figure 6-19 Adding the boards in the baseband subrack...................................................................................6-58Figure 6-20 Adding an uplink baseband resource group....................................................................................6-62Figure 6-21 Adding the RRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A/BTS3812E)...............................................................6-70Figure 6-22 Adding the MTRU and MAFU......................................................................................................6-72
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figures
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
v
Figure 6-23 Adding the NGRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A for instance)...........................................................6-73Figure 6-24 Adding an NEMU...........................................................................................................................6-75Figure 6-25 Adding an NPMU...........................................................................................................................6-76Figure 6-26 Modifying the NPMU attributes.....................................................................................................6-77Figure 6-27 Adding an NPSU............................................................................................................................6-78Figure 6-28 Adding Batteries.............................................................................................................................6-80Figure 6-29 Adding the ALD.............................................................................................................................6-85Figure 6-30 DBS3800 panel...............................................................................................................................6-86Figure 6-31 Create Physical NodeB dialog box.................................................................................................6-92Figure 6-32 NodeB Equipment Layer window..................................................................................................6-93Figure 6-33 Adding the BBU.............................................................................................................................6-98Figure 6-34 Adding an uplink baseband resource group..................................................................................6-101Figure 6-35 Adding an RRU (DBS3800).........................................................................................................6-109Figure 6-36 Adding an NEMU.........................................................................................................................6-111Figure 6-37 Adding an NPMU in the DBS3800 cabinet..................................................................................6-112Figure 6-38 Adding the NPMU for the RRU...................................................................................................6-112Figure 6-39 Adding the ALD...........................................................................................................................6-117Figure 6-40 Configuring the IMA group and the IMA link individually.........................................................6-123Figure 6-41 Search Iub Board window............................................................................................................6-124Figure 6-42 Configuring the IMA links in batches..........................................................................................6-125Figure 6-43 Configure the UNI links individually...........................................................................................6-129Figure 6-44 Configure the UNI links in batches..............................................................................................6-130Figure 6-45 Adding a fractional ATM link......................................................................................................6-133Figure 6-46 Configuring the SDT CES links...................................................................................................6-140Figure 6-47 Configuring the UDT CES links..................................................................................................6-141Figure 6-48 Configuring the timeslot cross channel........................................................................................6-143Figure 6-49 Configuring the transmission resource group...............................................................................6-146Figure 6-50 Configuring the SAAL.................................................................................................................6-149Figure 6-51 Configuring the NCP and the CCP...............................................................................................6-152Figure 6-52 Adding the AAL2 node................................................................................................................6-155Figure 6-53 Configuring the AAL2 PATH......................................................................................................6-159Figure 6-54 Adding an OMCH........................................................................................................................6-163Figure 6-55 NodeB ATM Transport Layer (Treelink PVC) window..............................................................6-167Figure 6-56 Adding a PPP link.........................................................................................................................6-174Figure 6-57 Adding the MLPPP group and the MLPPP link...........................................................................6-178Figure 6-58 Search Iub Board window............................................................................................................6-179Figure 6-59 Adding a PPPoE link....................................................................................................................6-183Figure 6-60 Configuring the DEVIP................................................................................................................6-185Figure 6-61 Configuring the timeslot cross channel........................................................................................6-188Figure 6-62 Adding an IP route........................................................................................................................6-190Figure 6-63 Adding an SCTP link....................................................................................................................6-193Figure 6-64 Configuring the destination IP address of the SCTP link.............................................................6-194
FiguresNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
vi Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-65 Configuring the NCP and the CCP...............................................................................................6-197Figure 6-66 Adding the IP transmission resource group..................................................................................6-199Figure 6-67 Configuring the IP PATH.............................................................................................................6-203Figure 6-68 Configuring the destination IP address of the IP PATH..............................................................6-204Figure 6-69 Adding an OMCH........................................................................................................................6-207Figure 6-70 Adding a destination IP address of the OMCH............................................................................6-208Figure 6-71 Adding a bound destination network segment to the transmission resource group (initial, over IP)...........................................................................................................................................................................6-210Figure 6-72 Adding an IPCLKLNK link.........................................................................................................6-213Figure 6-73 Configuring the IP address at the IP clock link server.................................................................6-214Figure 6-74 Configuring the Diffserv priority on the transport layer .............................................................6-216Figure 6-75 Matching relations........................................................................................................................6-217Figure 6-76 NodeB Selection window.............................................................................................................6-219Figure 6-77 Port Match window......................................................................................................................6-220Figure 6-78 Adding Sites.................................................................................................................................6-222Figure 6-79 Configuring local sectors and cells...............................................................................................6-232Figure 6-80 Modifying Mac-hs and Mac-e related parameters........................................................................6-233Figure 6-81 Configuring remote sectors and cells...........................................................................................6-234Figure 6-82 Configure distributed sectors and cells.........................................................................................6-235Figure 6-83 Configuring remote sectors and cells...........................................................................................6-245Figure 6-84 Configure distributed sectors and cells.........................................................................................6-246Figure 7-1 Relations among a sector, carrier, and cell.........................................................................................7-3Figure 7-2 Physical RF resources mapped from sectors onto NodeB..................................................................7-4Figure 7-3 Rules of the mapping between NodeB sectors and MAFUs or MTRUs............................................7-5Figure 7-4 Reference model of the ATM protocol...............................................................................................7-6Figure 7-5 Hierarchy of the PPP........................................................................................................................7-10Figure 7-6 Five classes of IP addresses..............................................................................................................7-12Figure 7-7 SCTP Message Structure..................................................................................................................7-15Figure 7-8 Treelink PVC....................................................................................................................................7-16Figure 7-9 Treelink PVC principles...................................................................................................................7-16Figure 7-10 Direct and cascading connections...................................................................................................7-18
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide Figures
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
vii
Tables
Table 1-1 DBS3800 initial configuration methods and scenarios........................................................................1-3Table 2-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB........................................................................................2-2Table 2-2 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB..........................................................................2-4Table 2-3 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU........................................................................................... 2-9Table 2-4 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group.............................................2-11Table 2-5 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain...............................................................................2-11Table 2-6 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU.........................................................................................2-15Table 2-7 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB......................................................................................2-17Table 2-8 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group.............................................2-18Table 2-9 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU.........................................................................................2-19Table 2-10 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain.............................................................................2-22Table 2-11 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU.......................................................................................2-25Table 2-12 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB....................................................................................2-27Table 2-13 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD.......................................................................................2-28Table 2-14 Data of the Iub transmission sharing function.................................................................................2-31Table 2-15 Negotiation and planned data of the IMA group and IMA links.....................................................2-32Table 2-16 Negotiation and planned data of the UNI links................................................................................2-35Table 2-17 Negotiation and planned data of the fractional ATM links..............................................................2-37Table 2-18 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links.................................................................2-39Table 2-19 Negotiation and planned data of the SDT CES................................................................................2-39Table 2-20 Negotiation and planned data of the UDT CES...............................................................................2-42Table 2-21 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over ATM)..............................2-44Table 2-22 Negotiation and planned data of the SAAL links............................................................................2-45Table 2-23 Negotiation and planned data of the NBAP.....................................................................................2-47Table 2-24 Negotiation and planned data of the ALCAP..................................................................................2-48Table 2-25 Negotiation and planned data of the AAL2 PATH..........................................................................2-49Table 2-26 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (ATM).......................................................................2-51Table 2-27 Negotiation and planned data of the treelink PVC...........................................................................2-53Table 2-28 Negotiation and planned data of the ppp links.................................................................................2-55Table 2-29 Negotiation and planned data of the MLPPP group and MLPPP links...........................................2-58Table 2-30 Negotiation and planned data of the PPPoE links............................................................................2-60Table 2-31 Negotiation and planned data of the DEVIP....................................................................................2-62Table 2-32 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links.................................................................2-63
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide Tables
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
ix
Table 2-33 Negotiation and planned data of the IP route...................................................................................2-64Table 2-34 Negotiation and planned data of the SCTP links.............................................................................2-65Table 2-35 Negotiation and planned data of the IPCP.......................................................................................2-66Table 2-36 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over IP)...................................2-67Table 2-37 Negotiation and planned data of the IP PATH.................................................................................2-68Table 2-38 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (IP)............................................................................2-70Table 2-39 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group whose destination IP network segmentis bound...............................................................................................................................................................2-71Table 2-40 Negotiation and planned data of the IP clock links..........................................................................2-71Table 2-41 Negotiation and planned data of the IPQoS.....................................................................................2-72Table 2-42 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB....................................................................................2-72Table 2-43 Negotiation and planned data of the sector......................................................................................2-73Table 2-44 Negotiation and planned data of the cell..........................................................................................2-75Table 4-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB........................................................................................4-3Table 4-2 Description of the configuration pane..................................................................................................4-7Table 4-3 Description of the configuration pane................................................................................................4-12Table 5-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB........................................................................................5-3Table 5-2 Description of the configuration pane................................................................................................5-12Table 6-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB........................................................................................6-3Table 6-2 Module information.............................................................................................................................6-8Table 6-3 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB........................................................................6-10Table 6-4 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU.........................................................................................6-16Table 6-5 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group.............................................6-21Table 6-6 Description of the configuration pane................................................................................................6-23Table 6-7 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain...............................................................................6-25Table 6-8 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU.........................................................................................6-28Table 6-9 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB......................................................................................6-30Table 6-10 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD.......................................................................................6-41Table 6-11 Module information.........................................................................................................................6-46Table 6-12 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB......................................................................6-48Table 6-13 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU.......................................................................................6-55Table 6-14 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group...........................................6-60Table 6-15 Description of the configuration pane..............................................................................................6-62Table 6-16 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain.............................................................................6-64Table 6-17 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU.......................................................................................6-67Table 6-18 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB....................................................................................6-69Table 6-19 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD.......................................................................................6-81Table 6-20 Module information.........................................................................................................................6-86Table 6-21 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB......................................................................6-87Table 6-22 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU.......................................................................................6-94Table 6-23 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group...........................................6-99Table 6-24 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-101Table 6-25 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain...........................................................................6-102
TablesNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
x Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 6-26 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU.....................................................................................6-106Table 6-27 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB..................................................................................6-108Table 6-28 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD.....................................................................................6-113Table 6-29 Negotiation and planned data of the IMA group and IMA links...................................................6-120Table 6-30 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-125Table 6-31 Negotiation and planned data of the UNI links..............................................................................6-126Table 6-32 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-130Table 6-33 Negotiation and planned data of the fractional ATM links............................................................6-131Table 6-34 Negotiation and planned data of the SDT CES..............................................................................6-134Table 6-35 Negotiation and planned data of the UDT CES.............................................................................6-137Table 6-36 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-140Table 6-37 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-141Table 6-38 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links...............................................................6-142Table 6-39 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-143Table 6-40 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over ATM)............................6-144Table 6-41 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-146Table 6-42 Negotiation and planned data of the SAAL links..........................................................................6-147Table 6-43 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-150Table 6-44 Negotiation and planned data of the NBAP...................................................................................6-151Table 6-45 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-152Table 6-46 Negotiation and planned data of the ALCAP................................................................................6-153Table 6-47 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-155Table 6-48 Negotiation and planned data of the AAL2 PATH........................................................................6-156Table 6-49 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-159Table 6-50 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (ATM).....................................................................6-161Table 6-51 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-163Table 6-52 Negotiation and planned data of the treelink PVC.........................................................................6-164Table 6-53 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-168Table 6-54 Negotiation and planned data of the ppp links...............................................................................6-170Table 6-55 Negotiation and planned data of the MLPPP group and MLPPP links.........................................6-175Table 6-56 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-179Table 6-57 Negotiation and planned data of the PPPoE links..........................................................................6-180Table 6-58 Negotiation and planned data of the DEVIP..................................................................................6-184Table 6-59 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-185Table 6-60 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links...............................................................6-187Table 6-61 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-188Table 6-62 Negotiation and planned data of the IP route.................................................................................6-189Table 6-63 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-190Table 6-64 Negotiation and planned data of the SCTP links...........................................................................6-191Table 6-65 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-193Table 6-66 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-194Table 6-67 Negotiation and planned data of the IPCP.....................................................................................6-195
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide Tables
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
xi
Table 6-68 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-197Table 6-69 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over IP).................................6-198Table 6-70 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-200Table 6-71 Negotiation and planned data of the IP PATH...............................................................................6-201Table 6-72 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-203Table 6-73 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-204Table 6-74 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (IP)..........................................................................6-206Table 6-75 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-207Table 6-76 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group whose destination IP network segmentis bound.............................................................................................................................................................6-209Table 6-77 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-211Table 6-78 Negotiation and planned data of the IP clock links........................................................................6-212Table 6-79 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-213Table 6-80 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-214Table 6-81 Negotiation and planned data of the IPQoS...................................................................................6-215Table 6-82 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-219Table 6-83 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB..................................................................................6-221Table 6-84 Negotiation and planned data of the sector....................................................................................6-224Table 6-85 Negotiation and planned data of the cell........................................................................................6-226Table 6-86 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-232Table 6-87 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-233Table 6-88 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-235Table 6-89 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-236Table 6-90 Negotiation and planned data of the sector....................................................................................6-237Table 6-91 Negotiation and planned data of the cell........................................................................................6-239Table 6-92 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-245Table 6-93 Description of the configuration pane............................................................................................6-246Table 7-1 Functions of the ATM user plane, ATM control plane, and ATM management plane.......................7-7Table 7-2 Layers and functions of the reference model of the ATM protocol.....................................................7-7Table 7-3 Classification and range of IP addresses............................................................................................7-13Table 7-4 Configuration differences between NodeBs in direct/cascading connections...................................7-18
TablesNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
xii Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
About This Document
This describes how to use the CME to configure a new site, that is, the NodeB, during networkconstruction or network optimization.
PurposeNOTE
This document describes the following models of NodeBs: BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE,DBS3800, and iDBS3800.
During network deployment or network optimization, you need to prepare the configuration filefor each NodeB and load the file to the NodeB in commissioning so as to ensure that the NodeBworks as designed.
This document serves as a guideline on how to configure the initial data for the NodeB. Thecontent involves two parts. That is, how to prepare data for NodeB initial configuration and howto add data to the NodeB through manual operations, template files, and configuration files. Inaddition, this document also provides the reference information for the configuration.
VersionsProduct Names Versions
WRAN CME V100R005
NodeB VersionsProduct Names Versions
BTS3812A V100R010
BTS3812AE V100R010
BTS3812E V100R010
DBS3800 V100R010
iDBS3800 V100R010
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide About This Document
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
1
Intended Audience
This document is intended for:
l Field engineers
l Network operators
l System engineers
Before you read this guide, it is recommended that you reference the CME User Guide.
Change History
For details, refer to Changes in NodeB Initial Configuration Guide.
Organization
1 Introduction to NodeB Initial Configuration
This provides the definition and describes the scenarios, tools, and methods of NodeB initialconfiguration.
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB Initial Configuration
This describes the preparations you must make before configuring initial data to the NodeB. Thepreparations must be based on the network planning, connections with other devices, bandwidthresources, and the NodeB hardware resources.
3 NodeB Initial Configuration
This describes how to add a NodeB on the CME.
4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)
This describes how to configure the NodeB through the template file if the configuration typeof the NodeB is one of the typical configuration types of the template file.
5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)
This describes how to add a NodeB through a configuration file if the configuration file isapplicable to the NodeB.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
This describes how to manually add a NodeB. This method is used to adjust the data after atemplate file or a configuration file is imported.
7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration
This provides the related concepts to be referenced during the process of the NodeB initialconfiguration.
Conventions
1. Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows
About This DocumentNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Symbol Description
DANGERIndicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided,will result in death or serious injury.
WARNINGIndicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, ifnot avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performancedegradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save yourtime.
NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.
2. General Conventions
Convention Description
Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.
Boldface Names of files,directories,folders,and users are in boldface. Forexample,log in as user root .
Italic Book titles are in italics.
Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.
3. Command Conventions
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italic.
[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.
{x | y | ...} Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by verticalbars.One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets andseparated by vertical bars.One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by verticalbars.A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide About This Document
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
3
Convention Description
[ x | y | ... ] * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by verticalbars.A minimum of zero or a maximum of all can be selected.
4. GUI Conventions
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons,menus,parameters,tabs,window,and dialog titles are inboldface. For example,click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs.For example,choose File > Create > Folder .
5. Keyboard Operation
Convention Description
Key Press the key.For example,press Enter and press Tab.
Key1+Key2 Press the keys concurrently.For example,pressing Ctrl+Alt+Ameans the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Key1,Key2 Press the keys in turn.For example,pressing Alt,A means the twokeys should be pressed in turn.
6. Mouse Operation
Action Description
Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving thepointer.
Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quicklywithout moving the pointer.
Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointerto a certain position.
About This DocumentNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
1 Introduction to NodeB Initial Configuration
About This Chapter
This provides the definition and describes the scenarios, tools, and methods of NodeB initialconfiguration.
1.1 Definition of NodeB Initial ConfigurationNodeB initial configuration is the process of preparing and configuring the data after the NodeBhardware components are installed. The configuration is based on the NodeB hardwarecomponents, network planning, and data negotiation between the NodeB and other equipment.After the configuration, a data configuration file in .xml format is generated.
1.2 NodeB Initial Configuration ScenariosThis describes the scenarios of the NodeB initial configuration.
1.3 NodeB Initial Configuration ToolWRAN CME, a tool for NodeB initial configuration, provides an integrated solution to RANdata configuration. In addition, this tool can be used for initial configuration and datareconfiguration for the NodeB and the RNC.
1.4 NodeB Initial Configuration MethodsThis describes three methods of the NodeB initial configuration. You can perform the NodeBinitial configuration through any of the following methods: Adding a NodeB through a templatefile, adding a NodeB through a configuration file, and manually adding a NodeB. Select anappropriate configuration method depending on the scenario.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 1 Introduction to NodeB Initial Configuration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
1-1
1.1 Definition of NodeB Initial ConfigurationNodeB initial configuration is the process of preparing and configuring the data after the NodeBhardware components are installed. The configuration is based on the NodeB hardwarecomponents, network planning, and data negotiation between the NodeB and other equipment.After the configuration, a data configuration file in .xml format is generated.
The configuration file must meet the following requirements:l The data is intact, correct, and compatible with the physical configuration of the equipment.
l The Iub interface data at the transport layer is consistent with that at the RNC. This ensuresnormal data exchange between the NodeB and the RNC.
1.2 NodeB Initial Configuration ScenariosThis describes the scenarios of the NodeB initial configuration.
The scenarios are as follows:
l A new NodeB is required during the initial phase of network construction.
l A new NodeB is required during network optimization.
NOTE
During network optimization, reconfigure the data in online configuration mode to expand the capacity ofexisting NodeBs. For details about data reconfiguration, refer to RAN Reconfiguration Guide (CME-Based).
1.3 NodeB Initial Configuration ToolWRAN CME, a tool for NodeB initial configuration, provides an integrated solution to RANdata configuration. In addition, this tool can be used for initial configuration and datareconfiguration for the NodeB and the RNC.
The GUI-based CME provides the operating platform for RAN data configuration. For detailson how to use the WRAN CME, refer to the CME User Guide.
1.4 NodeB Initial Configuration MethodsThis describes three methods of the NodeB initial configuration. You can perform the NodeBinitial configuration through any of the following methods: Adding a NodeB through a templatefile, adding a NodeB through a configuration file, and manually adding a NodeB. Select anappropriate configuration method depending on the scenario.
Table 1-1 lists the methods and scenarios of the NodeB initial configuration.
1 Introduction to NodeB Initial ConfigurationNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
1-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 1-1 DBS3800 initial configuration methods and scenarios
Method Scenario
4 Adding a NodeBThrough theTemplate File(Initial)
The actual configuration type is the same as or similar to the templatefile.
5 Adding a NodeBThrough theConfiguration File(Initial)
If you need to configure multiple NodeBs with the same or similarconfigurations, you can create a typical configuration file for aNodeB, and then configure the other NodeBs by modifying theconfiguration file.
6 Manually Addinga NodeB (Initial)
After the template file or configuration file is imported, you arerecommended to manually perform data reconfiguration if required.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 1 Introduction to NodeB Initial Configuration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
1-3
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeBInitial Configuration
About This Chapter
This describes the preparations you must make before configuring initial data to the NodeB. Thepreparations must be based on the network planning, connections with other devices, bandwidthresources, and the NodeB hardware resources.
2.1 NodeB Basic DataThis lists the basic data for configuring logical NodeBs.
2.2 NodeB Equipment Layer DataThis describes the data to be prepared for configuring the NodeB equipment layer.
2.3 NodeB Transport Layer DataThis describes the data to be prepared for configuring the NodeB transport layer in the ATMand the IP mode.
2.4 NodeB Radio Layer DataThis describes the data to be prepared for configuring the NodeB radio layer.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-1
2.1 NodeB Basic DataThis lists the basic data for configuring logical NodeBs.
Table 2-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
NodeB ID NodeB_Id The NodeB ID is automaticallyallocated. You can define the logicalNodeB before configuring it as aphysical NodeB.
1
NetworkplanningName of
the NodeBNodeB_Name
This parameter indicates the name of theNodeB. You are recommended to namethe NodeB according to its geographicallocation.
NodeB_1
Bearer type IubBearerType
Identify the transmission type of the Iubinterface for the RNC. The type mustmatch the type of the interface board atthe RNC. Optional parameters:l ATM_TRANS
l IP_TRANS
l ATMANDIP_TRANS
ATM_TRANS
Negotiation withthedestination
Sharingsupport
SharingSupport
Whether to share NodeB informationOptional parameters:l SHARED: indicates that all network
operators can browse the informationof this logical NodeB and that of thecorresponding physical NodeB.
l NON_SHARED: indicates that onlythe network operator specified by theCnOpIndex parameter can browsethe information of this logical NodeBand the that of the correspondingphysical NodeB
NON_SHARED
Telecomoperatorindex
CnOpIndex This parameter is valid only when theSharingSupport parameter is set toNON_SHARED.Value range: 0 through 3
0
Resourcemanagement mode
RscMngMode
Defines the resource management modewhen the bandwidth is allocatedOptional parameters:l SHARE
l EXCLUSIVE
SHARE
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
ATMAddress
NSAP The NodeB relevant ATM address inhexadecimal format. This parameter isinvalid when IubBearerType is set toIP_TRANS.You need to set the first byte of the ATMaddress to H'45 (indicating an E.164address), H'39 (indicating a DCCaddress) or H'47 (indicating an ICDaddress).If the first byte is H'45, the followingseven and a half bytes (that is, 15 digits)must be a BCD code. If the followingpart, called DSP, are all 0s, this addressis called E.164e. If the DSP are not all0s, this address is called E.164A. TheATM addresses are allocated in theATM network and cannot be repeated.Value range: 42 bytes (including theprefix H')
H'3901010101010101010101010101010101010101
Hybridtransportflag
IPTransApartInd
Identifies whether hybrid transport issupported over the Iub interface. Thisparameter is valid only whenIubBearerType is set to IP_TRANS orATMANDIP_TRANS. Optionalparameters:l SUPPORT
l NOT_SUPPORT
-
Transmission delay onthe Iubinterface
TransDelay Initial round-trip transmission delay onthe Iub interface in ATM circuittransport or IP dedicated transportValue range: 0 through 65535
10
Transmission delay onthe Iubinterface inhybrid IPtransport
IPApartTransDelay
Initial round-trip transmission delay onthe Iub interface in hybrid IP transport.This parameter is valid only whenTransDelay is set to SUPPORT.Value range: 0 through 65535
-
Satellitetransmission indication
SatelliteInd Identifies the satellite transmission onthe Iub interface. Optional parameters:l TRUE
l FALSE
FALSE
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-3
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
NodeBtype
NodeBType
Identifies the type of the logical NodeB.Optional parameters:l NORMAL
l PICO_TYPE1
l PICO_TYPE2
NORMAL
ProtocolVersion
ProtocolVer
Protocol version of the NodeB.Optional parameters:l R99
l R4
l R5
l R6
R6
2.2 NodeB Equipment Layer DataThis describes the data to be prepared for configuring the NodeB equipment layer.
Data of the Physical NodeB
Table 2-2 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Workingmode ofE1/T1links
E1T1WorkMode
The working mode of E1/T1 linksdepends on the state of DIPswitches on the BBU or NUTI andthe configuration file.
E1
Negotiation withthedestination
Clocksource
ClockSource This parameter is valid only whenClockWorkMode is set toMANUAL. Optional parameters:l GPSCARD (GPS card clock
source)l BITS (BITS clock source): The
outdoor BBU (HBBUC) cannotuse this clock source.
l LINE (clock source extractedfrom the Iub interface line)
l IP (IP clock source)
LINE
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Workingmode ofthe clock
ClockWorkMode
Working mode of the system clockOptional parameters:l MANUAL (manual mode): In
this mode, the user specifies theclock source, and automaticallyswitching the system clock toother clock sources is notallowed. Even if the specifiedclock source is faulty, suchswitching is not allowed.
l FREE (free-run mode): Thefree-run mode is the workingmode for the clock source at aninitial phase.
MANUAL
Networkplanning
Workingmode ofthe IPclock
IPClockMode This parameter is valid only whenClockSource is set to IP. Optionalparameters:l AUTO (default value)
l MANUAL (This parameter isconfigured when the IP clock isalready configured.)
-
GPSfeederdelay
GPSCableDelay Delay of the GPS feederValue range: 0 through 1000
0 Internalplanning
SNTPswitch
SNTPSwitch Synchronization switch Optionalparameters:l ON (SNTP client requires time
synchronization)l OFF (SNTP client does not
require time synchronization)
ON Networkplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-5
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
IP addressof theSNTPserver
SNTPServerIP The SNTP server is used tosynchronize the time of multipleSNTP clients, which is importantfor centralized maintenance,especially for alarm management.For example, when an E1 link isdisconnected, the NodeB and theRNC report the alarm at the sametime based on SNTP. This helpsfault locating.The SNTP server of the NodeB canbe either the M2000 or the RNC.l The SNTP server of the NodeB
is the RNC (recommended): setSNTPServerIP to the BAMinternal IP address.
l The SNTP server of the NodeBis the M2000: setSNTPServerIP to the M2000host external IP address.
10.11.1.1 Negotiation withthedestination
Synchronizationperiod
SyncPeriod The period in which nodes aresynchronized.Value range: 1 through 525600
10
Networkplanning
Demodulation mode
DemMode Demodulation mode of the NodeBOptional parameters:l DEM_2_CHAN (two-way
demodulation mode)l DEM_4_CHAN (four-way
demodulation mode)l DEM_ECON_4_CHAN (four-
way economical demodulationmode)
DEM_2_CHAN
High BERthresholdsof E1/T1
HighThreshold Optional parameters:l 1E-3
l 1E-4
l 1E-5
l 1E-6
1E-5
Smoothpowerswitch
SMTHPWRSwitch
Optional parameters:l OPEN
l CLOSE
CLOSE
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Lower andupperlimits oftimersetting
LowerLimit Disabling the lower limit of thetime range for the transmitterValue range: 0 through 255
0
UpperLimit Disabling the upper limit of thetime range for the transmitterValue range: 0 through 255
0
NodeBresourcedistribution mode
ResAllocateRule
Optional parameters:l PERFFIRST (handover
performance priority mode)l CAPAFIRST (capacity priority
mode)
PERFFIRST
NodeB IPaddress
LocalIP IP address of the NodeB for localmaintenance
17.21.2.15
Subnetmask
LocalIPMask Subnet mask of the NodeB IPaddress for local maintenance
255.255.0.0
NMPTbackupmode
NMPTBackupMode
This parameter is available onlyfor the macro NodeB.
ENABLE Internalplanning
STM-1framemode
NAOIFrameMode (macroNodeB)
Frame structure of the optical portchip Optional parameters:l FRAMEMODE_SONET (in
SONET mode)l FRAMEMODE_SDH (in SDH
mode)
-
Negotiation withthedestination
STM1FrameMode (distributedNodeB)
FRAMEMODE_SDH
Management unit
Au This parameter is valid only for thechannelized optical interface.Optional parameters:l AU3
l AU4
AU3
Bypassunit
Tu This parameter is valid only for thechannelized optical interface.Optional parameters:l TU11 (the E1/T1 mode is T1)
l TU12 (the E1/T1 mode is E1)
TU12
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-7
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Power typeof themacroNodeB
PowerType Configuring the power type for theNodeB. This parameter isavailable only for the macroNodeB. Optional parameters:l -48 V DC
l 24 V DC
l 220 V AC
-48 V DC
Internalplanning
Reportswitch forcall historyrecord
CHRSwitch When the NodeB CHR reportswitch is on, the NodeB uploadsthe CHR log to the FTP server thatis at the NodeB side.
OFF
Iubinterfaceboardgroupbackupmode
IUBGroup1 Group backup mode of the Iubinterface board, namely the NDTIor the NUTI, in slots 12 and 13Optional parameters:l REDUNDANCY (active and
standby backup): The boardmust be the NUTI. No sub-board can be added. Only thebaseboard held in slot 12 can beused. The attributes of the boardheld in slot 13 remainunchanged.
l SHARING (load sharing): TheNDTI and NUTI can be insertedin either slot 12 or 13. Both theboard of the baseband subrackand the sub-board can be used.
SHARING
IUBGroup2 Group backup mode of the Iubinterface board, namely the NUTI,in slots 14 and 15 Optionalparameters:l REDUNDANCY (active and
standby backup): No sub-boardcan be added. Only thebaseboard held in slot 14 can beused. The attributes of the boardheld in slot 15 remainunchanged.
l SHARING (load sharing): Onlythe sub-board added to theNUTI held in slots 14 and 15can be used.
SHARING
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Macro NodeB Equipment Layer Data
Table 2-3 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
NMPT NMPT l When the NMPT needs a backup,configure two NMPTs. The activeNMPT is configured in slot 10, andthe standby NMPT is configured inslot 11.
l When the NMPT does not need abackup, configure one NMPT. TheNMPT is configured in slot 10.
If backup isnotrequired,configurethe NMPTin slot 10.
Internalplanning
NodeBmonitoringunit
NMON The NMON controls the RETcontroller and provides Boolean valuemonitoring interfaces such as the 32-line Boolean input interface and 7-lineBoolean output interface.
TheNMON isconfiguredin slot 16.
Baseboard - According to the capacity of the HBBI/NBBI, EBBI/EBOI, HULP/EULP, andHDLP/NDLP and the expected NodeBconfiguration, select applicablebaseband boards.
The HBOIand theEBOI areconfiguredin slots 0and 1.
Transportboards
- Optional parameters:l NDTI: One NDTI provides eight E1/
T1 ports.l NUTI: One NUTI provides eight E1/
T1 ports and two FE ports. If the E1/T1 sub-board is added to the NUTI,the NUTI can provide more E1/T1ports.
The NUTIisconfiguredin slot 13.
Bearermode
BearMode
This parameter is valid only when thetransport board is the NUTI. Optionalparameters:l ATM
l IPV4
IPV4
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-9
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
IP clockswitch
IPClockSwitch
You need to set the IP clock switch onthe NUTI baseboard to ENABLE if youplan to use the FE ports on the NUTIboard to receive the IP clock signals.(This parameter is valid only whenBearMode is set to IPV4.) Optionalparameters:l ENABLE
l DISABLE
ENABLE
Lineimpedance
LineImpedance
Line impedance of the E1 line Optionalparameters:l 75 (E1 working mode)
l 100 (T1 working mode)
l 120 (E1 working mode)
75
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch
This parameter is available when theNUTI is configured or theunchannelized optical sub-board isconfigured on the NUTI. Optionalparameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on
the configured Iub bandwidth andthe bandwidth occupied by R99users, traffic is allocated to HSDPAusers when the physical bandwidthrestriction is taken into account.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL:According to the flow control ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, traffic isallocated to HSDPA users when thedelay and packet loss on the Iubinterface are taken into account. TheRNC uses the R6 switch to performthis function. It is recommended thatthe RNC be used in compliance withthe R6 protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. The RNCallocates the bandwidth according tothe bandwidth on the Uu interfacereported by the NodeB. To performthis function, the reverse flowcontrol switch must be enabled bythe RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 2-4 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
ID of theULbasebandresourcegroup
ULResourceGroupId
l A board that is not added to theUL baseband resource group, thatis, the HBBI/NBBI, EBBI/EBOI,and HULP/EULP, cannot processbaseband services.
l An uplink baseband resourcegroup can process a maximum ofsix cells.
l Insufficient uplink basebandresources may result in a cellsetup failure.
1
Internalplanning
ID of theDLbasebandresourcegroup
DLResourceGroupId
l A board that is not added to theDL baseband resource group, thatis, the HBBI/NBBI, EBBI/EBOI,and HDLP/NDLP, cannot processbaseband services.
l The downlink processing unitswithin the downlink resourcegroup should belong to an uplinkresource group.
l The amount of local cellssupported by the resource groupis determined by the amount andthe specifications of the boardswithin the resource group.
0
Table 2-5 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Chaintype
Chain Type RRU topology structure Optionalparameters:l CHAIN (chain topology)
l RING (ring topology)
CHAIN
Internalplanning
Chain/Ring headsubracknumber
Head SubrackNo.
Number of the subrack that holdsthe head BBU in the chain or ringValue range: 0 through 1
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-11
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Chain/Ring headboardnumber
Head Board No. Number of the slot that holds thehead BBU in the chain or ringOptional parameters:0
0
Head portnumber
Head Port No. Number of the port on the headBBU that is connected to the RRUin the chain or ringValue range: 0 through 2
0
Endsubracknumber
End SubrackNo
Number of the subrack that holdsthe end BBU in the ring. Thisparameter is applicable only to thering topology.Value range: 0 through 1
-
End boardnumber
End Board No Number of the slot that holds theend BBU in the ring. Thisparameter is valid for only the ringtopology.Optional parameters:0
-
End portnumber
End Port No Number of the port on the endBBU that is connected to the RRUin the chain or ring. This parameteris valid for only the ring topology.Value range: 0 through 2
-
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Breakposition 1
Break Position1
This parameter indicates theposition of the first break point.When you add and delete an RRUat a particular position in thecurrent RRU topology (ring orchain), set a break point at thisposition. After the RRU is addedor deleted, delete the break point toresume the data.For RRU chain, only one breakpoint can be set. After the settingof break point, the RRU chain isdivided into two parts:l The first part refers to the
section between the head ofRRU chain and the break point.This part of RRU service is notaffected.
l The second part refers to thepost-break point section of theRRU chain. This part of RRUservice is disrupted because it isin separate status.
OFF
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-13
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Breakposition 2
Break Position2
Second position of the break pointonly for the ring topologyWhen you add and delete an RRUat a particular position in thecurrent RRU topology (ring orchain), set a break point at thisposition. After the RRU is addedor deleted, delete the break point toresume the data.For the RRU ring, two break pointscan be set. After the setting ofbreak point, the RRU chain isdivided into three parts:l The first part refers to the
section between the head the ofRRU ring and the first breakpoint. This part of RRU servicecan be affected.
l The second part refers to thesection between two breakpoints of the RRU ring. Thispart of RRU service is disruptedbecause it is in separate status.
l The third part refers to thesection between the secondbreak point and the end of theRRU ring. This part of RRUservice can be affected.
For the RRU ring, when only onebreak point is set, the actual case isthat two break points are set in thesame position, that is, two breakpoints overlap.
-
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 2-6 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
RFModule
- l In 1 x 1 configuration,configure one RF module.
l In 3 x 1 configuration,configure three RFmodules.
l In 3 x 2 configuration,configure three or six RFmodules.
l In 6 x 1 configuration,configure six RF modules.
Configureeither theRRU or theWRFU
Networkplanning
RRU name RRUName Name of the MRRU Name
Internalplanning
RRU chainnumber
RRUChainNo This parameter indicates thenumber of the chain to whichthe RRU is connected.Value range: 0 through 249
0
RRUnumber
RRUNo The TRUNK positionindicates that the RRU is atthe cascaded position of themain chain or ring. TheBRANCH position indicatesthat the RRU is at thecascaded position where theparent node is located. Theparent node refers to theRHUB.Value range: 0 through 7
2
Boardstatus
BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRUOptional parameters:l Block
l Unblock
UnBlock
Topologyposition ofthe RRU
ToPoPosition Optional parameters:l TRUNK (in the main ring)
l BRANCH (under theRHUB node)
TRUNK Networkplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-15
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Initialcorrectionvalue forthe RTWP
RTWPofCarrierCarriernumberonRxRX channelnumber
Set the initial correctionvalue for the RTWP of thecarrier and TX channelspecified by the RRU. Valuerange:l Number of Carrier: 0 to 3
(MRRU/WRFU), 0 to 1(PRRU)
l RX channel number:0 to 1
l Initial correction value forthe RTWP: -130 to +130,unit: 0.1 dB
0
RRU IFoffset
IFOffset Offset direction of theIntermediate Frequency (IF)filter Optional parameters:l BOTTOM: Offset to
bottom, that is, to theminimum value (Theinterference signalfrequency is greater thanor equal to the currentreceive frequency.)
l MIDDLE: Offset tomiddle, that is, no offset(no interference)
l TOP: Offset to top, that is,to the maximum value(The interference signalfrequency is smaller thanthe current receivefrequency.)
l MINUS_50M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l PLUS_50M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l MINUS_75M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l PLUS_75M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
MIDDLE
Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRUValue range: -100 through+1000
0
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Vertical Vertical Vertical position of the RRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of theRRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Table 2-7 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
RRU name RRUName Name of the MRRU Name
Internalplanning
RRU chainnumber
RRUChainNo This parameter indicates thenumber of the chain to whichthe RRU is connected.Value range: 0 through 249
0
RRUnumber
RRUNo The TRUNK positionindicates that the RRU is atthe cascaded position of themain chain or ring. TheBRANCH position indicatesthat the RRU is at thecascaded position where theparent node is located. Theparent node refers to theRHUB.Value range: 0 through 7
2
Boardstatus
BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRUOptional parameters:l Block
l Unblock
UnBlock
Topologyposition ofthe RRU
ToPoPosition Optional parameters:l TRUNK (in the main
ring)l BRANCH (under the
RHUB node)
TRUNK Networkplanning
Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRUValue range: -100 through+1000
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-17
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Vertical Vertical Vertical position of the RRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of theRRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Equipment Layer Data of the Distributed NodeB
Table 2-8 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
ID of theULbasebandresourcegroup
ULResourceGroupId
l A board such as the HBBU or theHBBUC that is not added to theUL baseband resource groupcannot process baseband services.
l An uplink baseband resourcegroup can process a maximum ofsix cells.
l Insufficient uplink basebandresources may result in a cellsetup failure.
1
Internalplanning
ID of theDLbasebandresourcegroup
DLResourceGroupId
l A board such as the HBBU or theHBBUC that is not added to theUL baseband resource groupcannot process baseband services.
l The downlink processing unitswithin the downlink resourcegroup should belong to an uplinkresource group.
l The amount of local cellssupported by the resource groupis determined by the amount andthe specifications of the boardswithin the resource group.
0
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 2-9 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Boardstatus
BoardStatus Blocking status of the board Optionalparameters:l Block
l Unblock
UnBlock
InternalplanningClock
sourceClockSource8K
E1/T1 ports for extracting the Iubinterface clock signals. Optionalparameters:l None
l Port 0 to port 7
Port 0
Bearermode
BearMode Optional parameters:l ATM: If the bearer mode is ATM,
the IP transport layer cannot usethe E1/T1 ports, that is, you cannotconfigure the PPP or MP links.
l IPv4: If the bearer mode is IPv4,the ATM transport layer cannotuse the E1/T1 ports, that is, youcannot configure the physicallinks.
ATM
Negotiation withthedestination
HSUPAswitch
HSUPA Optional parameters:l ENABLE (The HSUPA is
supported)l DISABLE (The HSUPA is not
supported)
DISABLE
ClockMode
ClockMode For the cascaded NodeBs, the clockof the upper-level NodeB is set toMASTER and that of the lower-levelNodeB is set to SLAVE. If the valueis not specified, the original clockmode is retained. Optionalparameters:l MASTER (primary mode)
l SLAVE (secondary mode)
SLAVE Networkplanning
Line Code LineCode Optional parameters:l HDB3 (for E1 mode)
l AMI (for E1 or T1 mode)
l B8ZS (for T1 mode)
HDB3 Negotiation withthedestination
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-19
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
FrameStructure
FrameStru Optional parameters:l E1_DOUBLE_FRAME (double
frame, for E1 mode)l E1_CRC4_MULTI_FRAME
(CRC-multiframe, for E1 mode)l T1_SUPER_FRAME (super
frame, for T1 mode)l T1_EXTENDED_SUPER_FRA
ME (extended super frame, for T1mode)
E1_CRC4_MULTI_FRAME
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch Optional parameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based
on the configured Iub bandwidthand the bandwidth occupied byR99 users, traffic is allocated toHSDPA users when the physicalbandwidth restriction is taken intoaccount.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow control ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, trafficis allocated to HSDPA users whenthe delay and packet loss on theIub interface are taken intoaccount. The RNC uses the R6switch to perform this function. Itis recommended that the RNC beused in compliance with the R6protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. TheRNC allocates the bandwidthaccording to the bandwidth on theUu interface reported by theNodeB. To perform this function,the reverse flow control switchmust be enabled by the RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Time delaythreshold
HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower thanthis threshold, you can infer that thelink is not congested.Value range:0 to 20
4
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Discardratethreshold
HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frameloss ratio is not higher than thisthreshold.Value range:0 to 1000
1
WorkingMode
WorkMode Optional parameters:l OFF (inhibited mode): indicates
that the port works in inhibitedmode, that is, the port does notdetect the alarms. All ports workin such mode by default.
l Default (default mode): indicatesthat the system detects and reportsthe alarms in default mode. In suchmode, the UE cannot set the alarmID of this port or other parametersrelated to this port. The systemreports alarms based on its ownfixed setting rather than the user-defined setting.
l CUSTOM (customized mode):indicates that the UE can changethe binding relation, that is, thesystem reports the alarm and setthe alarm Bool based on thecustomer specified ID.
OFF
Internalplanning
Alarm ID AlarmId This parameter is valid only whenWorkMode is set to CUSTOM.
-
Alarmvoltage
ALarmVoltage
This parameter is valid only whenWorkMode is set to CUSTOM.Optional parameters:l HIGH (alarms related to high
impedance)l LOW (alarms related to low
impedance)
-
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-21
Table 2-10 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Chaintype
Chain Type RRU topology structure Optionalparameters:l CHAIN (chain topology)
l RING (ring topology)
CHAIN
Internalplanning
Chain/Ring headsubracknumber
Head SubrackNo.
Number of the subrack that holdsthe head BBU in the chain or ringValue range: 0 through 1
0
Chain/Ring headboardnumber
Head Board No. Number of the slot that holds thehead BBU in the chain or ringOptional parameters:0
0
Head portnumber
Head Port No. Number of the port on the headBBU that is connected to the RRUin the chain or ringValue range: 0 through 2
0
Endsubracknumber
End SubrackNo
Number of the subrack that holdsthe end BBU in the ring. Thisparameter is applicable only to thering topology.Value range: 0 through 1
-
End boardnumber
End Board No Number of the slot that holds theend BBU in the ring. Thisparameter is valid for only the ringtopology.Optional parameters:0
-
End portnumber
End Port No Number of the port on the endBBU that is connected to the RRUin the chain or ring. This parameteris valid for only the ring topology.Value range: 0 through 2
-
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Breakposition 1
Break Position1
This parameter indicates theposition of the first break point.When you add and delete an RRUat a particular position in thecurrent RRU topology (ring orchain), set a break point at thisposition. After the RRU is addedor deleted, delete the break point toresume the data.For RRU chain, only one breakpoint can be set. After the settingof break point, the RRU chain isdivided into two parts:l The first part refers to the
section between the head ofRRU chain and the break point.This part of RRU service is notaffected.
l The second part refers to thepost-break point section of theRRU chain. This part of RRUservice is disrupted because it isin separate status.
OFF
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-23
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Breakposition 2
Break Position2
Second position of the break pointonly for the ring topologyWhen you add and delete an RRUat a particular position in thecurrent RRU topology (ring orchain), set a break point at thisposition. After the RRU is addedor deleted, delete the break point toresume the data.For the RRU ring, two break pointscan be set. After the setting ofbreak point, the RRU chain isdivided into three parts:l The first part refers to the
section between the head the ofRRU ring and the first breakpoint. This part of RRU servicecan be affected.
l The second part refers to thesection between two breakpoints of the RRU ring. Thispart of RRU service is disruptedbecause it is in separate status.
l The third part refers to thesection between the secondbreak point and the end of theRRU ring. This part of RRUservice can be affected.
For the RRU ring, when only onebreak point is set, the actual case isthat two break points are set in thesame position, that is, two breakpoints overlap.
-
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 2-11 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
RFModule
- l In 1 x 1 configuration,configure one RF module.
l In 3 x 1 configuration,configure three RFmodules.
l In 3 x 2 configuration,configure three or six RFmodules.
l In 6 x 1 configuration,configure six RFmodules.
Configureeither theRRU or theWRFU
Networkplanning
RRU name RRUName Name of the MRRU Name
Internalplanning
RRU chainnumber
RRUChainNo This parameter indicates thenumber of the chain to whichthe RRU is connected.Value range: 0 through 249
0
RRUnumber
RRUNo The TRUNK positionindicates that the RRU is atthe cascaded position of themain chain or ring. TheBRANCH position indicatesthat the RRU is at thecascaded position where theparent node is located. Theparent node refers to theRHUB.Value range: 0 through 7
2
Boardstatus
BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRUOptional parameters:l Block
l Unblock
UnBlock
Topologyposition ofthe RRU
ToPoPosition Optional parameters:l TRUNK (in the main
ring)l BRANCH (under the
RHUB node)
TRUNK Networkplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-25
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Initialcorrectionvalue forthe RTWP
RTWPofCarrierCarriernumberonRxRXchannel number
Set the initial correctionvalue for the RTWP of thecarrier and TX channelspecified by the RRU. Valuerange:l Number of Carrier: 0 to 3
(MRRU/WRFU), 0 to 1(PRRU)
l RX channel number: 0through 1
l Initial correction value forthe RTWP: -130 to +130,unit: 0.1 dB
0
RRU IFoffset
IFOffset Offset direction of theIntermediate Frequency (IF)filter Optional parameters:l BOTTOM: Offset to
bottom, that is, to theminimum value (Theinterference signalfrequency is greater thanor equal to the currentreceive frequency.)
l MIDDLE: Offset tomiddle, that is, no offset(no interference)
l TOP: Offset to top, that is,to the maximum value(The interference signalfrequency is smaller thanthe current receivefrequency.)
l MINUS_50M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l PLUS_50M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l MINUS_75M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l PLUS_75M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
MIDDLE
Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRUValue range: -100 through+1000
0
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Vertical Vertical Vertical position of the RRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of theRRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Table 2-12 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
RRU name RRUName Name of the MRRU Name
Internalplanning
RRU chainnumber
RRUChainNo This parameter indicates thenumber of the chain to whichthe RRU is connected.Value range: 0 through 249
0
RRUnumber
RRUNo The TRUNK positionindicates that the RRU is atthe cascaded position of themain chain or ring. TheBRANCH position indicatesthat the RRU is at thecascaded position where theparent node is located. Theparent node refers to theRHUB.Value range: 0 through 7
2
Boardstatus
BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRUOptional parameters:l Block
l Unblock
UnBlock
Topologyposition ofthe RRU
ToPoPosition Optional parameters:l TRUNK (in the main
ring)l BRANCH (under the
RHUB node)
TRUNK Networkplanning
Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRUValue range: -100 through+1000
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-27
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Vertical Vertical Vertical position of the RRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of theRRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
ALD Data
Table 2-13 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Antennaconnectornumber
AntennaNo In the 2G extended scenario, thisparameter is unavailable.When dual-polarized RET isconfigured and the value is NOA;when single-polarized RET or STMAis configured, the value is NOA orNOB.
N0A Networkplanning
DeviceName
DeviceName Name of the ALD. The maximumlength is a string of 31 characters.
RET 1 Internalplanning
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Scenario UseCase Scenario of the antenna Optionalparameters:l REGULAR: Regular installation,
that is, only one dual polarizationRET can be installed to anANT_Tx/RxA port, and this RETis controlled through this port.
l SECTOR_SPLITTING: Sectorsplitting, that is, a maximum of sixRETs can be installed to anANT_Tx/RxA port through asplitter, and these RETs arecontrolled through this port.
l DAISY_CHAIN: Antennacascading, that is, a maximum ofsix RETs installed to differentports can be cascaded to anANT_Tx/RxA port throughcontrol signal cables, and theseRETs are controlled through thisport.
l 2G_EXTENSION: 2G extension.The 2G RET is controlled throughthe NodeB. It is an extended modeof cascaded NodeBs.
REGULAR
Networkplanning
Antennapolarization type
RETType When the device type is eitherSINGLE_RET or MULTI_RETsupported by the AISG protocol, thisparameter is valid. Optionalparameters:l In the scenario of antenna
cascaded application, theparameter value can be set to eitherDUAL (dual polarization antenna)or SINGLE (single polarizationantenna).
l In other scenarios other thanantenna cascading, the value ofthis parameter can only be DUAL.
DUAL
Vendorcode
VendorCode Vendor code of the ALD. The lengthis a 2-byte letter or number.For details about the relation betweenthe vendor code and vendor name ofthe ALD, refer to the AISG protocol.
-
Internalplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-29
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Equipment serialnumber
SerialNo Serial number of the ALD. Themaximum length is a 17-byte letter ornumber.
-
Antennasubunitnumber
SubUnit Select different subunit numbersaccording to different antenna devicetypes:l AISG1.1 The subunit number of
STMA can only be 0.l AISG2.0 The subunit number of
STMA and SASU can be 1 or 2.l When multiple antennas support 6
subunits, the subunit numberranges from 1 to 6. When multipleantennas do not support 6 subunits,the subunit number ranges from 1to 2.
l The subunit number for a singleantenna is not displayed, and is 0by default.
0
NetworkplanningAntenna
tilt angleAntTilt Downtilt of the RET antenna
Value range: -100 through +3000
Workingmode ofthe STMA
BypassMode Optional parameters:l NORMAL (normal mode)
l Bypass mode
NORMAL
SASUgain
l GSMGain
l UMTSGain
According to different types ofchannels, the SASU gain can bedivided into the following two types:l GSMGain indicates the SASU
gain in the GSM channel. Valuerange: 0 through 255.
l UMTSGain indicates the SASUgain in the UMTS channel. Valuerange: 0 through 255.
0
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
DC switchon theSASUantennaconnector
DCSwitch DC switch (on the SASU antennaconnector) status When the status isset to GSM, the DC power load of theSASU GSM cannot be started.Optional parameters:l GSM (The GSM feeder supplies
the power)l UMTS (The UMTS feeder
supplies the power)l OFF
UMTS
SASUGSM DCpower load
DCload The DC power load is applied to theTMA that simulates the GSM system.The SASU needs to inform the GSMthat a TMA is connected to the BTSantenna when the UE sets a relativelyhigh gain for the GSM Rx channelthrough the WCDMA NodeB. Theeasiest method is that you add a DCload to the GSM BTS. In thissituation, the GSM BTS is informedof the TMA connected to the antennaby checking the DC power of theantenna.
20
STMAgain
Gain Value range: 0 through 255 0
Data of the Iub Transmission Sharing Function
Table 2-14 Data of the Iub transmission sharing function
Input Data FieldName
Description Source
Source logicalcell ID
SrcCellId Value range: 0through 65535
Network planning
Source FACHID
SrcFachId Value range: 0through 255
Destinationlogical cell ID
DestCellId Value range: 0through 65535
DestinationFACH ID
DestFachId Value range: 0through 255
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-31
2.3 NodeB Transport Layer DataThis describes the data to be prepared for configuring the NodeB transport layer in the ATMand the IP mode.
Transport Layer Data (over ATM)
Table 2-15 Negotiation and planned data of the IMA group and IMA links
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Slot No. SlotNo Number of slot where the NDTI orNUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 holdonly the NUTI)Value range: 12 through 15
14
Internalplanning
Sub-boardtype
SubBdType Type of the sub-board where the E1/T1 port used by the IMA link islocated Optional parameters:l Baseboard
l E1 CoverBoard: E1 coverboard
l Channelled CoverBoard:channelized optical sub-board
ChannelledCoverBoard
IMA groupID
IMAId l When SubBdType is BaseBoard,the value range is 0 through 3.
l When SubBdType is E1CoverBoard, the value range is 0through 3.
l When SubBdType is ChannelledCoverBoard, the value range is 0through 1.
0
Transmitframelength
IMATxFrameLength
Longer transmit frame can enhancetransmission efficiency but reduceserror sensitivity. Therefore, thedefault value is recommended.Optional parameters:l D32
l D64
l D128
l D256
D128
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Minimumactive links
IMAMinActiveLinks
Threshold for identifying theavailability of the IMA group Forexample, if the value is 3, there are atleast three active IMA links in anIMA group and thus this group isavailable. If there are less than threeactive links, the IMA group isunavailable.l When SubBdType is BaseBoard,
the value range is 1 through 8.l When SubBdType is E1
CoverBoard, the value range is 1through 8.
l When SubBdType is ChannelledCoverBoard, the value range is 1through 32.
1
Differential maximumdelay
IMADiffMaxDelay
Different transmission links in anIMA group may result in differenttransmission delays. Thus, there is achange in the relative delay betweenlinks, which is called link differentialdelay. The LODS alarms are reportedwhen the link differential delayoccurs.Value range: 4 through 100
25
Scramblemode
ScrambleMode
Optional parameters:l DISABLE (unavailable, the
scramble mode is disabled)l ENABLE (The scramble mode
must be enabled if the E1/T1transmission uses AMI linecodes.)
ENABLE
Timeslot16 support
TimeSlot16 The channelized optical sub-boarddoes not support this function.Optional parameters:l ENABLE
l DISABLE
After this parameter is enabled, thebandwidth of each IMA link in theIMA group is added by 64 kbit/s.
DISABLE
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-33
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Linknumber
LinkNo Number of the E1/T1 ports for thelinks in an IMA group.l When SubBdType is BaseBoard,
the value range is 0 through 7.l When SubBdType is E1
CoverBoard, the value range is 0through 7.
l When SubBdType is ChannelledCoverBoard, the value range is 0through 62.
0, 1, 2 Negotiation withthedestination
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch
Optional parameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based
on the configured Iub bandwidthand the bandwidth occupied byR99 users, traffic is allocated toHSDPA users when the physicalbandwidth restriction is taken intoaccount.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow control ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, trafficis allocated to HSDPA users whenthe delay and packet loss on theIub interface are taken intoaccount. The RNC uses the R6switch to perform this function. Itis recommended that the RNC beused in compliance with the R6protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. TheRNC allocates the bandwidthaccording to the bandwidth on theUu interface reported by theNodeB. To perform this function,the reverse flow control switchmust be enabled by the RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Internalplanning
Time delaythreshold
HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower thanthis threshold, you can infer that thelink is not congested.Value range: 0 through 20
4
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Discardratethreshold
HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frameloss ratio is not higher than thisthreshold.Value range: 0 through 1000
1
Table 2-16 Negotiation and planned data of the UNI links
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Slot No. SlotNo Number of slot where the NDTIor NUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15hold only the NUTI)Value range: 12 through 15
12
Internalplanning
Sub-boardtype
SubBdType Type of the sub-board where theE1/T1 port is located by the UNIlink Optional parameters:l Baseboard
l E1 CoverBoard: E1coverboard
l Channelled CoverBoard:channelized optical sub-board
BaseBoard
Linknumber
LinkNo Number of the E1/T1 ports forUNI linksl When SubBdType is
BaseBoard, the value range is0 through 7.
l When SubBdType is E1CoverBoard, the value range is0 through 7.
l When SubBdType isChannelled CoverBoard, thevalue range is 0 through 62.
3 Negotiationwith thedestination
Scramblemode
ScrambleMode
Optional parameters:l DISABLE (unavailable, the
scramble mode is disabled)l ENABLE (The scramble mode
must be enabled if the E1/T1transmission uses AMI linecodes.)
ENABLE
Internalplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-35
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Timeslot16 support
TimeSlot16 The channelized optical sub-board does not support thisfunction. Optional parameters:l ENABLE
l DISABLE
After this parameter is enabled,the bandwidth of the UNI link isadded by 64 kbit/s.
DISABLE
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch
Optional parameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL:
Based on the configured Iubbandwidth and the bandwidthoccupied by R99 users, trafficis allocated to HSDPA userswhen the physical bandwidthrestriction is taken intoaccount.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flowcontrol ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL,traffic is allocated to HSDPAusers when the delay andpacket loss on the Iub interfaceare taken into account. TheRNC uses the R6 switch toperform this function. It isrecommended that the RNC beused in compliance with the R6protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: TheNodeB does not allocatebandwidth according to theconfiguration or delay on theIub interface. The RNCallocates the bandwidthaccording to the bandwidth onthe Uu interface reported bythe NodeB. To perform thisfunction, the reverse flowcontrol switch must be enabledby the RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Time delaythreshold
HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower thanthis threshold, you can infer thatthe link is not congested.Value range: 0 through 20
4
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Discardratethreshold
HsdpaDR The link is not congested whenframe loss ratio is not higher thanthis threshold.Value range: 0 through 1000
1
Table 2-17 Negotiation and planned data of the fractional ATM links
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Slot No. SlotNo Number of slot where the NDTI orNUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 holdonly the NUTI)Value range: 12 through 15
13
InternalplanningSub-board
typeSubBdType Type of the sub-board with the E1/
T1 port available for the fractionalATM link Optional parameters:Baseboard
BaseBoard
Port No. E1T1No Number of the E1/T1 port availablefor the fractional ATM linkValue range: 0 through 1
0 Negotiation with thedestination
Linknumber
LinkNo Value range: 0 through 7 1 Internalplanning
Timeslots TSBitMap The fractional ATM link providestimeslots for the 3G equipment. Ifport 0 is configured, the timeslotsmust be reserved for timeslot crossconnection.Value range: TS1 to TS31
TS24 toTS31 Negotiatio
n with thedestination
Scramblemode
ScrambleMode
Optional parameters:l DISABLE (unavailable, the
scramble mode is disabled)l ENABLE (The scramble mode
must be enabled if the E1/T1transmission uses AMI linecodes.)
ENABLE
Internalplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-37
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch Optional parameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based
on the configured Iub bandwidthand the bandwidth occupied byR99 users, traffic is allocated toHSDPA users when the physicalbandwidth restriction is takeninto account.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow controlof SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL,traffic is allocated to HSDPAusers when the delay and packetloss on the Iub interface are takeninto account. The RNC uses theR6 switch to perform thisfunction. It is recommended thatthe RNC be used in compliancewith the R6 protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. TheRNC allocates the bandwidthaccording to the bandwidth onthe Uu interface reported by theNodeB. To perform thisfunction, the reverse flow controlswitch must be enabled by theRNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Time delaythreshold
HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower thanthis threshold, you can infer that thelink is not congested.Value range: 0 through 20
4
Discardratethreshold
HsdpaDR The link is not congested whenframe loss ratio is not higher thanthis threshold.Value range: 0 through 1000
1
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 2-18 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Source slotNo.
SlotNo Number of the slot that holdsthe NDTI or NUTIValue range: 12 through 15
13
Internalplanning
Sourceport No.
PortNo Number of the source E1/T1ports for timeslot cross linksValue range: 2 through 3
3
Sourcetimeslots
TSBitMap Value range: TS1 to TS31 TS16 to TS23
Destination slot No.
DestSlotNo
Number of the slot that holdsthe NDTI or NUTI (Thenumber must be identicalwith that of the SlotNo)Value range: 12 through 15
13
Destination port No.
DestPortNo
Number of the destinationE1/T1 ports for timeslotcross linksValue range: 0
0
Table 2-19 Negotiation and planned data of the SDT CES
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type Type Type of the interface that carries theSDT CES channels Optionalparameters:l FRAATM
l IMA
l UNI
l STM1
FRAATM
Internalplanning
Source slotNo.
PortNo Number of the slot that holds the NDTIValue range: 12 through 13
12
Sourcesub-boardtype
SubBdType
Type of the sub-board where thesource E1/T1 port is located by theSDT CES channel Optionalparameters: Baseboard
BaseBoard
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-39
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Source portNo.
PortNo Number of the source E1/T1 ports forthe SDT CES channelValue range: 0 through 1
0
Partial filllevel
PFL ATM cell has 48-byte payloads.Except for the first byte, the other 47bytes can be used to transmit timeslotsignals. Each timeslot occupies onebyte. The number of filling bytes isthat of valid bytes filled in each ATMcell.Value range: 4 through 47, and thevalue should be greater than thenumber of selected timeslots exceptfor slot 0.
47
Timeslots TSBitMap Timeslot 0 is unavailable.Value range: TS1 to TS31
TS1 toTS7
Destination slot No.
SlotNo Number of slot where the NDTI orNUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 holdonly the NUTI)Value range: 12 through 15
13
Destination sub-board type
SubBdType
Type of the sub-board where thedestination E1/T1 port is located bythe SDT CES channel Optionalparameters:l Baseboard
l E1 CoverBoard: E1 coverboard
l Channelled CoverBoard:channelized optical sub-board
l Unchannelled CoverBoard:unchannelized optical sub-board
BaseBoard
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Destination port No.
E1T1No Number of the destination E1/T1 portfor the SDT CES channel (Thisparameter is valid only when Type isset to FRAATM or UNI).l When Type is set to FRAATM and
SubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is BaseBoard, the value rangeis 0 through 7.
l When Type is set to UNI andSubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is BaseBoard or E1CoverBoard, the value range is 0through 7.
l When Type is set to UNI andSubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is Channelled CoverBoard,the value range is 0 through 62.
0
Link No./IMA ID
LinkNo/IMAId
Number of the fractional ATM or UNIlink, of the IMA group, or of the STM1optical port that carries the SDT CESchannel.l When Type is set to FRAATM and
SubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is BaseBoard, the value rangeis 0 through 7.
l When Type is set to UNI andSubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is BaseBoard or E1CoverBoard, the value range is 0through 7.
l When Type is set to UNI andSubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is Channelled CoverBoard,the value range is 0 through 62.
l When Type is set to IMA andSubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is BaseBoard or E1CoverBoard, the value range is 0through 3.
l When Type is set to IMA andSubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is Channelled CoverBoard,the value range is 0 through 1.
l When Type is STM1, the valuerange is 0 through 1.
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-41
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Virtualchannelidentifier
VPI Identifier of the virtual channel for theSDT CES channel.Value range: 0 through 31 (sixsuccessive values from 0 to 31)
1
Virtualchannelidentifier
VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for theSDT CES channel.l When the interface board is the
NDTI, the value range is 32 through255.
l When the interface board is theNUTI, the value range is 32 through127.
32
Table 2-20 Negotiation and planned data of the UDT CES
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type Type Type of the interface that carries theUDT CES channel Optionalparameters:l IMA
l STM1
IMA
Internalplanning
Source slotNo.
PortNo Number of the slot that holds the NDTIValue range: 12 through 13
12
Sourcesub-boardtype
SubBdType
Type of the sub-board where thesource E1/T1 port is located by theUDT CES channel Optionalparameters: Baseboard
BaseBoard
Source portNo.
PortNo Number of the source E1/T1 ports forthe UDT CES channelValue range: 0 through 1
1
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Partial filllevel
PFL The value of the partial fill levelaffects both the transmissionbandwidth and the transmission delay.When the value reaches the maximumof 47, the transmission bandwidth isnot affected, and the transmissiondelay reaches the maximum value;when the value is smaller than 47, thetransmission bandwidth equals to theoriginal transmission bandwidth x (53/PFL), and the transmission delay isreduced. In order not to affect thetransmission bandwidth, set thedefault value to 47.Value range: 4 through 47
47
Tx ClockMode
TxClockMode
Optional parameters:l NOACM (non-adaptive clock
mode)l NOACM (adaptive clock mode)
ACM
Destination slot No.
SlotNo Number of slot where the NDTI orNUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 holdonly the NUTI)Value range: 12 through 15
14
Destination sub-board type
SubBdType
Type of the sub-board where thedestination E1/T1 port is located bythe UDT CES channel Optionalparameters:l Baseboard
l E1 CoverBoard: E1 coverboard
l Channelled CoverBoard:channelized optical sub-board
l Unchannelled CoverBoard:unchannelized optical sub-board
ChannelledCoverBoard
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-43
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Opticalport No./IMA ID
LinkNo/IMAId
Number of the IMA group or STM1optical port that carries the UDT CESchannel.l When Type is set to IMA and
SubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is BaseBoard or E1CoverBoard, the value range is 0through 3.
l When Type is set to IMA andSubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is Channelled CoverBoard,the value range is 0 through 1.
l When Type is STM1, the valuerange is 0 through 1.
0
Virtualchannelidentifier
VPI Identifier of the virtual channel for theUDT CES channel.Value range: 0 through 31 (sixsuccessive values from 0 to 31)
1
Virtualchannelidentifier
VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for theUDT CES channel.l When the interface board is the
NDTI, the value range is 32 through255.
l When the interface board is theNUTI, the value range is 32 through127.
32
Table 2-21 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over ATM)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Port type Type Type of the interface that carries thetransmission resource group Optionalparameters:l FRAATM
l IMA
l UNI
l STM1
IMA
Internalplanning
Resourcegroupnumber
RscgrpNo Value range: 0 through 3 1
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Transmitbandwidth
TxBandwidth
The transmit bandwidth of the resourcegroup cannot exceed the bandwidth ofthe port to which the resource groupbelong.Value range: 32 through 15800
5000
Receivebandwidth
RxBandwidth
Receive bandwidth of the resourcegroup.Value range: 30 through 20000
5000
Table 2-22 Negotiation and planned data of the SAAL links
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Port type Type Type of the interface that carries theSAAL links Optional parameters:l FRAATM
l IMA
l UNI
l STM1
IMA
Negotiation withthedestination
Virtualchannelidentifier
VPI Identifier of the virtual channel for theSAAL links.Value range:l Macro NodeB: 0 through 31 (six
successive values from 0 to 31)l Distributed NodeB: 0 through 29
1
Virtualchannelidentifier
VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for theSAAL links.Value range:l Macro NodeB: 32 through 255
(NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI)l Distributed NodeB: 32 through 127
34
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-45
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Servicetype
ServiceType
When this parameter is set to CBR orUBR, you need to set only theparameter PCR; when this parameteris set to RTVBR or NRTVBR, youneed to set parameters SCR and PCR;when this parameter is set to UBR+,you need to set parameters PCR andMCR.Optional parameters:l CBR (applicable to the CES
channel)l RTVBR (applicable to services
carried on the AAL2 path)l NRTVBR (applicable to services
carried on the AAL5 path)l UBR+ (unspecified bit rate,
provides cell rate guarantee)l UBR (unspecified bit rate)
RTVBR
Peak cellrate
PCR Peak cell rate of the ATM channelWhen the service type is RTVBR,NRTVBR or UBR+, the value of thisparameter should be greater than thatof the SCR or MCR.l When the service type is CBR or
UBR, the value range is 30 to 6760.l When the service type is RTVBR,
NRTVBR or UBR+, the value rangeis 31 to 6760.
200
Minimumcell rate
MCR The value of the MCR of the ATMchannel should be smaller than that ofthe PCR. This parameter is valid onlywhen the service type is UBR+.Value range: 30 through 6759
-
Sustainablecell rate
SCR The value of the SCR of the ATMchannel should be smaller than that ofthe PCR. This parameter is valid onlywhen the service type is RTVBR orNRTVBRValue range: 30 through 6759
180
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Join theresourcegroup
JoinRscgrp Specify whether this link should beadded to the resource group. Optionalparameters:l DISABLE
l ENABLE
ENABLE
Internalplanning
Resourcegroupnumber
RscgrpNo Number of the ATM transmissionresource groupValue range: 0 through 3
1
Table 2-23 Negotiation and planned data of the NBAP
Input Data FieldName
Description Example
Source
NCP
Port type PortType Optional parameters:l NCP
l CCP
NCPInternalplanning
SAALnumber
SAALNo SAAL number that carries theNCPValue range: 0 through 63
1 Negotiation withthedestination
Flag Flag Master/slave flag for thetransmission channels Optionalparameters:l SLAVE
l MASTER
MASTER
Internalplanning
CCP
Port type PortType Optional parameters:l NCP
l CCP
CCPInternalplanning
Port No. PortNo Number of the CCP port. Thisparameter is valid only whenPortType is set to CCP.Value range: 0 through 65535
0
Negotiation withthedestination
SAALnumber
SAALNo SAAL number that carries theCCPValue range: 0 through 63
2
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-47
Input Data FieldName
Description Example
Source
Flag Flag Master/slave flag for thetransmission channels Optionalparameters:l SLAVE
l MASTER
MASTER
Internalplanning
Table 2-24 Negotiation and planned data of the ALCAP
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Node type NodeType The exchange node must be configuredbefore configuring the adjacent node.The exchange node cannot be carried onthe SAAL link on the NDTI. Optionalparameters:l LOCAL (peer node)
l HUB (switch node, indicating thatthe NodeB has a lower-level NodeB)
l ADJNODE (adjacent node,indicating the lower-level NodeB)
LOCAL
Internalplanning
Adjacentnodeidentifier
ANI Identify an adjacent node. Thisparameter is valid only when theparameter NodeType is set toADJNODE.Value range: 0 through 31
-
Networkserviceaccesspoint
NSAP The full name is: Net service accesspoint.When the NodeB uses ATMtransmission, the NSAP is the addressof the NodeB that is connected to theAAL2 path. The address is ahexadecimal with a length of 20 bytes(excluding the prefix H').
H'3901010101010101010101010101010101010101
SAALnumber
SAALNo SAAL number that carries the ALCAPValue range: 0 through 63
3
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 2-25 Negotiation and planned data of the AAL2 PATH
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type Type Type of the interface that carries theAAL2 PATH Optional parameters:l FRAATM
l IMA
l UNI
l STM1
IMA
Negotiation withthedestination
PATH type PathType Type of the AAL2 path, whichindicates the desired service typecarried on the path. Optionalparameters: RT, NRT, HSPA_RT,HSPA_NRT
RT
Virtualchannelidentifier
VPI Identifier of the virtual channel for theAAL2 path.Value range:l Macro NodeB: 0 through 31 (six
successive values from 0 to 31)l Distributed NodeB: 0 through 29
1
Virtualchannelidentifier
VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for theAAL2 path.Value range:l Macro NodeB: 32 through 255
(NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI)l Distributed NodeB: 32 through 127
37
Servicetype
ServiceType
Optional parameters:l CBR (applicable to the CES
channel)l RTVBR (applicable to services
carried on the AAL2 path)l NRTVBR (applicable to services
carried on the AAL5 path)l UBR+ (unspecified bit rate,
provides cell rate guarantee)l UBR (unspecified bit rate)
RTVBR
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-49
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Peak cellrate
PCR Peak cell rate of the ATM channelWhen the service type is RTVBR,NRTVBR or UBR+, the value of thisparameter should be greater than that ofthe SCR. This parameter should be oneof the bandwidth parameters for thetransmission direction.l When the sub-board type is
BaseBoard, and the service type isCBR or UBR, the value range is 30through 15800.
l When the sub-board type isChannelled CoverBoard orUnchannelled CoverBoard, and theservice type is RTVBR,NRTVBR,or UBR+, the value rangeis 31 through 15800.
1920
Sustainable cell rate
SCR The value of the SCR of the ATMchannel should be smaller than that ofthe PCR. This parameter is valid onlywhen the service type is RTVBR orNRTVBRThis parameter should beone of the bandwidth parameters for thetransmission direction.l When sub-board type is BaseBoard,
the value range is 30 through 15799.l When the sub-board type is
Channelled CoverBoard orUnchannelled CoverBoard, thevalue range is 30 through 6759.
960
Receivedcell rate
RCR This parameter must be consistent withthe downlink bandwidth configured bythe RNC. This parameter acts as animportant factor in flow control by theNodeB receive bandwidth. Whether ornot this parameter is correctlyconfigured will affect the effect of flowcontrol.Value range: 64 through 20000
2048
Join theresourcegroup
JoinRscgrp Specify whether AAL2 path should beadded to the resource group. Optionalparameters:l DISABLE
l ENABLE
ENABLE
Internalplanning
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Resourcegroupnumber
RscgrpNo Number of the ATM transmissionresource groupValue range: 0 through 3
1
Table 2-26 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (ATM)
Input Data FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type Type Type of the interface that carries theOMCH Optional parameters:l FRAATM
l IMA
l UNI
l STM1
UNI
Negotiation withthedestination
Virtualchannelidentifier
VPI Virtual channel for the OMCHValue range:l Macro NodeB: 1 or within the VPI
range of the actual boardconfiguration
l Distributed NodeB: 0 through 29
1
Virtualchannelidentifier
VCI Virtual channel for the OMCHValue range:l Macro NodeB: 32 through 255
(NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI)l Distributed NodeB: 32 through 127
33
Service type ServiceType
Optional parameters:l CBR (applicable to the CES
channel)l RTVBR (applicable to services
carried on the AAL2 path)l NRTVBR (applicable to services
carried on the AAL5 path)l UBR+ (unspecified bit rate,
provides cell rate guarantee)l UBR (unspecified bit rate)
CBR
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-51
Input Data FieldName
Description Example Source
Peak cellrate
PCR Peak cell rate of the ATM channelWhen the service type is RTVBR,NRTVBR or UBR+, the value of thisparameter should be greater than that ofthe SCR.l When the service type is CBR or
UBR, the value range is 30 to 6760.l When the service type is RTVBR,
NRTVBR or UBR+, the value rangeis 31 to 6760.
512
Sustainablecell rate
SCR The value of the SCR of the ATMchannel should be smaller than that ofthe PCR. This parameter is valid onlywhen the service type is RTVBR orNRTVBRValue range: 30 through 6759
-
Local IPaddress ofthe OMCH
LocalIP IP address for NodeB remotemaintenance
10.1.2.10
DestinationIP addressof theOMCH
DestIP Destination IP address for NodeBremote maintenance, that is, the IPaddress configured on the ATMinterface board at the RNC.
10.1.2.1
Destinationsubnet maskof theOMCH
DestIPMask
Subnet mask of the destination IPaddress for NodeB remote maintenance
255.255.255.0
Join theresourcegroup
JoinRscgrp Specify whether AAL2 path should beadded to the resource group. Optionalparameters:l DISABLE
l ENABLE
ENABLE
Internalplanning
Resourcegroupnumber
RscgrpNo Number of the ATM transmissionresource groupValue range: 0 through 3
2
Flag Flag Master/slave flag for the remote OMchannels Optional parameters:l SLAVE
l MASTER
MASTER
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 2-27 Negotiation and planned data of the treelink PVC
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
Source porttype
SourceType Type of the interface that carries thesource port of the treelink PVCOptional parameters:l FRAATM
l IMA
l UNI
l STM1
FRAATM
Internalplanning
Destination port type
DestinationType
Type of the interface that carries thedestination port of the treelink PVCOptional parameters:l FRAATM
l IMA
l UNI
l STM1
UNI
ByPassMode
ByPassMode When the NodeB is powered off orexceptions occur to the NodeB, theE1/T1 can be connected to the lowernode by switching to theByPassMode. The treelink PVC is setusing the ByPassMode that thusguarantees the connection betweenthe lower node and the RNC. Optionalparameters:l DISABLE (disable the
ByPassMode)l ENABLE (enable the
ByPassMode)
DISABLE
Source VPI SourVPI Virtual channel used by the upperlevel network linkl For the VP switching, the source
port VPI must be beyond the VPIconfigured to the board, and thevalue cannot be 1.
l For the VC switching, the sourceport VPI must be within the VPIconfigured to the board, and thevalue can be 1.
l For the VC switching, the SourVPIand the DestVPI must meet theconditions of the source board andthe destination board respectively.
1
Negotiation withthedestination
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-53
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
SourceVCI
SourVCI Identifier of the virtual channel for theupper-level links. This parameter isvalid for VC switching.l For the macro NodeB, the value
range is 32 through 255 (NDTI) or32 through 127 (NUTI)
l For the distributed NodeB, thevalue range is 32 through 127
33
Destination VPI
DestVPI Virtual channel used by the lower-level network linkl For the VP switching, the
destination port VPI must bebeyond the VPI configured to theboard, and the value cannot be 1.
l For the VC switching, thedestination port VPI must be withinthe VPI configured to the board,and the value can be 1.
l For the VC switching, the SourVPIand the DestVPI must meet theconditions of the source board andthe destination board respectively.
1
Destination VCI
DestVCI Identifier of the virtual channel for thelower-level links. This parameter isvalid for VC switching.l For the macro NodeB, the value
range is 32 through 255 (NDTI) or32 through 127 (NUTI)
l For the distributed NodeB, thevalue range is 32 through 127
32
Servicetype
ServiceType Optional parameters:l RTVBR
l NRTVBR
l UBR (unspecified bit rate)
l UBR+ (unspecified bit rate,provides cell rate guarantee)
RTVBR
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
Peak cellrate
PCR Peak cell rate of the ATM channelWhen the service type is RTVBR,NRTVBR or UBR+, the value of thisparameter should be greater than thatof the SCR.l When the service type is UBR, the
value range is 30 to 6760.l When the service type is RTVBR,
NRTVBR or UBR+, the valuerange is 31 to 6760.
400
Sustainable cell rate
SCR The value of the SCR of the ATMchannel should be smaller than that ofthe PCR. This parameter is valid onlywhen the service type is RTVBR orNRTVBRValue range: 30 through 6759
380
Transport Layer Data (over IP)
Table 2-28 Negotiation and planned data of the ppp links
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Slot No. SlotNo Number of the slot that holds theNUTIValue range: 12 through 15
13
Internalplanning
Port No. PortNo Number of the E1/T1 ports for PPPlinksValue range: 0 through 7
0
Linknumber
LinkNo Each PPP link and each MLPPP linkmust have a unique number.Value range: 0 through 15
0
Authentication type
AuthType Optional parameters:l NONAUTH (without
authentication)l PAP (with PAP authentication)
l CHAP (with CHAPauthentication)
NONAUTH
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-55
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
User name UserName When AuthType is not set toNONAUTH, this field is mandatory,otherwise, the authentication fails.Value range: not greater than 64characters
-
Timeslotmap
TSBitMap A map of the timeslots for PPP links.The map is presented in binaryformat or the chart. If a timeslot isselected, it is in use. Otherwise, it isnot in use.
TS1 toTS15
Negotiation withthedestination
Local IPaddress
LocalIP Local IP address of the PPP link.When the value is 0.0.0.0, it indicatesthat the parameter needs to benegotiated with the RNC.
17.17.17.111
Destination IPaddress
PeerIP Destination IP address of the PPPlinkl In cascading mode, this parameter
specifies the IP address of a lower-level cascaded node.
l In non-cascading mode, when thevalue is 0, it indicates that theparameter needs to be negotiatedwith an upper-level node.
17.17.17.17
IP headercompression
IPHC Optional parameters:l DISABLE: The IP header of the
peer end is not compressed.l ENABLE: The UDP/IP header of
the peer end is compressed.
ENABLE
Internalplanning
PPPmultiframemultiplexing
PPPMux Optional parameters:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
DISABLE
Maximumreceivedunit
MRU Expected value sent from the peerendValue range: 128 through 1500
1500
Restarttimer ofpacketrequestresponse
RestartTimer Value range: 1 through 65535 3000
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Protocolfieldcompress
PFC Optional parameters:l ENABLE
l DISABLE
ENABLE
Address &controlfieldcompress
ACFC Optional parameters:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
ENABLE
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch Optional parameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based
on the configured Iub bandwidthand the bandwidth occupied byR99 users, traffic is allocated toHSDPA users when the physicalbandwidth restriction is taken intoaccount.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow control ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, trafficis allocated to HSDPA users whenthe delay and packet loss on theIub interface are taken intoaccount. The RNC uses the R6switch to perform this function. Itis recommended that the RNC beused in compliance with the R6protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. TheRNC allocates the bandwidthaccording to the bandwidth on theUu interface reported by theNodeB. To perform this function,the reverse flow control switchmust be enabled by the RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Time delaythreshold
HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower thanthis threshold, you can infer that thelink is not congested.Value range: 0 through 20
4
Discardratethreshold
HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frameloss ratio is not higher than thisthreshold.Value range: 0 through 1000
1
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-57
Table 2-29 Negotiation and planned data of the MLPPP group and MLPPP links
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
Slot No. SlotNo Number of the slot that holds theNUTIValue range: 12 through 15
13
Internalplanning
MLPPPgroupnumber
GroupNo MLPPP group numberValue range: 0 through 3
0
Authentication type
AuthType Optional parameters:l NONAUTH (without
authentication)l PAP (with PAP authentication)
l CHAP (with CHAP authentication)
NONAUTH
User name UserName When AuthType is not set toNONAUTH, this field is mandatory,otherwise, the authentication fails.Value range: not greater than 64characters
-
Local IPaddress
LocalIP Local IP address of the MLPPP group 16.16.16.111
Negotiation withthedestination
Localsubnetmask
LocalMask Subnet mask of the local IP address forthe MLPPP group
255.255.255.0
Destination IPaddress
PeerIP Peer IP address of the MLPPP group 16.16.16.16
Port No. PortNo Number of the E1/T1 ports forMLPPP linksValue range: 0 through 7
0
Internalplanning
Linknumber
LinkNo Number of the MLPPP link that joinsthe MLPPP group. Each MLPPP andeach PPP link must have a uniquenumber.Value range: 0 through 15
1
Timeslotmap
TSBitMap A map of the timeslots for MLPPPlinks. The map is presented in binaryformat or the chart. If a timeslot isselected, it is in use. Otherwise, it isnot in use.
TS24 toTS31
Negotiation withthedestination
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
IP headercompression
IPHC Optional parameters:l DISABLE: The IP header of the
peer end is not compressed.l ENABLE: The UDP/IP header of
the peer end is compressed.
ENABLE
Internalplanning
PPPmultiframemultiplexing
PPPMux Optional parameters:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
DISABLE
Multi-classPPP
MCPPP Optional parameters:l ENABLE (using the MCPPP)
l DISABLE (not using the MCPPP)
ENABLE
Maximumreceivedunit
MRU Expected value sent from the peer endValue range: 128 through 1500
1500
Restarttimer ofpacketrequestresponse
RestartTimer Value range: 1 through 65535 3000
Protocolfieldcompress
PFC Optional parameters:l ENABLE
l DISABLE
ENABLE
Address &controlfieldcompress
ACFC Optional parameters:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
ENABLE
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-59
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch Optional parameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on
the configured Iub bandwidth andthe bandwidth occupied by R99users, traffic is allocated to HSDPAusers when the physical bandwidthrestriction is taken into account.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL:According to the flow control ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, traffic isallocated to HSDPA users when thedelay and packet loss on the Iubinterface are taken into account.The RNC uses the R6 switch toperform this function. It isrecommended that the RNC be usedin compliance with the R6 protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. TheRNC allocates the bandwidthaccording to the bandwidth on theUu interface reported by theNodeB. To perform this function,the reverse flow control switchmust be enabled by the RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Time delaythreshold
HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than thisthreshold, you can infer that the link isnot congested.Value range: 0 through 20
4
Discardratethreshold
HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frameloss ratio is not higher than thisthreshold.Value range: 0 through 1000
1
Table 2-30 Negotiation and planned data of the PPPoE links
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Slot No. SlotNo Number of the slot that holds the NUTIValue range: 12 through 15
13 Internalplanning
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-60 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Port No. PortNo Number of the FE port for the PPPoElinkValue range: 0 through 1
0
Authentication type
AuthType Optional parameters:l NONAUTH (without authentication)
l PAP (with PAP authentication)
l CHAP (with CHAP authentication)
NONAUTH
User name UserName This parameter is valid only whenAuthType is set to PAP or CHAP.Value range: not greater than 64characters
-
Local IPaddress
LocalIP Local IP address of the PPPoE link 12.3.0.1 Negotiation withthedestination
Localsubnetmask
LocalMask Subnet mask of the local IP address 255.255.255.0
IP headercompression
IPHC Optional parameters:l DISABLE: The IP header of the peer
end is not compressed.l ENABLE: The UDP/IP header of the
peer end is compressed.
ENABLE
Internalplanning
Maximumreceivedunit
MRU Expected value sent from the peer endValue range: 128 through 1500
1450
Restarttimer ofpacketrequestresponse
RestartTimer
Value range: 1 through 65535 3000
PPPmultiframemultiplexing
PPPMux Optional parameters:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
DISABLE
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-61
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch
Optional parameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on
the configured Iub bandwidth and thebandwidth occupied by R99 users,traffic is allocated to HSDPA userswhen the physical bandwidthrestriction is taken into account.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL:According to the flow control ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, traffic isallocated to HSDPA users when thedelay and packet loss on the Iubinterface are taken into account. TheRNC uses the R6 switch to performthis function. It is recommended thatthe RNC be used in compliance withthe R6 protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. The RNCallocates the bandwidth according tothe bandwidth on the Uu interfacereported by the NodeB. To performthis function, the reverse flow controlswitch must be enabled by the RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Time delaythreshold
HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than thisthreshold, you can infer that the link isnot congested.Value range: 0 through 20
4
Discardratethreshold
HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frameloss ratio is not higher than thisthreshold.Value range: 0 through 1000
1
Table 2-31 Negotiation and planned data of the DEVIP
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Slot No. SlotNo Number of the slot that holds the NUTIValue range: 12 through 15
13 Internalplanning
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-62 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Port No. PortNo l For the PPP link, the MLPPP group,and the PPPoE link, PortNorepresents the port number for theconfigured PPP link, the MLPPPgroup, and the PPPoE link.
l For the ETH link, the port valueranges from 0 to 1.
0
Port type PortType The port types consist of the followingitems:l ETH: indicates the available FE port
on the NUTI.l MLPPP: indicates the configured
MLPPP group.l PPP: indicates the configured PPP
link.l PPPoE: indicates the configured
PPPoE link.
ETH
Local IPaddress
LocalIP Local IP address of the device IP 12.11.12.12 Negotiati
on withthedestination
Subnetmask of thelocal IPaddress
LocalMask If the network is not divided intosubnets, use the default mask.
255.255.255.0
Table 2-32 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Source slotNo.
SlotNo Number of the slot that holdsthe NUTIValue range: 12 through 15
13
Internalplanning
Sourceport No.
PortNo Number of the source E1/T1ports for timeslot cross linksValue range: 2 through 3
2
Sourcetimeslots
TSBitMap Value range: TS1 to TS31 TS16 to TS23
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-63
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Destination slot No.
DestSlotNo
Number of the slot that holdsthe NUTI (The number mustbe identical with that of theSlotNo)Value range: 12 through 15
13
Destination port No.
DestPortNo
Number of the destinationE1/T1 ports for timeslotcross linksValue range: 0
0
Table 2-33 Negotiation and planned data of the IP route
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
Port type ItfType Interface type of the route Optionalparameters:l ETH
l MLPPP
l PPP
l PPPoE
ETH
Networkplanning
Destination network
DestNet This parameter must meet all thefollowing requirements: Validnetwork address, except the defaultroute 0.0.0.0 IP AND mask must beequal to the IP address.
17.18.17.0
Destination mask
DestMask This parameter must meet all thefollowing requirements: IP ANDmask must be equal to the IP address.If the mask is converted into binaryvalue, 0 is not allowed to precede 1.
255.255.255.0
Next hopIP address
NextHop This parameter is valid only when theparameter InsertFlag is set to ETH.This parameter meets the followingrequirements:l Stays on the same network segment
as the LocalIP of the bearer link.l Has valid IP address of classes A,
B, and C.l The value cannot be
255.255.255.255.
12.11.12.1
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-64 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 2-34 Negotiation and planned data of the SCTP links
Input Data FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type ItfType Type of the interface that carries theSCTP links Optional parameters:l ETH
l MLPPP
l PPP
l PPPoE
PPP Internalplanning
Local IPaddress
LocalIP At the NodeB, the IP address of theprimary physical link that carries theSCTP link.
17.17.17.111
Negotiation with thedestination
DestinationIP address
DestIP At the RNC, the IP address of theprimary physical link that carries theSCTP link.
14.1.1.4
The secondlocal IPaddress
SecLocalIP At the NodeB, the IP address of thestandby physical link that carries theSCTP link.The IP address 0.0.0.0 indicates thatthis address is not in use.
0.0.0.0
The seconddestinationIP address
SecDestIP At the RNC, the IP address of thestandby physical link that carries theSCTP link.The IP address 0.0.0.0 indicates thatthis address is not in use.
0.0.0.0
Local portnumber anddestinationport number
LocalPort Local port number of the SCTPValue range: 1024 through 65535
1024
Destinationport number
DestPort Destination port number of the SCTPValue range: 1024 through 65535
8021
Automatically switchesback to themaster IPaddress
IPAutoChange
After the fault of the master IPaddress is rectified, the services canbe automatically switched back tothe master IP address. Optionalparameters:l ENABLE
l DISABLE
ENABLE Internalplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-65
Table 2-35 Negotiation and planned data of the IPCP
Input Data FieldName
Description Example
Source
NCP
Port type PortType Optional parameters:l NCP
l CCP
NCP Internalplanning
SCTPnumber
SCTPNo SCTP number that carries theNCPValue range: 0 through 19
1 Negotiation withthedestination
Flag Flag Master/slave flag for thetransmission channels Optionalparameters:l SLAVE
l MASTER
MASTER
Internalplanning
CCP
Port type PortType Optional parameters:l NCP
l CCP
CCP Internalplanning
Port No. PortNo Number of the CCP port. Thisparameter is valid only whenPortType is set to CCP.Value range: 0 through 65535
0
Negotiation withthedestination
SCTPnumber
SCTPNo SCTP number that carries theCCPValue range: 0 through 19
2
Flag Flag Master/slave flag for thetransmission channels Optionalparameters:l SLAVE
l MASTER
MASTER
Internalplanning
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-66 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 2-36 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over IP)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type ItfType Type of the interface that carries the IPtransmission resource group Optionalparameters:l ETH
l MLPPP
l PPP
l PPPoE
ETH
Internalplanning
Resourcegroupnumber
RscgrpNo Value range: 0 through 3 0
Transmitbandwidth
TxBandwidth
The transmit bandwidth of theresource group cannot exceed thebandwidth of the port to which theresource group belong.l When the port type is ETH, the
value range is 8 through 100000.l When the port type is MLPPP, the
value range is 8 through 31744.l When the port type is PPP, the value
range is 8 through 1984.l When the port type is PPPoE, the
value range is 8 through 100000.
10000
Receivebandwidth
RxBandwidth
Receive bandwidth of the resourcegroup.l When the port type is ETH, the
value range is 8 through 100000.l When the port type is MLPPP, the
value range is 8 through 31744.l When the port type is PPP, the value
range is 8 through 1984.l When the port type is PPPoE, the
value range is 8 through 100000.
10000
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-67
Table 2-37 Negotiation and planned data of the IP PATH
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Port type ItfType Type of the interface that carries theIP PATH Optional parameters:l ETH
l MLPPP
l PPP
l PPPoE
ETH Internalplanning
Destination IPaddress
DestIP Destination IP address of the IP path 17.18.17.121
Negotiation withthedestination
DSCPpriority
DSCP Value range: 0 through 63 60 Networkplanning
Servicetype
TrafficType Optional parameters:l RT
l NRT
l HSPA_RT
l HSPA_NRT
RT
Negotiation withthedestination
Receivebandwidth
RxBandwith When PATH joins the resourcegroup, the receive bandwidth doesnot exceed the bandwidth of theresource group; when PATH doesnot join the resource group, thereceive bandwidth doe not exceed thebandwidth of the physical port.l When the port type is PPP, the
value range is 8 through 1984.l When the port type is PPPoE, the
value range is 8 through 100000.l When the port type is MLPPP, the
value range is 8 through 31744.l When the port type is ETH, the
value range is 8 through 100000.
1000
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-68 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Transmitbandwidth
TxBandwith When PATH joins the resourcegroup, the receive bandwidth doesnot exceed the bandwidth of theresource group; when PATH doesnot join the resource group, thereceive bandwidth doe not exceed thebandwidth of the physical port.l When the port type is PPP, the
value range is 8 through 1984.l When the port type is PPPoE, the
value range is 8 through 100000.l When the port type is MLPPP, the
value range is 8 through 31744.l When the port type is ETH, the
value range is 8 through 100000.
1000
Transmitcommittedburst size
TxCBS Value range: 15000 to 155000000.The recommended value is 1/2 of thetransmit bandwidth.Unit: bit
500000
Internalplanning
Transmitexcessiveburst size
TxEBS Value range: 0 through 155000000Unit: bit
1000000
Path check PathCheck Optional parameters:l ENABLE: Path check is enabled.
l DISABLE: Path check is disabled.
DISABLE
Join theresourcegroup
JoinRscgrp Specify whether the IP PATH shouldbe added to the resource group.Optional parameters:l DISABLE
l ENABLE
ENABLE
Resourcegroupnumber
RscgrpNo Number of the IP transmissionresource groupValue range: 0 through 3
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-69
Table 2-38 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (IP)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Bind theroute
BindRouteValid
Determine whether to bind the route.Route binding is necessary when thepeer IP address of the OMCH is ondifferent network segments from theDestNet in the 6.6.2 Adding an IPRoute (Initial). Optional parameters:l NO
l YES
YES
Negotiation withthedestination
Port type ItfType Type of the interface that carries thebound routes Optional parameters:l ETH
l MLPPP
l PPP
l PPPoE
ETH
Bound IPaddress onthedestinationnetwork
BindDestIP This parameter is valid only when theparameter BindRouteValid is set toYES.
11.11.10.0
Bounddestinationmask
BindDestIPMask
This parameter is valid only when theparameter BindRouteValid is set toYES.
255.255.255.0
Bound nexthop IPaddress
NextHop This parameter is valid only when theport type is ETH.
12.11.12.1
Local IPaddress
LocalIP IP address at the NodeB for the OMCH 11.11.12.12
Localsubnetmask
Mask Mask of the IP address at the NodeBfor the OMCH
255.255.0.0
Destination IPaddress
DestIP Destination IP address of the OMCH,that is, the IP address of the LMT or theM2000.
11.11.11.12
Flag Flag Optional parameters:l MASTER (primary mode)
l SLAVE (secondary mode)
MASTER Internal
planning
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-70 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 2-39 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group whose destinationIP network segment is bound
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type ItfType Type of the interface that carries theresource group Optional parameters:l ETH
l MLPPP
l PPP
l PPPoE
ETH
Internalplanning
Resourcegroupnumber
RscgrpNo Number of the IP transmission resourcegroup that corresponds to the physicalbearer portValue range: 0 through 3
0
Destination IPaddress
DestIP Bound destination IP address, that is,the IP address on the same networksegment with BindDestIP in 6.6.7Adding an OMCH of the NodeB(Initial, over IP) or the destination IPaddress of the SCTP link of 6.6.3Adding SCTP Links (Initial).
11.11.10.10
Destination mask
IPMask Bound destination mask 255.255.255.255
Table 2-40 Negotiation and planned data of the IP clock links
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type ItfType Type of the interface that carries the IPclock links Optional parameters:l ETH
l MLPPP
l PPP
l PPPoE
PPPoE Internalplanning
IP addressat the client
ClientIP Obtain the NodeB IP address of the IPclock
12.3.0.1
NetworkplanningIP address
at theserver
ServerIP IP address at the IP clock server 12.3.0.10
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-71
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Priority Priority The clock links that has the highestpriority is used first. The number is ina negative relation with the prioritylevel.Value range: 0 through 1
0
Table 2-41 Negotiation and planned data of the IPQoS
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Priority rule PriRule Optional parameters:l IPPRECEDENCE
l DSCP
IPPRECEDENCE
Networkplanning
Signalingpriority
SigPri l In IPPRECEDENCE rule, the valuerange is 0 through 7.
l In DSCP rule, the value range is 0through 63.
7
OperationandMaintenance (OM)priority
OMPri l In IPPRECEDENCE rule, the valuerange is 0 through 7.
l In DSCP rule, the value range is 0through 63.
7
2.4 NodeB Radio Layer DataThis describes the data to be prepared for configuring the NodeB radio layer.
Site Data
Table 2-42 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Site name Site Name The site is usually named afterthe geographical location.
Shanghai Networkplanning
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-72 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Sector Data
Table 2-43 Negotiation and planned data of the sector
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Number ofRX antennas
RxAntennaNum
The number of RX antennas ina sector is associated with theparameter DemMode set atthe NodeB equipment layer..You can define the number ofRX antennas beforeconfiguring antenna channelsfor the sectors. You need to,however, adhere to thefollowing principles:l If DemMode is set to four-
way demodulation mode orfour-way economicaldemodulation mode, onlyone or four RX antennas canbe configured.
l If DemMode is set to two-way demodulation mode,only one or two RXantennas can be configured.
2
Networkplanning
Transmitdiversitymode
TxDiversityMode
Diversity mode of the sector,which can be configuredbefore the antenna channel isconfigured. Optionalparameters:l NO_TX_DIVERSITY (no
transmit diversity): onesector uses one TX channel.
l TX_DIVERSITY (transmitdiversity): one sector usestwo TX channels.
l HALFFREQ (0.5/0.5frequency mode, which canbe configured only inremote sectors)
When the number ofconfigured RX antennas isone, the sector can work onlyin no transmit diversity mode.
TX_DIVERSITY
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-73
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Coveragetype
Cover Type This parameter is required forthe remote sector. It is validonly when the transmitdiversity mode isHALFFREQ. Optionalparameters:l SAMEZONE (same
coverage type)l DIFFZONE (different
coverage type)
-
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-74 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Cell Data
Table 2-44 Negotiation and planned data of the cell
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Uplinkfrequency
UARFCNUpLink
The UL and DL frequencies ofa cell must be at the samefrequency band.
Frequency (MHz) =(Frequency / 5) + offset
Value range: 0 through 65535
l Band 1Common frequencies: 9612through 9888 inclusive.Offset:0
Special frequencies: None.Offset: 0
l Band 2Common frequencies: 9262through 9538 inclusive.Offset: 0
Special frequencies: {12,37, 62, 87, 112, 137, 162,187, 212, 237, 262, 287}.Offset:1850.1
l Band 3Common frequencies: 937through 1288 inclusive.Offset:1525
Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 4Common frequencies: 1312through 1513 inclusive.Offset:1450
Special frequencies: {1662,1687, 1712, 1737, 1762,1787, 1812, 1837, 1862}.Offset:1380.1
l Band 5Common frequencies: 4132through 4233 inclusive.Offset:0
Special frequencies: {782,787, 807, 812, 837, 862}.Offset:670.1
l Band 6
9612
Networkplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-75
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Common frequencies: 4162through 4188 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies:{812,837}. Offset:670.1
l Band 7Common frequencies: 2012through 2338 inclusive.Offset:2100Special frequencies: {2362,2387, 2412, 2437, 2462,2487, 2512, 2537, 2562,2587, 2612, 2637, 2662,2687}. Offset:2030.1
l Band 8Common frequencies: 2712through 2863 inclusive.Offset:340Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 9Common frequencies: 8762through 8912 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-76 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Downlinkfrequency
UARFCNDownLink
The UL and DL frequencies ofa cell must be at the samefrequency band.Frequency (MHz) =(Frequency / 5) + offsetValue range: 0 through 65535l Band 1
Common frequencies:10562 through 10838inclusive. Offset:0Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 2Common frequencies: 9662through 9938 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: {412,437, 462, 487, 512, 537,562, 587, 612, 637, 662,687}. Offset:1850.1
l Band 3Common frequencies: 1162through 1513 inclusive.Offset:1575Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 4Common frequencies: 1537through 1738 inclusive.Offset:1805Special frequencies: {1887,1912, 1937, 1962, 1987,2012, 2037, 2062, 2087}.Offset:1735.1
l Band 5Common frequencies: 4357through 4458 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: {1007,1012, 1032, 1037, 1062,1087}. Offset:670.1
l Band 6Common frequencies: 4387through 4413 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: {1037,1062}. Offset:670.1
10562
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-77
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
l Band 7Common frequencies: 2237through 2563 inclusive.Offset:2175Special frequencies: {2587,2612, 2637, 2662, 2687,2712, 2737, 2762, 2787,2812, 2837, 2862, 2887,2912}. Offset:2105.1
l Band 8Common frequencies: 2937through 3088 inclusive.Offset:340Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 9Common frequencies: 9237through 9387 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
Uplinkresourcegroup ID
ULResourceGroupId
The cells within an uplinkresource group share theuplink resources. One ULresource group has amaximum of six cells. If theUL resource group has high-speed movement cells, itsupports a maximum of threecells.
0
Downlinkresourcegroup ID
DLResourceGroupId
When adding local cells, youneed to select the downlinkresource group. One local cellis only carried on a board of itsdownlink resource group.
0
Basebandresource pooltype
BbPoolType Optional parameters:GEN_POOL: general resourcepool, which consists of theboards located at slot 0 throughslot 9.
GEN_POOL
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-78 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Maximumtransmitpower
MaxTxPower The maximum transmit powerof a local or remote cell refersto that on the TOC. Thetransmit power must be withinthe range that is supported bythe power amplifier lest thecell is unavailable.l When the sector works in
NO_TX_DIVERSITYmode, the maximumtransmit power range of thecell is:[TOC maximum outputpower of the poweramplifier - 10 dB, TOCmaximum output power ofthe power amplifier]
l When the sector works intransmit diversity mode or0.5/0.5 frequency mode, themaximum transmit powerrange of the cell is:An intersection of [TOC1maximum output power - 7dB, TOC1 maximum outputpower + 3 dB] and [TOC2maximum output power -7dB, TOC2 maximumoutput power + 3 dB].
Value range: 0 through 500
430
Cell radius CellRadius The coverage is affected by thecell radius, which isrecommended to be set asdesigned according to thenetwork planning.Value range: 150 through180000
29000
Innerhandoverradius
CellInnerHandoverRadidus
The inner handover radius ofthe cell should not be greaterthan the cell radius. It isrecommended to be set asdesigned according to thenetwork planning.Value range: 0 through 180000
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
2-79
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Desensitization intensity
Desensy This parameter needs to be setonly in cells of local andremote sectors. It is the ratio ofuplink noise intensity tobackground noise of thereceiver. This value is not usedwhen the sector is a distributedone. The data is determined inthe network planning, and it isconsistent with that at theRNC.Value range: 0 through 30
0
High-speedmovementmode
Hispm The data is determined in thenetwork planning, and it isconsistent with that at theRNC. Optional parameters:l FALSE (not high speed)
l TRUE (high speed)
FALSE
Rate in high-speedmovementmode
Spr This parameter is valid whenthe Hispm is set to TRUE. Thedata is determined in thenetwork planning, and it isconsistent with that at theRNC. Optional parameters:l 250
l 400
l 500
-
Ratio of thedefaulttransmitpower to theRRU
DefPowerLvl Cells in distributed sectorsneed the configuration.Value range: 10 through 100
100
2 Data Planning and Negotiation of NodeB InitialConfiguration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide
2-80 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
3 NodeB Initial Configuration
This describes how to add a NodeB on the CME.
Procedure
Step 1 Start the CME applications.
Step 2 Create an RNS.
Step 3 Open the RNS.
Step 4 Add a NodeB.
Option Description
4 Adding a NodeB Through the TemplateFile (Initial)
If the configuration type of the NodeB is oneof the typical configuration types defined intemplate files, this configuration mode ispreferred.
5 Adding a NodeB Through theConfiguration File (Initial)
If a configuration file that is applicable to theNodeB is available, this configuration modeis preferred.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial) Manually reconfigure the data after thetemplate file or the configuration file isimported. If you are familiar with the RANconfiguration, this configuration mode ispreferred.
----End
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 3 NodeB Initial Configuration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
3-1
4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File(Initial)
About This Chapter
This describes how to configure the NodeB through the template file if the configuration typeof the NodeB is one of the typical configuration types of the template file.
4.1 NodeB Template FileThis defines the NodeB template file and describes the scenarios for using the file, the methodof obtaining the file, and the role of the file in the CME.
4.2 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial)This describes how to create a logical NodeB. The RNC uses the logical NodeB to identify theNodeB.
4.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing the Template File (Initial)This describes how to create a physical NodeB by importing a NodeB template file. The physicalNodeB corresponds to an actual NodeB.
4.4 Reconfiguring NodeB Data (Initial)This describes how to reconfigure the equipment layer data, the transport layer data, and theradio layer data of the physical NodeB based on the negotiated and planned data after you createthe physical NodeB by importing the template file or configuration file.
4.5 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial)This describes how to refresh the transport layer data of the NodeB. The CME can simultaneouslyupdate the Iub data at the RNC and the NodeB sides. If the Iub interface data is configured atthe RNC side, the data at the NodeB side is updated at the same time. Thus, the Iub data at boththe RNC and the NodeB sides can be consistent.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
4-1
4.1 NodeB Template FileThis defines the NodeB template file and describes the scenarios for using the file, the methodof obtaining the file, and the role of the file in the CME.
DefinitionA NodeB template file contains a set of recommended data that is predefined with commonconfiguration types, demodulation modes, and Iub transmission modes to simplify NodeB dataconfiguration.
The NodeB template file contains a large number of default parameters.
The NodeB template file is of the following two types:l Template file provided with the CME software. It cannot be deleted.
l User-defined template file. After configuring the NodeB data, you can save the dataconfiguration as a template, which serves as a data source for future data configuration.
WARNINGThe default NodeB template provided by the CME cannot be modified.
Application ScenarioDuring NodeB initial configuration on the CME, import a NodeB template file according to theNodeB type. The NodeB template file facilitates NodeB data configuration.
Obtaining MethodThe NodeB template file is provided with the CME software. The file is available at CMEinstallation directory\WRANCMEV100R005\template\NodeB.
The NodeB template file is named in the form of transport protocol type_demodulationmode_sector quantity_frequency quantity_transmit diversity mode.xml, for example,ATM_2-Channels Demodulation_3_1_Transmitter Non_diversity.xml.
You can also name a NodeB template file in your own way.
You can reconfigure a NodeB template file and export it. For details, refer to Exporting a NodeBTemplate File.
Role in the CMEThe NodeB template file can be a data source for NodeB data configuration on the CME.
4.2 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial)This describes how to create a logical NodeB. The RNC uses the logical NodeB to identify theNodeB.
4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
4-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
PrerequisiteThe RSS or the RBS is already configured.
Preparation
Table 4-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
NodeB ID NodeB_Id The NodeB ID is automaticallyallocated. You can define the logicalNodeB before configuring it as aphysical NodeB.
1
NetworkplanningName of
the NodeBNodeB_Name
This parameter indicates the name of theNodeB. You are recommended to namethe NodeB according to its geographicallocation.
NodeB_1
Bearer type IubBearerType
Identify the transmission type of the Iubinterface for the RNC. The type mustmatch the type of the interface board atthe RNC. Optional parameters:l ATM_TRANS
l IP_TRANS
l ATMANDIP_TRANS
ATM_TRANS
Negotiation withthedestination
Sharingsupport
SharingSupport
Whether to share NodeB informationOptional parameters:l SHARED: indicates that all network
operators can browse the informationof this logical NodeB and that of thecorresponding physical NodeB.
l NON_SHARED: indicates that onlythe network operator specified by theCnOpIndex parameter can browsethe information of this logical NodeBand the that of the correspondingphysical NodeB
NON_SHARED
Telecomoperatorindex
CnOpIndex This parameter is valid only when theSharingSupport parameter is set toNON_SHARED.Value range: 0 through 3
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
4-3
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Resourcemanagement mode
RscMngMode
Defines the resource management modewhen the bandwidth is allocatedOptional parameters:l SHARE
l EXCLUSIVE
SHARE
ATMAddress
NSAP The NodeB relevant ATM address inhexadecimal format. This parameter isinvalid when IubBearerType is set toIP_TRANS.You need to set the first byte of the ATMaddress to H'45 (indicating an E.164address), H'39 (indicating a DCCaddress) or H'47 (indicating an ICDaddress).If the first byte is H'45, the followingseven and a half bytes (that is, 15 digits)must be a BCD code. If the followingpart, called DSP, are all 0s, this addressis called E.164e. If the DSP are not all0s, this address is called E.164A. TheATM addresses are allocated in theATM network and cannot be repeated.Value range: 42 bytes (including theprefix H')
H'3901010101010101010101010101010101010101
Hybridtransportflag
IPTransApartInd
Identifies whether hybrid transport issupported over the Iub interface. Thisparameter is valid only whenIubBearerType is set to IP_TRANS orATMANDIP_TRANS. Optionalparameters:l SUPPORT
l NOT_SUPPORT
-
Transmission delay onthe Iubinterface
TransDelay Initial round-trip transmission delay onthe Iub interface in ATM circuittransport or IP dedicated transportValue range: 0 through 65535
10
Transmission delay onthe Iubinterface inhybrid IPtransport
IPApartTransDelay
Initial round-trip transmission delay onthe Iub interface in hybrid IP transport.This parameter is valid only whenTransDelay is set to SUPPORT.Value range: 0 through 65535
-
4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
4-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Satellitetransmission indication
SatelliteInd Identifies the satellite transmission onthe Iub interface. Optional parameters:l TRUE
l FALSE
FALSE
NodeBtype
NodeBType
Identifies the type of the logical NodeB.Optional parameters:l NORMAL
l PICO_TYPE1
l PICO_TYPE2
NORMAL
ProtocolVersion
ProtocolVer
Protocol version of the NodeB.Optional parameters:l R99
l R4
l R5
l R6
R6
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click , and then click NodeB CM Express in theconfiguration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.
Step 2 Double-click the editing box on the left. The NodeB Basic Information window is displayed,as shown in Figure 4-1.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
4-5
Figure 4-1 Physical NodeB Basic Information window
NOTE
The RAN Sharing Flag parameter is described as follows:
l If the RAN Sharing Flag is set to YES, that is, when RAN sharing is supported, parametersSharingSupport and CnOpIndex are configured according to scenarios. (Parameter CnOpIndex isvalid only when SharingSupport is set to NON_SHARED.
l If the RAN Sharing Flag is set to NO, that is, when RAN sharing is not supported, parametersSharingSupport and CnOpIndex do not need to be configured.
For details, refer to Adding Basic Data of the RNC (Initial, CME).
Step 3 Select NodeBId, and click to add a NodeB record. According to the prepared data, set theinformation such as NodeBName, IubBearer Type, and NSAP.
Step 4 Click to save the settings.
Step 5 Repeat Step 3 through Step 4 to add more NodeB records.
----End
4.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing the TemplateFile (Initial)
This describes how to create a physical NodeB by importing a NodeB template file. The physicalNodeB corresponds to an actual NodeB.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
4-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
Prerequisitel The logical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 4.2 Creating a Logical NodeB
(Initial).l The NodeB template file with the same or similar configuration type acts as the data source.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click , and then click NodeB CM Express in theconfiguration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed, as shown in Figure4-2.
Figure 4-2 Physical NodeB Basic Information window
Table 4-2 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Logical NodeB list
2 "Create a physical NodeB" button
3 "Delete a physical NodeB" button
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
4-7
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
4 Physical NodeB list
Step 3 Select a logical NodeB in area 1, and then click . The Create Physical NodeB dialogbox is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-3 Create Physical NodeB dialog box
Step 4 Select the values in the Series and Version drop-down lists based on the prepared data, and thenselect a template similar to the actual NodeB configuration in the Template drop-down list.
Step 5 Click OK. The CME starts importing the template file, and the import progress is displayed inthe NodeB Creating dialog box.
Step 6 After the template file is imported, the Information dialog box is displayed. Click OK, andinformation related to the configured physical NodeB is displayed in area 4.
----End
4.4 Reconfiguring NodeB Data (Initial)This describes how to reconfigure the equipment layer data, the transport layer data, and theradio layer data of the physical NodeB based on the negotiated and planned data after you createthe physical NodeB by importing the template file or configuration file.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
After the physical NodeB is created through the template or the configuration file, you need to manuallyreconfigure the equipment layer data according to the actual network planning. The reconfigurationinvolves physical NodeB basic information, interface board addition or deletion, and RF modules or RRUaddition or deletion.After the physical NodeB is created through the template or the configuration file, you need to manuallyreconfigure the radio layer data according to the actual network planning. The reconfiguration involvescell frequencies, uplink/downlink resource groups, and power.
4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
4-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
PrerequisiteThe NodeB is created by importing a template file or a configuration file. For details, refer tothe following information:
l 4.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing the Template File (Initial).
l 5.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing a Configuration File (Initial).
Preparationl To reconfigure the equipment layer data, refer to Macro NodeB Equipment Layer
Data or Equipment Layer Data of the Distributed NodeB by the NodeB type.l To reconfigure the transport layer data, refer to 2.3 NodeB Transport Layer Data.
l To reconfigure the radio layer data, refer to 2.4 NodeB Radio Layer Data.
Procedurel Reconfigure the equipment layer data.
The equipment layer data is reconfigured according to the NodeB type. For details, referto:– 6.2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial).– 6.3 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812E (Initial).– 6.4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial).
l Reconfigure the equipment layer data.For details, refer to 6.5 Manually Adding the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (overATM) or 6.6 Manually Adding Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over IP).
l Reconfigure the radio layer data.For details, refer to 6.8 Adding Radio Layer Data.
----End
4.5 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB(Initial)
This describes how to refresh the transport layer data of the NodeB. The CME can simultaneouslyupdate the Iub data at the RNC and the NodeB sides. If the Iub interface data is configured atthe RNC side, the data at the NodeB side is updated at the same time. Thus, the Iub data at boththe RNC and the NodeB sides can be consistent.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration (The RNC and the NodeB is directly connectedwithout ATM switch inbetween.)
Mandatory/Optional
Optional. This function is customized. Therefore, it is not applied to all scenarios.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
4-9
NOTE
l Whether to connect the RNC and the NodeB directly depends on actual scenarios. The Iub refreshingfunction does not check whether the RNC and the NodeB are directly connected.
l When data on both the RNC and the NodeB is carried over E1/T1 or optical port in the ATM transportmode and the RNC is connected to the NodeB through an ATM switch. The Iub refreshing functiondetermines that the NodeB and the RNC are directly connected. The Iub refreshing function issupported. The accuracy of refreshed data, however, cannot be guaranteed owing to the ATM switch.Therefore, use the ATM switch with caution.
l Before the refreshing, consistency check will be executed over the Iub interface. That is, check that theversion of the RNC matches that of the NodeB. If the versions on both the NodeB and the RNC sidesmatch, the data over the Iub interface on the RNC side can be synchronized to the NodeB side. For thematching relations, refer to Figure 4-4.
Figure 4-4 Matching relations
Prerequisitel The Iub interface data at the RNC is configured. For details, refer to Adding Iub Interface
Data to the RNC (Initial, over ATM, CME).l To execute the refresh function, the physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to
6.2.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).l Ensure that the VPI of the PVC at the RNC side is in the VPI value range defined in the
baseband interface board at the NodeB side.l If the optical interface board is adopted, ensure that the NUTI is configured with the
corresponding sub-board.
Preparationl For the macro NodeB, the equipment layer is configured with the NDTI or the NUTI with
bearer type of ATM or IPv4. For details, refer to 6.2.2 Adding the Boards in the BasebandSubrack (Initial).
l For the distributed NodeB, the equipment layer is configured with the BBU with bearertype of ATM or IPv4. For details, refer to 6.4.2 Adding a BBU (Initial).
4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
4-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Selection window is displayed.
Step 4 Determine the target NodeB to be refreshed.
Option Description
Only one target NodeB can be refreshedat a time.
Go to Step 5.
More than one target NodeB needs to berefreshed at a time.
1. In the NodeB Selection dialog box, clickFilter. The Select NodeB window isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 4-5.
2. In area 2, select multiple physical NodeBs,
and click . The physical NodeBsare added to area 1.
3. Click Close to return to the NodeBSelection window.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
4-11
Figure 4-5 NodeB Selection window
Table 4-3 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 List of candidate physical NodeBs
2 List of target physical NodeBs
Step 5 Click Next. The PortMatch window is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-6.
4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
4-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 4-6 Port Match window
NOTE
l The data in dark blue refers to the data at the RNC side, and that in green refers to the data at the NodeBside.
l Before the Iub refreshing, the CME automatically allocates the interconnection data such as NCN(cabinet number), NSBN(subrack number), NSN (slot number), and NPN (port number) at the NodeBside. You can also reallocate the data as required.
Step 6 (Optional) Select NCN, and click to modify the interconnection data at the NodeB side.
Step 7 Click Next, and the Confirmation dialog box is displayed.Click OK to execute datasynchronization. The Finish dialog box is displayed telling that the data is successfully refreshed.
Step 8 Click Finish to return to the Physical NodeB Basic Information window.
----End
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 4 Adding a NodeB Through the Template File (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
4-13
5 Adding a NodeB Through the ConfigurationFile (Initial)
About This Chapter
This describes how to add a NodeB through a configuration file if the configuration file isapplicable to the NodeB.
5.1 NodeB Configuration FileThis defines the NodeB configuration file and describes the scenarios for using the file, themethod of obtaining the file, and the role of the file in the CME.
5.2 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial)This describes how to create a logical NodeB. The RNC uses the logical NodeB to identify theNodeB.
5.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing a Configuration File (Initial)This describes how to create a physical NodeB by importing a configuration file. The physicalNodeB corresponds to an installed NodeB.
5.4 Reconfiguring NodeB Data (Initial)This describes how to reconfigure the equipment layer data, the transport layer data, and theradio layer data of the physical NodeB based on the negotiated and planned data after you createthe physical NodeB by importing the template file or configuration file.
5.5 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial)This describes how to refresh the transport layer data of the NodeB. The CME can simultaneouslyupdate the Iub data at the RNC and the NodeB sides. If the Iub interface data is configured atthe RNC side, the data at the NodeB side is updated at the same time. Thus, the Iub data at boththe RNC and the NodeB sides can be consistent.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
5-1
5.1 NodeB Configuration FileThis defines the NodeB configuration file and describes the scenarios for using the file, themethod of obtaining the file, and the role of the file in the CME.
DefinitionA NodeB configuration file contains a complete set of NodeB configuration data for properoperation of the NodeB.
The NodeB configuration file, also called NodeB XML file, is saved in .xml format.
Application ScenarioThe NodeB configuration file is used in the following scenarios:
l Export the NodeB configuration file to the NodeB LMT after the RAN configuration iscomplete on the CME. Then load the file onto the NodeB and validate the file.
l Before reconfiguring the RAN on the CME, import the NodeB configuration file to theCME server to synchronize the NodeB data in the CME with that on the existing network.
Obtaining MethodYou can obtain the NodeB configuration file by exporting all the NodeB data from the CME orobtain the file from the NodeB LMT.
Role in the CMEThe NodeB configuration file can be loaded to the NodeB. The file can be a data source forNodeB configuration on the CME.
5.2 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial)This describes how to create a logical NodeB. The RNC uses the logical NodeB to identify theNodeB.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
PrerequisiteThe RSS or the RBS is already configured.
5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
5-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Preparation
Table 5-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
NodeB ID NodeB_Id The NodeB ID is automaticallyallocated. You can define the logicalNodeB before configuring it as aphysical NodeB.
1
NetworkplanningName of
the NodeBNodeB_Name
This parameter indicates the name of theNodeB. You are recommended to namethe NodeB according to its geographicallocation.
NodeB_1
Bearer type IubBearerType
Identify the transmission type of the Iubinterface for the RNC. The type mustmatch the type of the interface board atthe RNC. Optional parameters:l ATM_TRANS
l IP_TRANS
l ATMANDIP_TRANS
ATM_TRANS
Negotiation withthedestination
Sharingsupport
SharingSupport
Whether to share NodeB informationOptional parameters:l SHARED: indicates that all network
operators can browse the informationof this logical NodeB and that of thecorresponding physical NodeB.
l NON_SHARED: indicates that onlythe network operator specified by theCnOpIndex parameter can browsethe information of this logical NodeBand the that of the correspondingphysical NodeB
NON_SHARED
Telecomoperatorindex
CnOpIndex This parameter is valid only when theSharingSupport parameter is set toNON_SHARED.Value range: 0 through 3
0
Resourcemanagement mode
RscMngMode
Defines the resource management modewhen the bandwidth is allocatedOptional parameters:l SHARE
l EXCLUSIVE
SHARE
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
5-3
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
ATMAddress
NSAP The NodeB relevant ATM address inhexadecimal format. This parameter isinvalid when IubBearerType is set toIP_TRANS.You need to set the first byte of the ATMaddress to H'45 (indicating an E.164address), H'39 (indicating a DCCaddress) or H'47 (indicating an ICDaddress).If the first byte is H'45, the followingseven and a half bytes (that is, 15 digits)must be a BCD code. If the followingpart, called DSP, are all 0s, this addressis called E.164e. If the DSP are not all0s, this address is called E.164A. TheATM addresses are allocated in theATM network and cannot be repeated.Value range: 42 bytes (including theprefix H')
H'3901010101010101010101010101010101010101
Hybridtransportflag
IPTransApartInd
Identifies whether hybrid transport issupported over the Iub interface. Thisparameter is valid only whenIubBearerType is set to IP_TRANS orATMANDIP_TRANS. Optionalparameters:l SUPPORT
l NOT_SUPPORT
-
Transmission delay onthe Iubinterface
TransDelay Initial round-trip transmission delay onthe Iub interface in ATM circuittransport or IP dedicated transportValue range: 0 through 65535
10
Transmission delay onthe Iubinterface inhybrid IPtransport
IPApartTransDelay
Initial round-trip transmission delay onthe Iub interface in hybrid IP transport.This parameter is valid only whenTransDelay is set to SUPPORT.Value range: 0 through 65535
-
Satellitetransmission indication
SatelliteInd Identifies the satellite transmission onthe Iub interface. Optional parameters:l TRUE
l FALSE
FALSE
5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
5-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
NodeBtype
NodeBType
Identifies the type of the logical NodeB.Optional parameters:l NORMAL
l PICO_TYPE1
l PICO_TYPE2
NORMAL
ProtocolVersion
ProtocolVer
Protocol version of the NodeB.Optional parameters:l R99
l R4
l R5
l R6
R6
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click , and then click NodeB CM Express in theconfiguration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.
Step 2 Double-click the editing box on the left. The NodeB Basic Information window is displayed,as shown in Figure 5-1.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
5-5
Figure 5-1 Physical NodeB Basic Information window
NOTE
The RAN Sharing Flag parameter is described as follows:
l If the RAN Sharing Flag is set to YES, that is, when RAN sharing is supported, parametersSharingSupport and CnOpIndex are configured according to scenarios. (Parameter CnOpIndex isvalid only when SharingSupport is set to NON_SHARED.
l If the RAN Sharing Flag is set to NO, that is, when RAN sharing is not supported, parametersSharingSupport and CnOpIndex do not need to be configured.
For details, refer to Adding Basic Data of the RNC (Initial, CME).
Step 3 Select NodeBId, and click to add a NodeB record. According to the prepared data, set theinformation such as NodeBName, IubBearer Type, and NSAP.
Step 4 Click to save the settings.
Step 5 Repeat Step 3 through Step 4 to add more NodeB records.
----End
5.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing a ConfigurationFile (Initial)
This describes how to create a physical NodeB by importing a configuration file. The physicalNodeB corresponds to an installed NodeB.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
5-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NOTE
l To import a NodeB configuration file, you have to conform to the following principle: A logical NodeBis available for each matching NodeB name in the configuration file to be imported. If the logicalNodeB that corresponds to the NodeB name in the importing NodeB configuration is unavailable, theCME automatically creates a logical NodeB, and then import this NodeB configuration file.
l If the NodeB name in the configuration file is the same as an existing physical NodeB, the importedconfiguration data will overwrite the data of the existing physical NodeB.
Prerequisitel The logical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 5.2 Creating a Logical NodeB
(Initial).l The NodeB configuration file of the same or similar configuration type acts as the data
source.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a logical NodeB on the left of the window. Click . The Import NodeB window isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 5-2.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
5-7
Figure 5-2 NodeB Data Configuration File
Step 4 In the navigation tree of the left pane, select the save path of the NodeB configuration file, andthen click Search. The valid configuration file is displayed in the upper right pane, and theinvalid configuration file is displayed in the lower right pane.
NOTE
l The invalid configuration file cannot be imported.
l If a valid NodeB configuration file is found, but the corresponding logical NodeB does not exist, adialog box is displayed to ask whether to create the logical NodeB. Click OK, and then enter the subracknumber of the NodeB and SPUa subsystem number to create the logical NodeB.
Step 5 Select the valid NodeB configuration file, and then click Import. After the file is imported, theInformation dialog box is displayed. Click OK to return to the Import NodeB window.
Step 6 The imported NodeB is displayed on the right part of the Physical NodeB Basic Informationwindow.
----End
5.4 Reconfiguring NodeB Data (Initial)This describes how to reconfigure the equipment layer data, the transport layer data, and theradio layer data of the physical NodeB based on the negotiated and planned data after you createthe physical NodeB by importing the template file or configuration file.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
5-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
NOTE
After the physical NodeB is created through the template or the configuration file, you need to manuallyreconfigure the equipment layer data according to the actual network planning. The reconfigurationinvolves physical NodeB basic information, interface board addition or deletion, and RF modules or RRUaddition or deletion.
After the physical NodeB is created through the template or the configuration file, you need to manuallyreconfigure the radio layer data according to the actual network planning. The reconfiguration involvescell frequencies, uplink/downlink resource groups, and power.
Prerequisite
The NodeB is created by importing a template file or a configuration file. For details, refer tothe following information:
l 4.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing the Template File (Initial).
l 5.3 Creating a Physical NodeB by Importing a Configuration File (Initial).
Preparationl To reconfigure the equipment layer data, refer to Macro NodeB Equipment Layer
Data or Equipment Layer Data of the Distributed NodeB by the NodeB type.
l To reconfigure the transport layer data, refer to 2.3 NodeB Transport Layer Data.
l To reconfigure the radio layer data, refer to 2.4 NodeB Radio Layer Data.
Procedurel Reconfigure the equipment layer data.
The equipment layer data is reconfigured according to the NodeB type. For details, referto:
– 6.2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial).
– 6.3 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812E (Initial).
– 6.4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial).
l Reconfigure the equipment layer data.For details, refer to 6.5 Manually Adding the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (overATM) or 6.6 Manually Adding Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over IP).
l Reconfigure the radio layer data.For details, refer to 6.8 Adding Radio Layer Data.
----End
5.5 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB(Initial)
This describes how to refresh the transport layer data of the NodeB. The CME can simultaneouslyupdate the Iub data at the RNC and the NodeB sides. If the Iub interface data is configured atthe RNC side, the data at the NodeB side is updated at the same time. Thus, the Iub data at boththe RNC and the NodeB sides can be consistent.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
5-9
Scenario NodeB initial configuration (The RNC and the NodeB is directly connectedwithout ATM switch inbetween.)
Mandatory/Optional
Optional. This function is customized. Therefore, it is not applied to all scenarios.
NOTE
l Whether to connect the RNC and the NodeB directly depends on actual scenarios. The Iub refreshingfunction does not check whether the RNC and the NodeB are directly connected.
l When data on both the RNC and the NodeB is carried over E1/T1 or optical port in the ATM transportmode and the RNC is connected to the NodeB through an ATM switch. The Iub refreshing functiondetermines that the NodeB and the RNC are directly connected. The Iub refreshing function issupported. The accuracy of refreshed data, however, cannot be guaranteed owing to the ATM switch.Therefore, use the ATM switch with caution.
l Before the refreshing, consistency check will be executed over the Iub interface. That is, check that theversion of the RNC matches that of the NodeB. If the versions on both the NodeB and the RNC sidesmatch, the data over the Iub interface on the RNC side can be synchronized to the NodeB side. For thematching relations, refer to Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-3 Matching relations
Prerequisitel The Iub interface data at the RNC is configured. For details, refer to Adding Iub Interface
Data to the RNC (Initial, over ATM, CME).l To execute the refresh function, the physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to
6.2.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).l Ensure that the VPI of the PVC at the RNC side is in the VPI value range defined in the
baseband interface board at the NodeB side.
l If the optical interface board is adopted, ensure that the NUTI is configured with thecorresponding sub-board.
Preparationl For the macro NodeB, the equipment layer is configured with the NDTI or the NUTI with
bearer type of ATM or IPv4. For details, refer to 6.2.2 Adding the Boards in the BasebandSubrack (Initial).
5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
5-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
l For the distributed NodeB, the equipment layer is configured with the BBU with bearertype of ATM or IPv4. For details, refer to 6.4.2 Adding a BBU (Initial).
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Selection window is displayed.
Step 4 Determine the target NodeB to be refreshed.
Option Description
Only one target NodeB can be refreshedat a time.
Go to Step 5.
More than one target NodeB needs to berefreshed at a time.
1. In the NodeB Selection dialog box, clickFilter. The Select NodeB window isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 5-4.
2. In area 2, select multiple physical NodeBs,
and click . The physical NodeBsare added to area 1.
3. Click Close to return to the NodeBSelection window.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
5-11
Figure 5-4 NodeB Selection window
Table 5-2 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 List of candidate physical NodeBs
2 List of target physical NodeBs
Step 5 Click Next. The PortMatch window is displayed, as shown in Figure 5-5.
5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
5-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 5-5 Port Match window
NOTE
l The data in dark blue refers to the data at the RNC side, and that in green refers to the data at the NodeBside.
l Before the Iub refreshing, the CME automatically allocates the interconnection data such as NCN(cabinet number), NSBN(subrack number), NSN (slot number), and NPN (port number) at the NodeBside. You can also reallocate the data as required.
Step 6 (Optional) Select NCN, and click to modify the interconnection data at the NodeB side.
Step 7 Click Next, and the Confirmation dialog box is displayed.Click OK to execute datasynchronization. The Finish dialog box is displayed telling that the data is successfully refreshed.
Step 8 Click Finish to return to the Physical NodeB Basic Information window.
----End
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 5 Adding a NodeB Through the Configuration File (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
5-13
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
About This Chapter
This describes how to manually add a NodeB. This method is used to adjust the data after atemplate file or a configuration file is imported.
Procedure
Step 1 6.1 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial).
Step 2 NodeB Equipment Layer Datal 6.2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial).
l 6.4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial).
Step 3 NodeB Transport Layer Datal 6.5 Manually Adding the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over ATM).
l 6.6 Manually Adding Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over IP).
Step 4 6.8 Adding Radio Layer Data.
----End
6.1 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial)This describes how to create a logical NodeB. The RNC uses the logical NodeB to identify theNodeB.
6.2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial)This describes how to configure the equipment layer data of the BTS3812AE or BTS3812A.
6.3 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812E (Initial)This describes how to configure the equipment layer data of the BTS3812E.
6.4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial)This describes how to configure the equipment layer data of the distributed NodeB.
6.5 Manually Adding the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over ATM)This describes how to configure the transport layer data of the NodeB in ATM transport mode.
6.6 Manually Adding Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (over IP)
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-1
This describes how to configure the transport layer data of the NodeB in IP transport mode.
6.7 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB (Initial)This describes how to refresh the transport layer data of the NodeB. The CME can simultaneouslyupdate the Iub data at the RNC and the NodeB sides. If the Iub interface data is configured atthe RNC side, the data at the NodeB side is updated at the same time. Thus, the Iub data at boththe RNC and the NodeB sides can be consistent.
6.8 Adding Radio Layer DataThis describes how to configure radio network layer data for the NodeB. The related activitiesinvolve adding sites, adding sectors, and adding local cells.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
6.1 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial)This describes how to create a logical NodeB. The RNC uses the logical NodeB to identify theNodeB.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
PrerequisiteThe RSS or the RBS is already configured.
Preparation
Table 6-1 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
NodeB ID NodeB_Id The NodeB ID is automaticallyallocated. You can define the logicalNodeB before configuring it as aphysical NodeB.
1
NetworkplanningName of
the NodeBNodeB_Name
This parameter indicates the name of theNodeB. You are recommended to namethe NodeB according to its geographicallocation.
NodeB_1
Bearer type IubBearerType
Identify the transmission type of the Iubinterface for the RNC. The type mustmatch the type of the interface board atthe RNC. Optional parameters:l ATM_TRANS
l IP_TRANS
l ATMANDIP_TRANS
ATM_TRANS
Negotiation withthedestination
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-3
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Sharingsupport
SharingSupport
Whether to share NodeB informationOptional parameters:l SHARED: indicates that all network
operators can browse the informationof this logical NodeB and that of thecorresponding physical NodeB.
l NON_SHARED: indicates that onlythe network operator specified by theCnOpIndex parameter can browsethe information of this logical NodeBand the that of the correspondingphysical NodeB
NON_SHARED
Telecomoperatorindex
CnOpIndex This parameter is valid only when theSharingSupport parameter is set toNON_SHARED.Value range: 0 through 3
0
Resourcemanagement mode
RscMngMode
Defines the resource management modewhen the bandwidth is allocatedOptional parameters:l SHARE
l EXCLUSIVE
SHARE
ATMAddress
NSAP The NodeB relevant ATM address inhexadecimal format. This parameter isinvalid when IubBearerType is set toIP_TRANS.You need to set the first byte of the ATMaddress to H'45 (indicating an E.164address), H'39 (indicating a DCCaddress) or H'47 (indicating an ICDaddress).If the first byte is H'45, the followingseven and a half bytes (that is, 15 digits)must be a BCD code. If the followingpart, called DSP, are all 0s, this addressis called E.164e. If the DSP are not all0s, this address is called E.164A. TheATM addresses are allocated in theATM network and cannot be repeated.Value range: 42 bytes (including theprefix H')
H'3901010101010101010101010101010101010101
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Hybridtransportflag
IPTransApartInd
Identifies whether hybrid transport issupported over the Iub interface. Thisparameter is valid only whenIubBearerType is set to IP_TRANS orATMANDIP_TRANS. Optionalparameters:l SUPPORT
l NOT_SUPPORT
-
Transmission delay onthe Iubinterface
TransDelay Initial round-trip transmission delay onthe Iub interface in ATM circuittransport or IP dedicated transportValue range: 0 through 65535
10
Transmission delay onthe Iubinterface inhybrid IPtransport
IPApartTransDelay
Initial round-trip transmission delay onthe Iub interface in hybrid IP transport.This parameter is valid only whenTransDelay is set to SUPPORT.Value range: 0 through 65535
-
Satellitetransmission indication
SatelliteInd Identifies the satellite transmission onthe Iub interface. Optional parameters:l TRUE
l FALSE
FALSE
NodeBtype
NodeBType
Identifies the type of the logical NodeB.Optional parameters:l NORMAL
l PICO_TYPE1
l PICO_TYPE2
NORMAL
ProtocolVersion
ProtocolVer
Protocol version of the NodeB.Optional parameters:l R99
l R4
l R5
l R6
R6
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-5
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click , and then click NodeB CM Express in theconfiguration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window is displayed.
Step 2 Double-click the editing box on the left. The NodeB Basic Information window is displayed,as shown in Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-1 Physical NodeB Basic Information window
NOTE
The RAN Sharing Flag parameter is described as follows:
l If the RAN Sharing Flag is set to YES, that is, when RAN sharing is supported, parametersSharingSupport and CnOpIndex are configured according to scenarios. (Parameter CnOpIndex isvalid only when SharingSupport is set to NON_SHARED.
l If the RAN Sharing Flag is set to NO, that is, when RAN sharing is not supported, parametersSharingSupport and CnOpIndex do not need to be configured.
For details, refer to Adding Basic Data of the RNC (Initial, CME).
Step 3 Select NodeBId, and click to add a NodeB record. According to the prepared data, set theinformation such as NodeBName, IubBearer Type, and NSAP.
Step 4 Click to save the settings.
Step 5 Repeat Step 3 through Step 4 to add more NodeB records.
----End
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
6.2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial)
This describes how to configure the equipment layer data of the BTS3812AE or BTS3812A.
ContextOn the CME client, Figure 6-2 shows the panel of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A.
Figure 6-2 BTS3812AE/BTS3812A panel
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-7
Table 6-2 Module information
SequenceNumber
Module/Board Type
Description
1 RF Module l One RF module consists of the MAFU and MTRU.
l The MTRU is configured in subrack 2, and the MAFU isconfigured in subrack 3. The MAFU and MTRU must existin pairs.
2 NCMU NodeB Climate Monitoring Unit, and is installed in subrack 8.
3 Fan Provides the function of a fan, and is configured in subrack 1.
4 Baseboard l NMPT: NodeB Main Processing and Timing Unit, and isinstalled in slots 10 and 11 of the baseband subrack.
l NMON: NodeB Monitoring Unit, and is installed in slot 16of the baseband subrack.
l NBBI\HBBI\EBBI\EBOI: NodeB HSDPA supportedbaseband processing interface unit, and is inserted in slots 0and 1 in the baseband subrack.
l HULP/EULP: NodeB HSDPA supported uplink basebandprocessing interface unit, and is inserted in slots 2 and 7 inthe baseband subrack.
l HDLP/NDLP: NodeB HSDPA supported downlinkbaseband processing interface unit, and is inserted in slots 8and 9 in the baseband subrack.
l NDTI: NodeB Digital Trunk Interface Unit, and is installedin slots 12 and 13 of the baseband subrack.
l NUTI: NodeB Universal Transport Interface Unit, and isinstalled in slots from 12 to 15 of the baseband subrack.
5 Power module l NPSU: Power supply module
l NPMU: Power monitoring module
6 Battery The battery is configured in subrack 9.
6.2.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial)This describes how to manually configure the basic information for the NodeB.
6.2.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial)This describes how to configure the boards in the baseband subrack of the macro NodeB. Theboards consist of the NMPT, NBBI/HBBI, EBBI/EBOI, HULP/EULP, NDLP/HDLP, NDTI/NUTI, and NMON.
6.2.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial, MacroNodeB)This describes how to add an uplink or an downlink baseband resource group so as to reasonablyallocate the uplink or downlink baseband resources of the NodeB.
6.2.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Macro NodeB)
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
This describes how to add an RRU. The RRU is the outdoor RF remote unit. It is used to performfunctions such as the modulation and demodulation of baseband and RF signals, data processing,transferring data of the cascaded RRUs, and providing the multiplexing functions of the RFchannels for receiving and transmitting signals. Adding an RRU includes two parts: adding theRRU chain and adding the RRU module.
6.2.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial)This describes how to add RF modules, that is, the MAFU and MTRU modules.
6.2.6 Adding an NGRU (Initial)The NodeB GPS Receiving Unit (NGRU) is a peripheral device used to position the UE andprovide the clock source for the NodeB. This describes how to add an NGRU.
6.2.7 Adding an NCMU (Initial, BTS3812AE)NCMU is a board to control the temperature of the air conditioner and heat exchanger. Thisdescribes how to add an NCMU for the BTS3812AE.
6.2.8 Adding an NPMU (Initial, Macro NodeB)This describes how to add an NodeB Power Monitoring Unit (NPMU).
6.2.9 Adding NPSUs (Initial, BTS3812AE/BTS3812A)This describes how to configure the NodeB Power Supply Unit (NPSU) for the macro NodeB,that is, the BTS3812AE or BTS3812A.
6.2.10 Adding Batteries (Initial, BTS3812AE/BTS3812A)This describes how to configure batteries for the macro NodeB (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A). Thebatteries are backup power facilities of the NodeB.
6.2.11 Adding an ALD (Initial)This describes how to add an ALD. The ALD consists of the SINGEL_RET, the MULTI_RET,the STMA, the SASU, and the RET_2G.
6.2.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial)This describes how to manually configure the basic information for the NodeB.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
PrerequisiteThe logical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.1 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial).
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-9
Preparation
Table 6-3 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Workingmode ofE1/T1links
E1T1WorkMode
The working mode of E1/T1 linksdepends on the state of DIPswitches on the BBU or NUTI andthe configuration file.
E1
Negotiation withthedestination
Clocksource
ClockSource This parameter is valid only whenClockWorkMode is set toMANUAL. Optional parameters:l GPSCARD (GPS card clock
source)l BITS (BITS clock source): The
outdoor BBU (HBBUC) cannotuse this clock source.
l LINE (clock source extractedfrom the Iub interface line)
l IP (IP clock source)
LINE
Workingmode ofthe clock
ClockWorkMode
Working mode of the system clockOptional parameters:l MANUAL (manual mode): In
this mode, the user specifies theclock source, and automaticallyswitching the system clock toother clock sources is notallowed. Even if the specifiedclock source is faulty, suchswitching is not allowed.
l FREE (free-run mode): Thefree-run mode is the workingmode for the clock source at aninitial phase.
MANUAL
Networkplanning
Workingmode ofthe IPclock
IPClockMode This parameter is valid only whenClockSource is set to IP. Optionalparameters:l AUTO (default value)
l MANUAL (This parameter isconfigured when the IP clock isalready configured.)
-
GPSfeederdelay
GPSCableDelay Delay of the GPS feederValue range: 0 through 1000
0 Internalplanning
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
SNTPswitch
SNTPSwitch Synchronization switch Optionalparameters:l ON (SNTP client requires time
synchronization)l OFF (SNTP client does not
require time synchronization)
ON Networkplanning
IP addressof theSNTPserver
SNTPServerIP The SNTP server is used tosynchronize the time of multipleSNTP clients, which is importantfor centralized maintenance,especially for alarm management.For example, when an E1 link isdisconnected, the NodeB and theRNC report the alarm at the sametime based on SNTP. This helpsfault locating.The SNTP server of the NodeB canbe either the M2000 or the RNC.l The SNTP server of the NodeB
is the RNC (recommended): setSNTPServerIP to the BAMinternal IP address.
l The SNTP server of the NodeBis the M2000: setSNTPServerIP to the M2000host external IP address.
10.11.1.1 Negotiation withthedestination
Synchronizationperiod
SyncPeriod The period in which nodes aresynchronized.Value range: 1 through 525600
10
Networkplanning
Demodulation mode
DemMode Demodulation mode of the NodeBOptional parameters:l DEM_2_CHAN (two-way
demodulation mode)l DEM_4_CHAN (four-way
demodulation mode)l DEM_ECON_4_CHAN (four-
way economical demodulationmode)
DEM_2_CHAN
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-11
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
High BERthresholdsof E1/T1
HighThreshold Optional parameters:l 1E-3
l 1E-4
l 1E-5
l 1E-6
1E-5
Smoothpowerswitch
SMTHPWRSwitch
Optional parameters:l OPEN
l CLOSE
CLOSE
Lower andupperlimits oftimersetting
LowerLimit Disabling the lower limit of thetime range for the transmitterValue range: 0 through 255
0
UpperLimit Disabling the upper limit of thetime range for the transmitterValue range: 0 through 255
0
NodeBresourcedistribution mode
ResAllocateRule
Optional parameters:l PERFFIRST (handover
performance priority mode)l CAPAFIRST (capacity priority
mode)
PERFFIRST
NodeB IPaddress
LocalIP IP address of the NodeB for localmaintenance
17.21.2.15
Subnetmask
LocalIPMask Subnet mask of the NodeB IPaddress for local maintenance
255.255.0.0
NMPTbackupmode
NMPTBackupMode
This parameter is available onlyfor the macro NodeB.
ENABLE Internalplanning
STM-1framemode
NAOIFrameMode (macroNodeB)
Frame structure of the optical portchip Optional parameters:l FRAMEMODE_SONET (in
SONET mode)l FRAMEMODE_SDH (in SDH
mode)
-
Negotiation withthedestination
STM1FrameMode (distributedNodeB)
FRAMEMODE_SDH
Management unit
Au This parameter is valid only for thechannelized optical interface.Optional parameters:l AU3
l AU4
AU3
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Bypassunit
Tu This parameter is valid only for thechannelized optical interface.Optional parameters:l TU11 (the E1/T1 mode is T1)
l TU12 (the E1/T1 mode is E1)
TU12
Power typeof themacroNodeB
PowerType Configuring the power type for theNodeB. This parameter isavailable only for the macroNodeB. Optional parameters:l -48 V DC
l 24 V DC
l 220 V AC
-48 V DC
Internalplanning
Reportswitch forcall historyrecord
CHRSwitch When the NodeB CHR reportswitch is on, the NodeB uploadsthe CHR log to the FTP server thatis at the NodeB side.
OFF
Iubinterfaceboardgroupbackupmode
IUBGroup1 Group backup mode of the Iubinterface board, namely the NDTIor the NUTI, in slots 12 and 13Optional parameters:l REDUNDANCY (active and
standby backup): The boardmust be the NUTI. No sub-board can be added. Only thebaseboard held in slot 12 can beused. The attributes of the boardheld in slot 13 remainunchanged.
l SHARING (load sharing): TheNDTI and NUTI can be insertedin either slot 12 or 13. Both theboard of the baseband subrackand the sub-board can be used.
SHARING
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-13
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
IUBGroup2 Group backup mode of the Iubinterface board, namely the NUTI,in slots 14 and 15 Optionalparameters:l REDUNDANCY (active and
standby backup): No sub-boardcan be added. Only thebaseboard held in slot 14 can beused. The attributes of the boardheld in slot 15 remainunchanged.
l SHARING (load sharing): Onlythe sub-board added to theNUTI held in slots 14 and 15can be used.
SHARING
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a logical NodeB on the left of the window, and then click . The Create PhysicalNodeB dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Create Physical NodeB dialog box
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Step 4 Based on the prepared data, select Series and Version. From the drop-down list of Template,select Do not use template, click OK to start importing the file, and the NodeB Creating dialogbox shows the importing progress.
Step 5 After the NodeB configuration file is imported, the Information dialog box is displayed. ClickOK to return to the Physical NodeB Basic Information window. The information of theconfigured physical NodeB is displayed on the right of the window.
Step 6 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 NodeB Equipment Layer window
Step 7 Click the Basic Info tab. Set the basic information of the NodeB.
l Click the Basic tab. Set or modify the related parameters such as IP Attribute and FTPSPolicy based on the prepared data.
l Click the More tab. Set or modify the related parameters such as Frame Mode and CHRSwitch based on the prepared data.
l Click the DST tab. Set the time zone and DST-related parameters.
Step 8 Click to save the settings.
----End
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-15
6.2.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial)This describes how to configure the boards in the baseband subrack of the macro NodeB. Theboards consist of the NMPT, NBBI/HBBI, EBBI/EBOI, HULP/EULP, NDLP/HDLP, NDTI/NUTI, and NMON.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NOTE
l Subrack 0 is for the baseband subrack.
l When configuring the NDTI/NUTI, ensure that the difference between MaxVPI and MinVPI is lessthan or equal to 5.
l The bearer mode for the NUTIs in slots 14 and 15 cannot be set to IPV4.
Prerequisite
The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a PhysicalNodeB (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-4 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
NMPT NMPT l When the NMPT needs a backup,configure two NMPTs. The activeNMPT is configured in slot 10, andthe standby NMPT is configured inslot 11.
l When the NMPT does not need abackup, configure one NMPT. TheNMPT is configured in slot 10.
If backup isnotrequired,configurethe NMPTin slot 10.
Internalplanning
NodeBmonitoringunit
NMON The NMON controls the RETcontroller and provides Boolean valuemonitoring interfaces such as the 32-line Boolean input interface and 7-lineBoolean output interface.
TheNMON isconfiguredin slot 16.
Baseboard - According to the capacity of the HBBI/NBBI, EBBI/EBOI, HULP/EULP, andHDLP/NDLP and the expected NodeBconfiguration, select applicablebaseband boards.
The HBOIand theEBOI areconfiguredin slots 0and 1.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Transportboards
- Optional parameters:l NDTI: One NDTI provides eight E1/
T1 ports.l NUTI: One NUTI provides eight E1/
T1 ports and two FE ports. If the E1/T1 sub-board is added to the NUTI,the NUTI can provide more E1/T1ports.
The NUTIisconfiguredin slot 13.
Bearermode
BearMode
This parameter is valid only when thetransport board is the NUTI. Optionalparameters:l ATM
l IPV4
IPV4
IP clockswitch
IPClockSwitch
You need to set the IP clock switch onthe NUTI baseboard to ENABLE if youplan to use the FE ports on the NUTIboard to receive the IP clock signals.(This parameter is valid only whenBearMode is set to IPV4.) Optionalparameters:l ENABLE
l DISABLE
ENABLE
Lineimpedance
LineImpedance
Line impedance of the E1 line Optionalparameters:l 75 (E1 working mode)
l 100 (T1 working mode)
l 120 (E1 working mode)
75
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-17
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch
This parameter is available when theNUTI is configured or theunchannelized optical sub-board isconfigured on the NUTI. Optionalparameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on
the configured Iub bandwidth andthe bandwidth occupied by R99users, traffic is allocated to HSDPAusers when the physical bandwidthrestriction is taken into account.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL:According to the flow control ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, traffic isallocated to HSDPA users when thedelay and packet loss on the Iubinterface are taken into account. TheRNC uses the R6 switch to performthis function. It is recommended thatthe RNC be used in compliance withthe R6 protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. The RNCallocates the bandwidth according tothe bandwidth on the Uu interfacereported by the NodeB. To performthis function, the reverse flowcontrol switch must be enabled bythe RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-5 Adding the boards in the baseband subrack
Step 5 In subrack 0, right-click slots 10 and 11 to add the NMPTs.
CAUTIONThe NMPT must be configured before other boards are configured.
Step 6 In subrack 0, right-click slots 00 and 01 to add the NBBI/HBBI or EBBI/EBOI.
NOTE
The NBBI/HBBI or EBBI/EBOI can be inserted in either slot 00 or 01.
Step 7 Configure the uplink/downlink processing board.
l In subrack 0, right-click slots 02 through 07 to add the HULPs or EULPs.
l In subrack 0, right-click slots 08 and 09 to add the NDLPs or HDLPs.
Step 8 In subrack 0, right-click slots 12 and 13 to add the NDTIs or NUTIs.
NOTE
l The NUTI and NDTI can be inserted in either slot 12 or 13.
l The method of adding the sub-board to NUTIs in slots 12 and 13 is the same as that in slots 14 and 15.
Step 9 In subrack 0, right-click slots 14 and 15 to add the NUTIs.
Option Description
Add the E1 sub-board Right-click the NUTI and choose Add E1Coverboard... from the shortcut menu.
The eight E1 ports on the E1 sub-board can be usedfor only the following elements:
l IMA links in the IMA group
l UNI link
l TreeLink PVC
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-19
Option Description
Add channelized optical sub-board. Right-click the NUTI and choose Add ChannelledCoverboard... from the shortcut menu.
The 63 optical E1 ports on the channelized opticalsub-board are used for the following elements:
l IMA links in the IMA group
l UNI link
l TreeLink PVC
Add unchannelized optical sub-board. Right-click the NUTI and choose AddUnChannelled Coverboard... from the shortcutmenu.
The two optical ports on the channelized opticalsub-board are used for the following elements:
l Upper-level bandwidth for the SDT link or theUDT link
l TreeLink PVC
Step 10 In subrack 0, right-click slot 16 to add the NMON.In the Board window, click the NMON Bool External Alarm tab, and then set WorkMode onthe tab page to CUSTOM. Now you can enter the alarm ID for this port.
----End
6.2.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group andthe CMB (Initial, Macro NodeB)
This describes how to add an uplink or an downlink baseband resource group so as to reasonablyallocate the uplink or downlink baseband resources of the NodeB.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-20 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
NOTE
l When configuring the downlink resource group, check that local cells pertaining to this resource groupshould be added to boards within the range of the resource group.
l The downlink processing units involved in the downlink resource group should pertain to an uplinkresource group. Otherwise, the alarm, informing that the downlink resource group is not a subset ofthe uplink resource group, will be reported.
l A maximum of six cells can be processed in a single uplink or downlink baseband resource group.When more than six cells are to be processed, you need to divide the baseband resources into groupsby adhering to the following policies:
l Each uplink resource group processes a maximum of six cells.
l Softer handover occurs between the cells that belong to one uplink resource group. Intra-frequencycells should be allocated in the same uplink resource group.
l When the previous policies are met, the number of resource groups should be as small as possible.For instance, it is unnecessary to divide the 3 x 2 configuration into two resource groups. In thiscase, only one resource group is required. That is, one resource group consisting of two carriers,six cells in total.
NOTE
When using the CMB, CMB data source such as TV channels of all or part of the cells within a NodeB isthe same. If all data sources are transferred over the Iub interface, it is a waste for the Iub resource. Withthe duplication function of the CME FACH, identical data sources are overlapped and will be transferredover the Iub interface as one data source. The NodeB fulfills the duplication of the CMB data betweencells. One source FACH and several corresponding destination FACHs form a CMB FACH group.
Prerequisite
One of the following boards is added:
l the HULP/EULP and the HDLP/NDLP
l the NBBI, HBBI, EBBI, or EBOI
For the configuration method, refer to 6.2.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack(Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-5 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
ID of theULbasebandresourcegroup
ULResourceGroupId
l A board that is not added to theUL baseband resource group, thatis, the HBBI/NBBI, EBBI/EBOI,and HULP/EULP, cannot processbaseband services.
l An uplink baseband resourcegroup can process a maximum ofsix cells.
l Insufficient uplink basebandresources may result in a cellsetup failure.
1
Internalplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-21
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
ID of theDLbasebandresourcegroup
DLResourceGroupId
l A board that is not added to theDL baseband resource group, thatis, the HBBI/NBBI, EBBI/EBOI,and HDLP/NDLP, cannot processbaseband services.
l The downlink processing unitswithin the downlink resourcegroup should belong to an uplinkresource group.
l The amount of local cellssupported by the resource groupis determined by the amount andthe specifications of the boardswithin the resource group.
0
Procedurel Add an uplink/downlink baseband resource group.
1. On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane,and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CMExpress window is displayed.
2. Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
3. Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer windowis displayed.
4. Click the Other Info tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-6.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-22 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-6 Adding an uplink baseband resource group
Table 6-6 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 List of uplink baseband resource groups
2 List of uplink baseband resources
3 List of uplink baseband resources added to the uplinkresource group
5. Click ULGroup, and in area 1, select ULResourceGroupId. Then, click to addone or multiple baseband resource groups.
6. Click to save the settings.7. Select an uplink resource group in area 1, and select an uplink resource item in area
2. Click , the selected item is added to the selected uplink resource groupand is shown in area 3.
8. Click DLGroup. Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to add one or multiple downlinkresource groups.
l (Optional) Configure the CMB.1. Click CMB in Figure 6-6, and configure SrcCellId, SrcFachId, DestCellId, and
DestFachId.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-23
NOTE
l If the Iub transmission sharing function of the CMB service is required, the NodeB isrequired to support this function.
l One source FACH and several corresponding destination FACHs form a CMB FACHgroup.
l Before configuring the Iub transmission sharing function at the NodeB, ensure that thecorresponding CMB FACH group data is configured at the RNC. Otherwise, the normalservice may be affected.
l In one CMB FACH group, the source logical cell ID must be different from the destinationlogical cell ID.
----End
6.2.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Macro NodeB)This describes how to add an RRU. The RRU is the outdoor RF remote unit. It is used to performfunctions such as the modulation and demodulation of baseband and RF signals, data processing,transferring data of the cascaded RRUs, and providing the multiplexing functions of the RFchannels for receiving and transmitting signals. Adding an RRU includes two parts: adding theRRU chain and adding the RRU module.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l The RRUs are of the following types: MRRU, RHUB, and PRRU.
l If an RRU is required to be added to the branch, it must be the PRRU (PicoRRU) and the PRRU mustbe configured where the RHUB is already configured.
l One MRRU supports one A antenna, one B antenna, and four carriers; one PRRU has only one Aantenna and supports two carriers.
The RRU is similar to the RF module in function. When RF modules such as the MTRU andMAFU are configured, at least one HBBI or NBBI is required; when the RRU is configured, atleast one EBOI is required. Based on the configured HBBI/NBBI/EBOI in slots 00 through 01of the baseband subrack, the NodeB can be configured with RF modules or RRUs, or both RFmodules and RRUs.
PrerequisiteThe EBOI is configured. For details, refer to Adding Boards in the Baseband Subrack(Initial).
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-24 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Preparation
Table 6-7 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Chaintype
Chain Type RRU topology structure Optionalparameters:l CHAIN (chain topology)
l RING (ring topology)
CHAIN
Internalplanning
Chain/Ring headsubracknumber
Head SubrackNo.
Number of the subrack that holdsthe head BBU in the chain or ringValue range: 0 through 1
0
Chain/Ring headboardnumber
Head Board No. Number of the slot that holds thehead BBU in the chain or ringOptional parameters:0
0
Head portnumber
Head Port No. Number of the port on the headBBU that is connected to the RRUin the chain or ringValue range: 0 through 2
0
Endsubracknumber
End SubrackNo
Number of the subrack that holdsthe end BBU in the ring. Thisparameter is applicable only to thering topology.Value range: 0 through 1
-
End boardnumber
End Board No Number of the slot that holds theend BBU in the ring. Thisparameter is valid for only the ringtopology.Optional parameters:0
-
End portnumber
End Port No Number of the port on the endBBU that is connected to the RRUin the chain or ring. This parameteris valid for only the ring topology.Value range: 0 through 2
-
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-25
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Breakposition 1
Break Position1
This parameter indicates theposition of the first break point.When you add and delete an RRUat a particular position in thecurrent RRU topology (ring orchain), set a break point at thisposition. After the RRU is addedor deleted, delete the break point toresume the data.For RRU chain, only one breakpoint can be set. After the settingof break point, the RRU chain isdivided into two parts:l The first part refers to the
section between the head ofRRU chain and the break point.This part of RRU service is notaffected.
l The second part refers to thepost-break point section of theRRU chain. This part of RRUservice is disrupted because it isin separate status.
OFF
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-26 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Breakposition 2
Break Position2
Second position of the break pointonly for the ring topologyWhen you add and delete an RRUat a particular position in thecurrent RRU topology (ring orchain), set a break point at thisposition. After the RRU is addedor deleted, delete the break point toresume the data.For the RRU ring, two break pointscan be set. After the setting ofbreak point, the RRU chain isdivided into three parts:l The first part refers to the
section between the head the ofRRU ring and the first breakpoint. This part of RRU servicecan be affected.
l The second part refers to thesection between two breakpoints of the RRU ring. Thispart of RRU service is disruptedbecause it is in separate status.
l The third part refers to thesection between the secondbreak point and the end of theRRU ring. This part of RRUservice can be affected.
For the RRU ring, when only onebreak point is set, the actual case isthat two break points are set in thesame position, that is, two breakpoints overlap.
-
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-27
Table 6-8 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
RFModule
- l In 1 x 1 configuration,configure one RF module.
l In 3 x 1 configuration,configure three RFmodules.
l In 3 x 2 configuration,configure three or six RFmodules.
l In 6 x 1 configuration,configure six RF modules.
Configureeither theRRU or theWRFU
Networkplanning
RRU name RRUName Name of the MRRU Name
Internalplanning
RRU chainnumber
RRUChainNo This parameter indicates thenumber of the chain to whichthe RRU is connected.Value range: 0 through 249
0
RRUnumber
RRUNo The TRUNK positionindicates that the RRU is atthe cascaded position of themain chain or ring. TheBRANCH position indicatesthat the RRU is at thecascaded position where theparent node is located. Theparent node refers to theRHUB.Value range: 0 through 7
2
Boardstatus
BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRUOptional parameters:l Block
l Unblock
UnBlock
Topologyposition ofthe RRU
ToPoPosition Optional parameters:l TRUNK (in the main ring)
l BRANCH (under theRHUB node)
TRUNK Networkplanning
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-28 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Initialcorrectionvalue forthe RTWP
RTWPofCarrierCarriernumberonRxRX channelnumber
Set the initial correctionvalue for the RTWP of thecarrier and TX channelspecified by the RRU. Valuerange:l Number of Carrier: 0 to 3
(MRRU/WRFU), 0 to 1(PRRU)
l RX channel number:0 to 1
l Initial correction value forthe RTWP: -130 to +130,unit: 0.1 dB
0
RRU IFoffset
IFOffset Offset direction of theIntermediate Frequency (IF)filter Optional parameters:l BOTTOM: Offset to
bottom, that is, to theminimum value (Theinterference signalfrequency is greater thanor equal to the currentreceive frequency.)
l MIDDLE: Offset tomiddle, that is, no offset(no interference)
l TOP: Offset to top, that is,to the maximum value(The interference signalfrequency is smaller thanthe current receivefrequency.)
l MINUS_50M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l PLUS_50M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l MINUS_75M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l PLUS_75M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
MIDDLE
Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRUValue range: -100 through+1000
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-29
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Vertical Vertical Vertical position of the RRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of theRRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Table 6-9 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
RRU name RRUName Name of the MRRU Name
Internalplanning
RRU chainnumber
RRUChainNo This parameter indicates thenumber of the chain to whichthe RRU is connected.Value range: 0 through 249
0
RRUnumber
RRUNo The TRUNK positionindicates that the RRU is atthe cascaded position of themain chain or ring. TheBRANCH position indicatesthat the RRU is at thecascaded position where theparent node is located. Theparent node refers to theRHUB.Value range: 0 through 7
2
Boardstatus
BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRUOptional parameters:l Block
l Unblock
UnBlock
Topologyposition ofthe RRU
ToPoPosition Optional parameters:l TRUNK (in the main
ring)l BRANCH (under the
RHUB node)
TRUNK Networkplanning
Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRUValue range: -100 through+1000
0
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-30 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Vertical Vertical Vertical position of the RRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of theRRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-7 Adding the RRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A/BTS3812E)
Step 5 Right-click the configured EBOI, and then choose Add RRUChain... from the shortcut menu.Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and then click OK to display the addedRRU Chain.
Step 6 Right-click the added RRU Chain. Based on the actual network, choose Add MRRU..., AddRHUB... or Add PRRU... from the shortcut menu. Configure related parameters based onprepared data, and click OK to display the added MRRU, PRRU or RHUB.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-31
Step 7 (Optional) Right-click the added RHUB, and choose Add PicoRRU... from the shortcut menuso as to add the PRRU on the RHUB.
----End
6.2.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial)This describes how to add RF modules, that is, the MAFU and MTRU modules.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l Subracks 2 and 3 are configured with RF modules.
l MTRUs in subrack 2 and MAFUs in subrack 3 are configured in pairs.
The RRU is similar to the RF module in function. When RF modules such as the MTRU andMAFU are configured, at least one HBBI or NBBI is required; when the RRU is configured, atleast one EBOI is required. Based on the configured HBBI/NBBI/EBOI in slots 00 through 01of the baseband subrack, the NodeB can be configured with RF modules or RRUs, or both RFmodules and RRUs.
Prerequisite
The HBBI or NBBI is configured. For details, refer to Adding Boards in the Baseband Subrack(Initial).
PreparationNone.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-8.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-32 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-8 Adding the MTRU and MAFU
Step 5 Right-click any slot in subrack 2 or 3, and choose Add RF Module... from the shortcut menu.Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and click OK to add the MTRU andMAFU.
----End
6.2.6 Adding an NGRU (Initial)The NodeB GPS Receiving Unit (NGRU) is a peripheral device used to position the UE andprovide the clock source for the NodeB. This describes how to add an NGRU.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
Prerequisite
The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a PhysicalNodeB (Initial).
PreparationNone.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-33
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-9.
Figure 6-9 Adding the NGRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A for instance)
Step 5 Right-click in the frame area of the cabinet, and choose Add NGRU... from the shortcut menu.Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and click OK to add the NGRU.
----End
6.2.7 Adding an NCMU (Initial, BTS3812AE)NCMU is a board to control the temperature of the air conditioner and heat exchanger. Thisdescribes how to add an NCMU for the BTS3812AE.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-34 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NOTE
The NCMU is used only for the BTS3812AE, and is configured in subrack 8.
PrerequisiteThe physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a PhysicalNodeB (Initial).
PreparationNone.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-10.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-35
Figure 6-10 Adding an NCMU.
Step 5 Right-click subrack 8, and choose Add Board... from the shortcut menu. Configure relatedparameters based on prepared data, and click OK to add the NCMU.
----End
6.2.8 Adding an NPMU (Initial, Macro NodeB)This describes how to add an NodeB Power Monitoring Unit (NPMU).
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
Prerequisite
The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a PhysicalNodeB (Initial).
PreparationNone.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-36 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Procedurel Add the NPMU to the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A.
NOTE
For the BTS3812A/BTS3812AE, the value of PowerType cannot be changed. You can use only thedefault value -48V DC.
1. On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane,and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CMExpress window is displayed.
2. Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
3. Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer windowis displayed.
4. Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-11.
Figure 6-11 Adding an NPMU
5. Right-click the lower left part of subrack 7, and choose Add Board... from the shortcutmenu. Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and click OK to add theNPMU.
l Modify the NPMU attributes in the BTS3812E.
1. On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane,and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CMExpress window is displayed.
2. Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
3. Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer windowis displayed.
4. Click the Basic Info tab. Click in the PowerType editing box, the NPMUAttribute is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-12.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-37
Figure 6-12 Modifying the NPMU attributes
5. Select the button 220V AC, and set related parameters based on prepared data. ClickOK to modify the NPMU attributes.
NOTE
The button -48V DC or 24V DC is selected to set the type of the power supply for the BTS3812Ecabinet. In these two cases, the BTS3812E has no NPMU, and the parameters in the NPMUAttribute dialog box cannot be set.
----End
6.2.9 Adding NPSUs (Initial, BTS3812AE/BTS3812A)This describes how to configure the NodeB Power Supply Unit (NPSU) for the macro NodeB,that is, the BTS3812AE or BTS3812A.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
The NPSU is configured in any of the seven slots except the one that holds the NPMU of subrack 7. TheNPMU controls the status of the NPSU.
Prerequisite
The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a PhysicalNodeB (Initial).
PreparationNone.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-38 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-13.
Figure 6-13 Adding an NPSU.
Step 5 Right-click any slot other than the lower leftmost one of subrack 7 on the tab page, and thenchoose Add Board... from the shortcut menu to add the NPSU.
----End
6.2.10 Adding Batteries (Initial, BTS3812AE/BTS3812A)This describes how to configure batteries for the macro NodeB (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A). Thebatteries are backup power facilities of the NodeB.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
CAUTIONCapacity is the battery capacity parameter. The value of this parameter must be set as that ofthe actual capacity of the batteries. Otherwise, the batteries can be damaged. For details aboutthe actual capacity of the batteries, refer to the related instructions of the batteries.
PrerequisiteThe physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a PhysicalNodeB (Initial).
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-39
PreparationNone.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-14.
Figure 6-14 Adding Batteries
Step 5 Right-click subrack 9, and choose Add Board... from the shortcut menu. Configure relatedparameters based on prepared data, and click OK to add batteries.
----End
6.2.11 Adding an ALD (Initial)This describes how to add an ALD. The ALD consists of the SINGEL_RET, the MULTI_RET,the STMA, the SASU, and the RET_2G.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-40 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
NOTE
l Only the ALD that supports protocols such as AISG or 3GPP IUANT needs to be configured. TheALD can be configured on only the MAFU of subrack 3 for the macro NodeB or on the MRRU for thedistributed NodeB.
l In typical installation scenarios, you can add the ALD without manually entering the vendor codes orSNs, which can be obtained by scanning. In other installation scenarios, you are required to manuallyenter the vendor codes and SNs when adding the ALD. Otherwise, the system cannot communicatewith the ALD. The vendor codes and SNs must be entered at the same time. If only one of them isentered, the system provides a parameter illegality message.
l In 2G extended application scenarios, you are not required to configure the subrack number, the cabinetnumber, or the antenna connector number. In other scenarios, ensure that the configured subracknumber, the cabinet number, or the antenna connector number are consistent with the number of theequipment that the ALD is connected to. Otherwise, the mapping between the ALD and sector cannotbe determined.
Prerequisitel The RF module is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial).
l The RRU sites are configured. For details, refer to 6.4.4 Adding an RRU (Initial,Distributed NodeB).
Preparation
Table 6-10 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Antennaconnectornumber
AntennaNo In the 2G extended scenario, thisparameter is unavailable.When dual-polarized RET isconfigured and the value is NOA;when single-polarized RET or STMAis configured, the value is NOA orNOB.
N0A Networkplanning
DeviceName
DeviceName Name of the ALD. The maximumlength is a string of 31 characters.
RET 1 Internalplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-41
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Scenario UseCase Scenario of the antenna Optionalparameters:l REGULAR: Regular installation,
that is, only one dual polarizationRET can be installed to anANT_Tx/RxA port, and this RETis controlled through this port.
l SECTOR_SPLITTING: Sectorsplitting, that is, a maximum of sixRETs can be installed to anANT_Tx/RxA port through asplitter, and these RETs arecontrolled through this port.
l DAISY_CHAIN: Antennacascading, that is, a maximum ofsix RETs installed to differentports can be cascaded to anANT_Tx/RxA port throughcontrol signal cables, and theseRETs are controlled through thisport.
l 2G_EXTENSION: 2G extension.The 2G RET is controlled throughthe NodeB. It is an extended modeof cascaded NodeBs.
REGULAR
Networkplanning
Antennapolarization type
RETType When the device type is eitherSINGLE_RET or MULTI_RETsupported by the AISG protocol, thisparameter is valid. Optionalparameters:l In the scenario of antenna
cascaded application, theparameter value can be set to eitherDUAL (dual polarization antenna)or SINGLE (single polarizationantenna).
l In other scenarios other thanantenna cascading, the value ofthis parameter can only be DUAL.
DUAL
Vendorcode
VendorCode Vendor code of the ALD. The lengthis a 2-byte letter or number.For details about the relation betweenthe vendor code and vendor name ofthe ALD, refer to the AISG protocol.
-
Internalplanning
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-42 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Equipment serialnumber
SerialNo Serial number of the ALD. Themaximum length is a 17-byte letter ornumber.
-
Antennasubunitnumber
SubUnit Select different subunit numbersaccording to different antenna devicetypes:l AISG1.1 The subunit number of
STMA can only be 0.l AISG2.0 The subunit number of
STMA and SASU can be 1 or 2.l When multiple antennas support 6
subunits, the subunit numberranges from 1 to 6. When multipleantennas do not support 6 subunits,the subunit number ranges from 1to 2.
l The subunit number for a singleantenna is not displayed, and is 0by default.
0
NetworkplanningAntenna
tilt angleAntTilt Downtilt of the RET antenna
Value range: -100 through +3000
Workingmode ofthe STMA
BypassMode Optional parameters:l NORMAL (normal mode)
l Bypass mode
NORMAL
SASUgain
l GSMGain
l UMTSGain
According to different types ofchannels, the SASU gain can bedivided into the following two types:l GSMGain indicates the SASU
gain in the GSM channel. Valuerange: 0 through 255.
l UMTSGain indicates the SASUgain in the UMTS channel. Valuerange: 0 through 255.
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-43
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
DC switchon theSASUantennaconnector
DCSwitch DC switch (on the SASU antennaconnector) status When the status isset to GSM, the DC power load of theSASU GSM cannot be started.Optional parameters:l GSM (The GSM feeder supplies
the power)l UMTS (The UMTS feeder
supplies the power)l OFF
UMTS
SASUGSM DCpower load
DCload The DC power load is applied to theTMA that simulates the GSM system.The SASU needs to inform the GSMthat a TMA is connected to the BTSantenna when the UE sets a relativelyhigh gain for the GSM Rx channelthrough the WCDMA NodeB. Theeasiest method is that you add a DCload to the GSM BTS. In thissituation, the GSM BTS is informedof the TMA connected to the antennaby checking the DC power of theantenna.
20
STMAgain
Gain Value range: 0 through 255 0
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab, and right-click the added MAFU in subrack 3 or the added MRRUin the RRUChain subrack. Choose Antenna Line Device from the shortcut menu. The AntennaLine Device window is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-15.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-44 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-15 Adding the ALD
Step 5 Click the tab SINGLE_RET or MULTI_RET, and click . Configure related parameters
based on prepared data, and then click to add an RET.
Step 6 Click the STMA tab, and click . Set related parameters based on the prepared data, and click
to add an STMA.
Step 7 Click the STMA tab, and click . Set related parameters based on the prepared data, and click
to add an SASU.
Step 8 Click the RET_2G tab, and click . Set related parameters based on the prepared data, and
click to add an RET_2G.
----End
6.3 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812E (Initial)This describes how to configure the equipment layer data of the BTS3812E.
ContextOn the CME client, Figure 6-16 shows the panel of the BTS3812E.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-45
Figure 6-16 BTS3812E panel
Table 6-11 Module information
SequenceNumber
Module/Board Type
Description
1 RF Module l One RF module consists of the MAFU and MTRU.
l The MTRU is configured in subrack 2, and the MAFU isconfigured in subrack 3. The MAFU and MTRU must existin pairs.
2 Fan Provides the function of a fan, and is configured in subrack 1.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-46 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
SequenceNumber
Module/Board Type
Description
3 Baseboard l NMPT: NodeB Main Processing and Timing Unit, and isinstalled in slots 10 and 11 of the baseband subrack.
l NMON: NodeB Monitoring Unit, and is installed in slot 16of the baseband subrack.
l NBBI\HBBI\EBBI\EBOI: NodeB HSDPA supportedbaseband processing interface unit, and is inserted in slots 0and 1 in the baseband subrack.
l HULP/EULP: NodeB HSDPA supported uplink basebandprocessing interface unit, and is inserted in slots 2 and 7 inthe baseband subrack.
l HDLP/NDLP: NodeB HSDPA supported downlinkbaseband processing interface unit, and is inserted in slots 8and 9 in the baseband subrack.
l NDTI: NodeB Digital Trunk Interface Unit, and is installedin slots 12 and 13 of the baseband subrack.
l NUTI: NodeB Universal Transport Interface Unit, and isinstalled in slots from 12 to 15 of the baseband subrack.
6.3.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial)This describes how to manually configure the basic information for the NodeB.
6.3.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial)This describes how to configure the boards in the baseband subrack of the macro NodeB. Theboards consist of the NMPT, NBBI/HBBI, EBBI/EBOI, HULP/EULP, NDLP/HDLP, NDTI/NUTI, and NMON.
6.3.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial, MacroNodeB)This describes how to add an uplink or an downlink baseband resource group so as to reasonablyallocate the uplink or downlink baseband resources of the NodeB.
6.3.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Macro NodeB)This describes how to add an RRU. The RRU is the outdoor RF remote unit. It is used to performfunctions such as the modulation and demodulation of baseband and RF signals, data processing,transferring data of the cascaded RRUs, and providing the multiplexing functions of the RFchannels for receiving and transmitting signals. Adding an RRU includes two parts: adding theRRU chain and adding the RRU module.
6.3.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial)This describes how to add RF modules, that is, the MAFU and MTRU modules.
6.3.6 Adding an NGRU (Initial)The NodeB GPS Receiving Unit (NGRU) is a peripheral device used to position the UE andprovide the clock source for the NodeB. This describes how to add an NGRU.
6.3.7 Adding an NEMU (Initial, BTS3812E)This describes how to configure a NodeB Environment Monitoring Unit (NEMU) for theBTS3812E.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-47
6.3.8 Adding an NPMU (Initial, Macro NodeB)This describes how to add an NodeB Power Monitoring Unit (NPMU).
6.3.9 Adding NPSUs (Initial, BTS3812E)This describes how to configure the NodeB Power Supply Unit (NPSU) for the macro NodeB,that is, the BTS3812E.
6.3.10 Adding Batteries (Initial, BTS3812E)This describes how to configure batteries for the BTS3812E. The batteries are backup powerfacilities of the NodeB.
6.3.11 Adding an ALD (Initial)This describes how to add an ALD. The ALD consists of the SINGEL_RET, the MULTI_RET,the STMA, the SASU, and the RET_2G.
6.3.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial)This describes how to manually configure the basic information for the NodeB.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
Prerequisite
The logical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.1 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-12 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Workingmode ofE1/T1links
E1T1WorkMode
The working mode of E1/T1 linksdepends on the state of DIPswitches on the BBU or NUTI andthe configuration file.
E1
Negotiation withthedestination
Clocksource
ClockSource This parameter is valid only whenClockWorkMode is set toMANUAL. Optional parameters:l GPSCARD (GPS card clock
source)l BITS (BITS clock source): The
outdoor BBU (HBBUC) cannotuse this clock source.
l LINE (clock source extractedfrom the Iub interface line)
l IP (IP clock source)
LINE
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-48 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Workingmode ofthe clock
ClockWorkMode
Working mode of the system clockOptional parameters:l MANUAL (manual mode): In
this mode, the user specifies theclock source, and automaticallyswitching the system clock toother clock sources is notallowed. Even if the specifiedclock source is faulty, suchswitching is not allowed.
l FREE (free-run mode): Thefree-run mode is the workingmode for the clock source at aninitial phase.
MANUAL
Networkplanning
Workingmode ofthe IPclock
IPClockMode This parameter is valid only whenClockSource is set to IP. Optionalparameters:l AUTO (default value)
l MANUAL (This parameter isconfigured when the IP clock isalready configured.)
-
GPSfeederdelay
GPSCableDelay Delay of the GPS feederValue range: 0 through 1000
0 Internalplanning
SNTPswitch
SNTPSwitch Synchronization switch Optionalparameters:l ON (SNTP client requires time
synchronization)l OFF (SNTP client does not
require time synchronization)
ON Networkplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-49
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
IP addressof theSNTPserver
SNTPServerIP The SNTP server is used tosynchronize the time of multipleSNTP clients, which is importantfor centralized maintenance,especially for alarm management.For example, when an E1 link isdisconnected, the NodeB and theRNC report the alarm at the sametime based on SNTP. This helpsfault locating.The SNTP server of the NodeB canbe either the M2000 or the RNC.l The SNTP server of the NodeB
is the RNC (recommended): setSNTPServerIP to the BAMinternal IP address.
l The SNTP server of the NodeBis the M2000: setSNTPServerIP to the M2000host external IP address.
10.11.1.1 Negotiation withthedestination
Synchronizationperiod
SyncPeriod The period in which nodes aresynchronized.Value range: 1 through 525600
10
Networkplanning
Demodulation mode
DemMode Demodulation mode of the NodeBOptional parameters:l DEM_2_CHAN (two-way
demodulation mode)l DEM_4_CHAN (four-way
demodulation mode)l DEM_ECON_4_CHAN (four-
way economical demodulationmode)
DEM_2_CHAN
High BERthresholdsof E1/T1
HighThreshold Optional parameters:l 1E-3
l 1E-4
l 1E-5
l 1E-6
1E-5
Smoothpowerswitch
SMTHPWRSwitch
Optional parameters:l OPEN
l CLOSE
CLOSE
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-50 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Lower andupperlimits oftimersetting
LowerLimit Disabling the lower limit of thetime range for the transmitterValue range: 0 through 255
0
UpperLimit Disabling the upper limit of thetime range for the transmitterValue range: 0 through 255
0
NodeBresourcedistribution mode
ResAllocateRule
Optional parameters:l PERFFIRST (handover
performance priority mode)l CAPAFIRST (capacity priority
mode)
PERFFIRST
NodeB IPaddress
LocalIP IP address of the NodeB for localmaintenance
17.21.2.15
Subnetmask
LocalIPMask Subnet mask of the NodeB IPaddress for local maintenance
255.255.0.0
NMPTbackupmode
NMPTBackupMode
This parameter is available onlyfor the macro NodeB.
ENABLE Internalplanning
STM-1framemode
NAOIFrameMode (macroNodeB)
Frame structure of the optical portchip Optional parameters:l FRAMEMODE_SONET (in
SONET mode)l FRAMEMODE_SDH (in SDH
mode)
-
Negotiation withthedestination
STM1FrameMode (distributedNodeB)
FRAMEMODE_SDH
Management unit
Au This parameter is valid only for thechannelized optical interface.Optional parameters:l AU3
l AU4
AU3
Bypassunit
Tu This parameter is valid only for thechannelized optical interface.Optional parameters:l TU11 (the E1/T1 mode is T1)
l TU12 (the E1/T1 mode is E1)
TU12
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-51
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Power typeof themacroNodeB
PowerType Configuring the power type for theNodeB. This parameter isavailable only for the macroNodeB. Optional parameters:l -48 V DC
l 24 V DC
l 220 V AC
-48 V DC
Internalplanning
Reportswitch forcall historyrecord
CHRSwitch When the NodeB CHR reportswitch is on, the NodeB uploadsthe CHR log to the FTP server thatis at the NodeB side.
OFF
Iubinterfaceboardgroupbackupmode
IUBGroup1 Group backup mode of the Iubinterface board, namely the NDTIor the NUTI, in slots 12 and 13Optional parameters:l REDUNDANCY (active and
standby backup): The boardmust be the NUTI. No sub-board can be added. Only thebaseboard held in slot 12 can beused. The attributes of the boardheld in slot 13 remainunchanged.
l SHARING (load sharing): TheNDTI and NUTI can be insertedin either slot 12 or 13. Both theboard of the baseband subrackand the sub-board can be used.
SHARING
IUBGroup2 Group backup mode of the Iubinterface board, namely the NUTI,in slots 14 and 15 Optionalparameters:l REDUNDANCY (active and
standby backup): No sub-boardcan be added. Only thebaseboard held in slot 14 can beused. The attributes of the boardheld in slot 15 remainunchanged.
l SHARING (load sharing): Onlythe sub-board added to theNUTI held in slots 14 and 15can be used.
SHARING
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-52 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a logical NodeB on the left of the window, and then click . The Create PhysicalNodeB dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-17.
Figure 6-17 Create Physical NodeB dialog box
Step 4 Based on the prepared data, select Series and Version. From the drop-down list of Template,select Do not use template, click OK to start importing the file, and the NodeB Creating dialogbox shows the importing progress.
Step 5 After the NodeB configuration file is imported, the Information dialog box is displayed. ClickOK to return to the Physical NodeB Basic Information window. The information of theconfigured physical NodeB is displayed on the right of the window.
Step 6 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 6-18.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-53
Figure 6-18 NodeB Equipment Layer window
Step 7 Click the Basic Info tab. Set the basic information of the NodeB.
l Click the Basic tab. Set or modify the related parameters such as IP Attribute and FTPSPolicy based on the prepared data.
l Click the More tab. Set or modify the related parameters such as Frame Mode and CHRSwitch based on the prepared data.
l Click the DST tab. Set the time zone and DST-related parameters.
Step 8 Click to save the settings.
----End
6.3.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial)This describes how to configure the boards in the baseband subrack of the macro NodeB. Theboards consist of the NMPT, NBBI/HBBI, EBBI/EBOI, HULP/EULP, NDLP/HDLP, NDTI/NUTI, and NMON.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-54 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
NOTE
l Subrack 0 is for the baseband subrack.
l When configuring the NDTI/NUTI, ensure that the difference between MaxVPI and MinVPI is lessthan or equal to 5.
l The bearer mode for the NUTIs in slots 14 and 15 cannot be set to IPV4.
PrerequisiteThe physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.3.1 Manually Creating a PhysicalNodeB (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-13 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
NMPT NMPT l When the NMPT needs a backup,configure two NMPTs. The activeNMPT is configured in slot 10, andthe standby NMPT is configured inslot 11.
l When the NMPT does not need abackup, configure one NMPT. TheNMPT is configured in slot 10.
If backup isnotrequired,configurethe NMPTin slot 10.
Internalplanning
NodeBmonitoringunit
NMON The NMON controls the RETcontroller and provides Boolean valuemonitoring interfaces such as the 32-line Boolean input interface and 7-lineBoolean output interface.
TheNMON isconfiguredin slot 16.
Baseboard - According to the capacity of the HBBI/NBBI, EBBI/EBOI, HULP/EULP, andHDLP/NDLP and the expected NodeBconfiguration, select applicablebaseband boards.
The HBOIand theEBOI areconfiguredin slots 0and 1.
Transportboards
- Optional parameters:l NDTI: One NDTI provides eight E1/
T1 ports.l NUTI: One NUTI provides eight E1/
T1 ports and two FE ports. If the E1/T1 sub-board is added to the NUTI,the NUTI can provide more E1/T1ports.
The NUTIisconfiguredin slot 13.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-55
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Bearermode
BearMode
This parameter is valid only when thetransport board is the NUTI. Optionalparameters:l ATM
l IPV4
IPV4
IP clockswitch
IPClockSwitch
You need to set the IP clock switch onthe NUTI baseboard to ENABLE if youplan to use the FE ports on the NUTIboard to receive the IP clock signals.(This parameter is valid only whenBearMode is set to IPV4.) Optionalparameters:l ENABLE
l DISABLE
ENABLE
Lineimpedance
LineImpedance
Line impedance of the E1 line Optionalparameters:l 75 (E1 working mode)
l 100 (T1 working mode)
l 120 (E1 working mode)
75
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-56 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch
This parameter is available when theNUTI is configured or theunchannelized optical sub-board isconfigured on the NUTI. Optionalparameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on
the configured Iub bandwidth andthe bandwidth occupied by R99users, traffic is allocated to HSDPAusers when the physical bandwidthrestriction is taken into account.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL:According to the flow control ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, traffic isallocated to HSDPA users when thedelay and packet loss on the Iubinterface are taken into account. TheRNC uses the R6 switch to performthis function. It is recommended thatthe RNC be used in compliance withthe R6 protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. The RNCallocates the bandwidth according tothe bandwidth on the Uu interfacereported by the NodeB. To performthis function, the reverse flowcontrol switch must be enabled bythe RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-57
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-19.
Figure 6-19 Adding the boards in the baseband subrack
Step 5 In subrack 0, right-click slots 10 and 11 to add the NMPTs.
CAUTIONThe NMPT must be configured before other boards are configured.
Step 6 In subrack 0, right-click slots 00 and 01 to add the NBBI/HBBI or EBBI/EBOI.
NOTE
The NBBI/HBBI or EBBI/EBOI can be inserted in either slot 00 or 01.
Step 7 Configure the uplink/downlink processing board.
l In subrack 0, right-click slots 02 through 07 to add the HULPs or EULPs.
l In subrack 0, right-click slots 08 and 09 to add the NDLPs or HDLPs.
Step 8 In subrack 0, right-click slots 12 and 13 to add the NDTIs or NUTIs.
NOTE
l The NUTI and NDTI can be inserted in either slot 12 or 13.
l The method of adding the sub-board to NUTIs in slots 12 and 13 is the same as that in slots 14 and 15.
Step 9 In subrack 0, right-click slots 14 and 15 to add the NUTIs.
Option Description
Add the E1 sub-board Right-click the NUTI and choose Add E1Coverboard... from the shortcut menu.
The eight E1 ports on the E1 sub-board can be usedfor only the following elements:
l IMA links in the IMA group
l UNI link
l TreeLink PVC
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-58 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Option Description
Add channelized optical sub-board. Right-click the NUTI and choose Add ChannelledCoverboard... from the shortcut menu.
The 63 optical E1 ports on the channelized opticalsub-board are used for the following elements:
l IMA links in the IMA group
l UNI link
l TreeLink PVC
Add unchannelized optical sub-board. Right-click the NUTI and choose AddUnChannelled Coverboard... from the shortcutmenu.
The two optical ports on the channelized opticalsub-board are used for the following elements:
l Upper-level bandwidth for the SDT link or theUDT link
l TreeLink PVC
Step 10 In subrack 0, right-click slot 16 to add the NMON.In the Board window, click the NMON Bool External Alarm tab, and then set WorkMode onthe tab page to CUSTOM. Now you can enter the alarm ID for this port.
----End
6.3.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group andthe CMB (Initial, Macro NodeB)
This describes how to add an uplink or an downlink baseband resource group so as to reasonablyallocate the uplink or downlink baseband resources of the NodeB.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-59
NOTE
l When configuring the downlink resource group, check that local cells pertaining to this resource groupshould be added to boards within the range of the resource group.
l The downlink processing units involved in the downlink resource group should pertain to an uplinkresource group. Otherwise, the alarm, informing that the downlink resource group is not a subset ofthe uplink resource group, will be reported.
l A maximum of six cells can be processed in a single uplink or downlink baseband resource group.When more than six cells are to be processed, you need to divide the baseband resources into groupsby adhering to the following policies:
l Each uplink resource group processes a maximum of six cells.
l Softer handover occurs between the cells that belong to one uplink resource group. Intra-frequencycells should be allocated in the same uplink resource group.
l When the previous policies are met, the number of resource groups should be as small as possible.For instance, it is unnecessary to divide the 3 x 2 configuration into two resource groups. In thiscase, only one resource group is required. That is, one resource group consisting of two carriers,six cells in total.
NOTE
When using the CMB, CMB data source such as TV channels of all or part of the cells within a NodeB isthe same. If all data sources are transferred over the Iub interface, it is a waste for the Iub resource. Withthe duplication function of the CME FACH, identical data sources are overlapped and will be transferredover the Iub interface as one data source. The NodeB fulfills the duplication of the CMB data betweencells. One source FACH and several corresponding destination FACHs form a CMB FACH group.
Prerequisite
One of the following boards is added:
l the HULP/EULP and the HDLP/NDLP
l the NBBI, HBBI, EBBI, or EBOI
For the configuration method, refer to 6.3.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack(Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-14 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
ID of theULbasebandresourcegroup
ULResourceGroupId
l A board that is not added to theUL baseband resource group, thatis, the HBBI/NBBI, EBBI/EBOI,and HULP/EULP, cannot processbaseband services.
l An uplink baseband resourcegroup can process a maximum ofsix cells.
l Insufficient uplink basebandresources may result in a cellsetup failure.
1
Internalplanning
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-60 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
ID of theDLbasebandresourcegroup
DLResourceGroupId
l A board that is not added to theDL baseband resource group, thatis, the HBBI/NBBI, EBBI/EBOI,and HDLP/NDLP, cannot processbaseband services.
l The downlink processing unitswithin the downlink resourcegroup should belong to an uplinkresource group.
l The amount of local cellssupported by the resource groupis determined by the amount andthe specifications of the boardswithin the resource group.
0
Procedurel Add an uplink/downlink baseband resource group.
1. On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane,and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CMExpress window is displayed.
2. Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
3. Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer windowis displayed.
4. Click the Other Info tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-20.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-61
Figure 6-20 Adding an uplink baseband resource group
Table 6-15 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 List of uplink baseband resource groups
2 List of uplink baseband resources
3 List of uplink baseband resources added to the uplinkresource group
5. Click ULGroup, and in area 1, select ULResourceGroupId. Then, click to addone or multiple baseband resource groups.
6. Click to save the settings.7. Select an uplink resource group in area 1, and select an uplink resource item in area
2. Click , the selected item is added to the selected uplink resource groupand is shown in area 3.
8. Click DLGroup. Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to add one or multiple downlinkresource groups.
l (Optional) Configure the CMB.1. Click CMB in Figure 6-20, and configure SrcCellId, SrcFachId, DestCellId, and
DestFachId.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-62 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
NOTE
l If the Iub transmission sharing function of the CMB service is required, the NodeB isrequired to support this function.
l One source FACH and several corresponding destination FACHs form a CMB FACHgroup.
l Before configuring the Iub transmission sharing function at the NodeB, ensure that thecorresponding CMB FACH group data is configured at the RNC. Otherwise, the normalservice may be affected.
l In one CMB FACH group, the source logical cell ID must be different from the destinationlogical cell ID.
----End
6.3.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Macro NodeB)This describes how to add an RRU. The RRU is the outdoor RF remote unit. It is used to performfunctions such as the modulation and demodulation of baseband and RF signals, data processing,transferring data of the cascaded RRUs, and providing the multiplexing functions of the RFchannels for receiving and transmitting signals. Adding an RRU includes two parts: adding theRRU chain and adding the RRU module.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l The RRUs are of the following types: MRRU, RHUB, and PRRU.
l If an RRU is required to be added to the branch, it must be the PRRU (PicoRRU) and the PRRU mustbe configured where the RHUB is already configured.
l One MRRU supports one A antenna, one B antenna, and four carriers; one PRRU has only one Aantenna and supports two carriers.
The RRU is similar to the RF module in function. When RF modules such as the MTRU andMAFU are configured, at least one HBBI or NBBI is required; when the RRU is configured, atleast one EBOI is required. Based on the configured HBBI/NBBI/EBOI in slots 00 through 01of the baseband subrack, the NodeB can be configured with RF modules or RRUs, or both RFmodules and RRUs.
PrerequisiteThe EBOI is configured. For details, refer to Adding Boards in the Baseband Subrack(Initial).
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-63
Preparation
Table 6-16 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Chaintype
Chain Type RRU topology structure Optionalparameters:l CHAIN (chain topology)
l RING (ring topology)
CHAIN
Internalplanning
Chain/Ring headsubracknumber
Head SubrackNo.
Number of the subrack that holdsthe head BBU in the chain or ringValue range: 0 through 1
0
Chain/Ring headboardnumber
Head Board No. Number of the slot that holds thehead BBU in the chain or ringOptional parameters:0
0
Head portnumber
Head Port No. Number of the port on the headBBU that is connected to the RRUin the chain or ringValue range: 0 through 2
0
Endsubracknumber
End SubrackNo
Number of the subrack that holdsthe end BBU in the ring. Thisparameter is applicable only to thering topology.Value range: 0 through 1
-
End boardnumber
End Board No Number of the slot that holds theend BBU in the ring. Thisparameter is valid for only the ringtopology.Optional parameters:0
-
End portnumber
End Port No Number of the port on the endBBU that is connected to the RRUin the chain or ring. This parameteris valid for only the ring topology.Value range: 0 through 2
-
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-64 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Breakposition 1
Break Position1
This parameter indicates theposition of the first break point.When you add and delete an RRUat a particular position in thecurrent RRU topology (ring orchain), set a break point at thisposition. After the RRU is addedor deleted, delete the break point toresume the data.For RRU chain, only one breakpoint can be set. After the settingof break point, the RRU chain isdivided into two parts:l The first part refers to the
section between the head ofRRU chain and the break point.This part of RRU service is notaffected.
l The second part refers to thepost-break point section of theRRU chain. This part of RRUservice is disrupted because it isin separate status.
OFF
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-65
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Breakposition 2
Break Position2
Second position of the break pointonly for the ring topologyWhen you add and delete an RRUat a particular position in thecurrent RRU topology (ring orchain), set a break point at thisposition. After the RRU is addedor deleted, delete the break point toresume the data.For the RRU ring, two break pointscan be set. After the setting ofbreak point, the RRU chain isdivided into three parts:l The first part refers to the
section between the head the ofRRU ring and the first breakpoint. This part of RRU servicecan be affected.
l The second part refers to thesection between two breakpoints of the RRU ring. Thispart of RRU service is disruptedbecause it is in separate status.
l The third part refers to thesection between the secondbreak point and the end of theRRU ring. This part of RRUservice can be affected.
For the RRU ring, when only onebreak point is set, the actual case isthat two break points are set in thesame position, that is, two breakpoints overlap.
-
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-66 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 6-17 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
RFModule
- l In 1 x 1 configuration,configure one RF module.
l In 3 x 1 configuration,configure three RFmodules.
l In 3 x 2 configuration,configure three or six RFmodules.
l In 6 x 1 configuration,configure six RF modules.
Configureeither theRRU or theWRFU
Networkplanning
RRU name RRUName Name of the MRRU Name
Internalplanning
RRU chainnumber
RRUChainNo This parameter indicates thenumber of the chain to whichthe RRU is connected.Value range: 0 through 249
0
RRUnumber
RRUNo The TRUNK positionindicates that the RRU is atthe cascaded position of themain chain or ring. TheBRANCH position indicatesthat the RRU is at thecascaded position where theparent node is located. Theparent node refers to theRHUB.Value range: 0 through 7
2
Boardstatus
BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRUOptional parameters:l Block
l Unblock
UnBlock
Topologyposition ofthe RRU
ToPoPosition Optional parameters:l TRUNK (in the main ring)
l BRANCH (under theRHUB node)
TRUNK Networkplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-67
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Initialcorrectionvalue forthe RTWP
RTWPofCarrierCarriernumberonRxRX channelnumber
Set the initial correctionvalue for the RTWP of thecarrier and TX channelspecified by the RRU. Valuerange:l Number of Carrier: 0 to 3
(MRRU/WRFU), 0 to 1(PRRU)
l RX channel number:0 to 1
l Initial correction value forthe RTWP: -130 to +130,unit: 0.1 dB
0
RRU IFoffset
IFOffset Offset direction of theIntermediate Frequency (IF)filter Optional parameters:l BOTTOM: Offset to
bottom, that is, to theminimum value (Theinterference signalfrequency is greater thanor equal to the currentreceive frequency.)
l MIDDLE: Offset tomiddle, that is, no offset(no interference)
l TOP: Offset to top, that is,to the maximum value(The interference signalfrequency is smaller thanthe current receivefrequency.)
l MINUS_50M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l PLUS_50M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l MINUS_75M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l PLUS_75M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
MIDDLE
Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRUValue range: -100 through+1000
0
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-68 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Vertical Vertical Vertical position of the RRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of theRRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Table 6-18 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
RRU name RRUName Name of the MRRU Name
Internalplanning
RRU chainnumber
RRUChainNo This parameter indicates thenumber of the chain to whichthe RRU is connected.Value range: 0 through 249
0
RRUnumber
RRUNo The TRUNK positionindicates that the RRU is atthe cascaded position of themain chain or ring. TheBRANCH position indicatesthat the RRU is at thecascaded position where theparent node is located. Theparent node refers to theRHUB.Value range: 0 through 7
2
Boardstatus
BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRUOptional parameters:l Block
l Unblock
UnBlock
Topologyposition ofthe RRU
ToPoPosition Optional parameters:l TRUNK (in the main
ring)l BRANCH (under the
RHUB node)
TRUNK Networkplanning
Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRUValue range: -100 through+1000
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-69
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Vertical Vertical Vertical position of the RRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of theRRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-21.
Figure 6-21 Adding the RRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A/BTS3812E)
Step 5 Right-click the configured EBOI, and then choose Add RRUChain... from the shortcut menu.Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and then click OK to display the addedRRU Chain.
Step 6 Right-click the added RRU Chain. Based on the actual network, choose Add MRRU..., AddRHUB... or Add PRRU... from the shortcut menu. Configure related parameters based onprepared data, and click OK to display the added MRRU, PRRU or RHUB.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-70 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Step 7 (Optional) Right-click the added RHUB, and choose Add PicoRRU... from the shortcut menuso as to add the PRRU on the RHUB.
----End
6.3.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial)This describes how to add RF modules, that is, the MAFU and MTRU modules.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l Subracks 2 and 3 are configured with RF modules.
l MTRUs in subrack 2 and MAFUs in subrack 3 are configured in pairs.
The RRU is similar to the RF module in function. When RF modules such as the MTRU andMAFU are configured, at least one HBBI or NBBI is required; when the RRU is configured, atleast one EBOI is required. Based on the configured HBBI/NBBI/EBOI in slots 00 through 01of the baseband subrack, the NodeB can be configured with RF modules or RRUs, or both RFmodules and RRUs.
Prerequisite
The HBBI or NBBI is configured. For details, refer to Adding Boards in the Baseband Subrack(Initial).
PreparationNone.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-22.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-71
Figure 6-22 Adding the MTRU and MAFU
Step 5 Right-click any slot in subrack 2 or 3, and choose Add RF Module... from the shortcut menu.Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and click OK to add the MTRU andMAFU.
----End
6.3.6 Adding an NGRU (Initial)The NodeB GPS Receiving Unit (NGRU) is a peripheral device used to position the UE andprovide the clock source for the NodeB. This describes how to add an NGRU.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
Prerequisite
The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.3.1 Manually Creating a PhysicalNodeB (Initial).
PreparationNone.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-72 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-23.
Figure 6-23 Adding the NGRU (BTS3812AE/BTS3812A for instance)
Step 5 Right-click in the frame area of the cabinet, and choose Add NGRU... from the shortcut menu.Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and click OK to add the NGRU.
----End
6.3.7 Adding an NEMU (Initial, BTS3812E)This describes how to configure a NodeB Environment Monitoring Unit (NEMU) for theBTS3812E.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-73
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
The NEMU is applicable only to the BTS3812E.
PrerequisiteThe physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.3.1 Manually Creating a PhysicalNodeB (Initial).
PreparationNone.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-24.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-74 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-24 Adding an NEMU
Step 5 Right-click in the frame area of the cabinet, and choose Add NEMU... from the shortcut menu.Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and click OK to add the NEMU.
----End
6.3.8 Adding an NPMU (Initial, Macro NodeB)This describes how to add an NodeB Power Monitoring Unit (NPMU).
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
PrerequisiteThe physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.3.1 Manually Creating a PhysicalNodeB (Initial).
PreparationNone.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-75
Procedurel Add the NPMU to the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A.
NOTE
For the BTS3812A/BTS3812AE, the value of PowerType cannot be changed. You can use only thedefault value -48V DC.
1. On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane,and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CMExpress window is displayed.
2. Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
3. Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer windowis displayed.
4. Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-25.
Figure 6-25 Adding an NPMU
5. Right-click the lower left part of subrack 7, and choose Add Board... from the shortcutmenu. Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and click OK to add theNPMU.
l Modify the NPMU attributes in the BTS3812E.
1. On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane,and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CMExpress window is displayed.
2. Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
3. Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer windowis displayed.
4. Click the Basic Info tab. Click in the PowerType editing box, the NPMUAttribute is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-26.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-76 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-26 Modifying the NPMU attributes
5. Select the button 220V AC, and set related parameters based on prepared data. ClickOK to modify the NPMU attributes.
NOTE
The button -48V DC or 24V DC is selected to set the type of the power supply for the BTS3812Ecabinet. In these two cases, the BTS3812E has no NPMU, and the parameters in the NPMUAttribute dialog box cannot be set.
----End
6.3.9 Adding NPSUs (Initial, BTS3812E)This describes how to configure the NodeB Power Supply Unit (NPSU) for the macro NodeB,that is, the BTS3812E.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
Prerequisitel The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.3.1 Manually Creating a
Physical NodeB (Initial).l Before adding the NPSU to the BTS3812E, change the NPMU attributes. For details, refer
to Change the NPMU attribute for the BTS3812E.
PreparationNone.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-77
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-27.
Figure 6-27 Adding an NPSU.
Step 5 Right-click in the blank area beyond the subrack area, and choose NPSU... from the shortcutmenu. The Board window is displayed. Configure related parameters based on prepared data,and then click OK to add an NPSU.
----End
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-78 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
6.3.10 Adding Batteries (Initial, BTS3812E)This describes how to configure batteries for the BTS3812E. The batteries are backup powerfacilities of the NodeB.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
CAUTIONCapacity is the battery capacity parameter. The value of this parameter must be set as that ofthe actual capacity of the batteries. Otherwise, the batteries can be damaged. For details aboutthe actual capacity of the batteries, refer to the related instructions of the batteries.
Prerequisitel The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.3.1 Manually Creating a
Physical NodeB (Initial).l Before adding the batteries for the BTS3812E, change the NPMU attributes. For details,
refer to Change the NPMU attributes for the BTS3812E.
PreparationNone.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-28.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-79
Figure 6-28 Adding Batteries
Step 5 Right-click on the top part of the frame, and choose Add Battery... from the shortcut menu. TheBoard window is displayed. Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and then clickOK to add batteries.
----End
6.3.11 Adding an ALD (Initial)This describes how to add an ALD. The ALD consists of the SINGEL_RET, the MULTI_RET,the STMA, the SASU, and the RET_2G.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-80 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
NOTE
l Only the ALD that supports protocols such as AISG or 3GPP IUANT needs to be configured. TheALD can be configured on only the MAFU of subrack 3 for the macro NodeB or on the MRRU for thedistributed NodeB.
l In typical installation scenarios, you can add the ALD without manually entering the vendor codes orSNs, which can be obtained by scanning. In other installation scenarios, you are required to manuallyenter the vendor codes and SNs when adding the ALD. Otherwise, the system cannot communicatewith the ALD. The vendor codes and SNs must be entered at the same time. If only one of them isentered, the system provides a parameter illegality message.
l In 2G extended application scenarios, you are not required to configure the subrack number, the cabinetnumber, or the antenna connector number. In other scenarios, ensure that the configured subracknumber, the cabinet number, or the antenna connector number are consistent with the number of theequipment that the ALD is connected to. Otherwise, the mapping between the ALD and sector cannotbe determined.
Prerequisitel The RF module is configured. For details, refer to 6.3.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial).
l The RRU sites are configured. For details, refer to 6.4.4 Adding an RRU (Initial,Distributed NodeB).
Preparation
Table 6-19 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Antennaconnectornumber
AntennaNo In the 2G extended scenario, thisparameter is unavailable.When dual-polarized RET isconfigured and the value is NOA;when single-polarized RET or STMAis configured, the value is NOA orNOB.
N0A Networkplanning
DeviceName
DeviceName Name of the ALD. The maximumlength is a string of 31 characters.
RET 1 Internalplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-81
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Scenario UseCase Scenario of the antenna Optionalparameters:l REGULAR: Regular installation,
that is, only one dual polarizationRET can be installed to anANT_Tx/RxA port, and this RETis controlled through this port.
l SECTOR_SPLITTING: Sectorsplitting, that is, a maximum of sixRETs can be installed to anANT_Tx/RxA port through asplitter, and these RETs arecontrolled through this port.
l DAISY_CHAIN: Antennacascading, that is, a maximum ofsix RETs installed to differentports can be cascaded to anANT_Tx/RxA port throughcontrol signal cables, and theseRETs are controlled through thisport.
l 2G_EXTENSION: 2G extension.The 2G RET is controlled throughthe NodeB. It is an extended modeof cascaded NodeBs.
REGULAR
Networkplanning
Antennapolarization type
RETType When the device type is eitherSINGLE_RET or MULTI_RETsupported by the AISG protocol, thisparameter is valid. Optionalparameters:l In the scenario of antenna
cascaded application, theparameter value can be set to eitherDUAL (dual polarization antenna)or SINGLE (single polarizationantenna).
l In other scenarios other thanantenna cascading, the value ofthis parameter can only be DUAL.
DUAL
Vendorcode
VendorCode Vendor code of the ALD. The lengthis a 2-byte letter or number.For details about the relation betweenthe vendor code and vendor name ofthe ALD, refer to the AISG protocol.
-
Internalplanning
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-82 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Equipment serialnumber
SerialNo Serial number of the ALD. Themaximum length is a 17-byte letter ornumber.
-
Antennasubunitnumber
SubUnit Select different subunit numbersaccording to different antenna devicetypes:l AISG1.1 The subunit number of
STMA can only be 0.l AISG2.0 The subunit number of
STMA and SASU can be 1 or 2.l When multiple antennas support 6
subunits, the subunit numberranges from 1 to 6. When multipleantennas do not support 6 subunits,the subunit number ranges from 1to 2.
l The subunit number for a singleantenna is not displayed, and is 0by default.
0
NetworkplanningAntenna
tilt angleAntTilt Downtilt of the RET antenna
Value range: -100 through +3000
Workingmode ofthe STMA
BypassMode Optional parameters:l NORMAL (normal mode)
l Bypass mode
NORMAL
SASUgain
l GSMGain
l UMTSGain
According to different types ofchannels, the SASU gain can bedivided into the following two types:l GSMGain indicates the SASU
gain in the GSM channel. Valuerange: 0 through 255.
l UMTSGain indicates the SASUgain in the UMTS channel. Valuerange: 0 through 255.
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-83
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
DC switchon theSASUantennaconnector
DCSwitch DC switch (on the SASU antennaconnector) status When the status isset to GSM, the DC power load of theSASU GSM cannot be started.Optional parameters:l GSM (The GSM feeder supplies
the power)l UMTS (The UMTS feeder
supplies the power)l OFF
UMTS
SASUGSM DCpower load
DCload The DC power load is applied to theTMA that simulates the GSM system.The SASU needs to inform the GSMthat a TMA is connected to the BTSantenna when the UE sets a relativelyhigh gain for the GSM Rx channelthrough the WCDMA NodeB. Theeasiest method is that you add a DCload to the GSM BTS. In thissituation, the GSM BTS is informedof the TMA connected to the antennaby checking the DC power of theantenna.
20
STMAgain
Gain Value range: 0 through 255 0
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab, and right-click the added MAFU in subrack 3 or the added MRRUin the RRUChain subrack. Choose Antenna Line Device from the shortcut menu. The AntennaLine Device window is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-29.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-84 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-29 Adding the ALD
Step 5 Click the tab SINGLE_RET or MULTI_RET, and click . Configure related parameters
based on prepared data, and then click to add an RET.
Step 6 Click the STMA tab, and click . Set related parameters based on the prepared data, and click
to add an STMA.
Step 7 Click the STMA tab, and click . Set related parameters based on the prepared data, and click
to add an SASU.
Step 8 Click the RET_2G tab, and click . Set related parameters based on the prepared data, and
click to add an RET_2G.
----End
6.4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial)This describes how to configure the equipment layer data of the distributed NodeB.
ContextOn the CME client, Figure 6-30 shows the DBS3800 panel.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-85
Figure 6-30 DBS3800 panel
Table 6-20 Module information
Module/BoardType
Description
BBU module l HBBU: indicates that the BBU type is BBU3806, which supportsUBTI and EBBC.
l HBBUC: indicates that the BBU type is BBU3806C, which does notsupport UBTI or EBBC.
l UBTI: Universal BBU Transport Interface board, which supports thechannelized optical sub-board and the unchannelized optical sub-board.
l EBBC: indicates the enhanced baseband card of the HBBU.
6.4.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial)This describes how to manually configure the basic information for the NodeB.
6.4.2 Adding a BBU (Initial)This describes how to add a BBU. The BBU is of two models: HBBU (BBU3806) and HBBUC(BBU3806C).
6.4.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group and the CMB (Initial, DistributedNodeB)The baseband resources consists of uplink baseband resources and downlink baseband resources.By specifying the ID of the UL resource group, the uplink baseband resources of the cell areconfigured, and by specifying the ID of the DL resource group, the downlink baseband resourcesof the cell are configured. This describes how to add an uplink or an downlink baseband resourcegroup so as to reasonably allocate the uplink or downlink baseband resources of the NodeB.
6.4.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Distributed NodeB)This describes how to add an RRU. The RRU is the outdoor RF remote unit. It is used to performfunctions such as the modulation and demodulation of baseband and RF signals, data processing,transferring data of the cascaded RRUs, and providing the multiplexing functions of the RFchannels for receiving and transmitting signals. Adding an RRU includes two parts: adding theRRU chain and adding the RRU module.
6.4.5 Adding an NEMU (Initial, Distributed NodeB)
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-86 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
This describes how to configure a NodeB Environment Monitoring Unit (NEMU) for theDBS3800.
6.4.6 Adding an NPMU (Initial, Distributed NodeB)This describes how to add a NodeB Power Monitoring Unit (NPMU) of the DBS3800.
6.4.7 Adding an ALD (Initial)This describes how to add an ALD. The ALD consists of the SINGEL_RET, the MULTI_RET,the STMA, the SASU, and the RET_2G.
6.4.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial)This describes how to manually configure the basic information for the NodeB.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
PrerequisiteThe logical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.1 Creating a Logical NodeB (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-21 Negotiation and planned data of the physical NodeB
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Workingmode ofE1/T1links
E1T1WorkMode
The working mode of E1/T1 linksdepends on the state of DIPswitches on the BBU or NUTI andthe configuration file.
E1
Negotiation withthedestination
Clocksource
ClockSource This parameter is valid only whenClockWorkMode is set toMANUAL. Optional parameters:l GPSCARD (GPS card clock
source)l BITS (BITS clock source): The
outdoor BBU (HBBUC) cannotuse this clock source.
l LINE (clock source extractedfrom the Iub interface line)
l IP (IP clock source)
LINE
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-87
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Workingmode ofthe clock
ClockWorkMode
Working mode of the system clockOptional parameters:l MANUAL (manual mode): In
this mode, the user specifies theclock source, and automaticallyswitching the system clock toother clock sources is notallowed. Even if the specifiedclock source is faulty, suchswitching is not allowed.
l FREE (free-run mode): Thefree-run mode is the workingmode for the clock source at aninitial phase.
MANUAL
Networkplanning
Workingmode ofthe IPclock
IPClockMode This parameter is valid only whenClockSource is set to IP. Optionalparameters:l AUTO (default value)
l MANUAL (This parameter isconfigured when the IP clock isalready configured.)
-
GPSfeederdelay
GPSCableDelay Delay of the GPS feederValue range: 0 through 1000
0 Internalplanning
SNTPswitch
SNTPSwitch Synchronization switch Optionalparameters:l ON (SNTP client requires time
synchronization)l OFF (SNTP client does not
require time synchronization)
ON Networkplanning
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-88 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
IP addressof theSNTPserver
SNTPServerIP The SNTP server is used tosynchronize the time of multipleSNTP clients, which is importantfor centralized maintenance,especially for alarm management.For example, when an E1 link isdisconnected, the NodeB and theRNC report the alarm at the sametime based on SNTP. This helpsfault locating.The SNTP server of the NodeB canbe either the M2000 or the RNC.l The SNTP server of the NodeB
is the RNC (recommended): setSNTPServerIP to the BAMinternal IP address.
l The SNTP server of the NodeBis the M2000: setSNTPServerIP to the M2000host external IP address.
10.11.1.1 Negotiation withthedestination
Synchronizationperiod
SyncPeriod The period in which nodes aresynchronized.Value range: 1 through 525600
10
Networkplanning
Demodulation mode
DemMode Demodulation mode of the NodeBOptional parameters:l DEM_2_CHAN (two-way
demodulation mode)l DEM_4_CHAN (four-way
demodulation mode)l DEM_ECON_4_CHAN (four-
way economical demodulationmode)
DEM_2_CHAN
High BERthresholdsof E1/T1
HighThreshold Optional parameters:l 1E-3
l 1E-4
l 1E-5
l 1E-6
1E-5
Smoothpowerswitch
SMTHPWRSwitch
Optional parameters:l OPEN
l CLOSE
CLOSE
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-89
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Lower andupperlimits oftimersetting
LowerLimit Disabling the lower limit of thetime range for the transmitterValue range: 0 through 255
0
UpperLimit Disabling the upper limit of thetime range for the transmitterValue range: 0 through 255
0
NodeBresourcedistribution mode
ResAllocateRule
Optional parameters:l PERFFIRST (handover
performance priority mode)l CAPAFIRST (capacity priority
mode)
PERFFIRST
NodeB IPaddress
LocalIP IP address of the NodeB for localmaintenance
17.21.2.15
Subnetmask
LocalIPMask Subnet mask of the NodeB IPaddress for local maintenance
255.255.0.0
NMPTbackupmode
NMPTBackupMode
This parameter is available onlyfor the macro NodeB.
ENABLE Internalplanning
STM-1framemode
NAOIFrameMode (macroNodeB)
Frame structure of the optical portchip Optional parameters:l FRAMEMODE_SONET (in
SONET mode)l FRAMEMODE_SDH (in SDH
mode)
-
Negotiation withthedestination
STM1FrameMode (distributedNodeB)
FRAMEMODE_SDH
Management unit
Au This parameter is valid only for thechannelized optical interface.Optional parameters:l AU3
l AU4
AU3
Bypassunit
Tu This parameter is valid only for thechannelized optical interface.Optional parameters:l TU11 (the E1/T1 mode is T1)
l TU12 (the E1/T1 mode is E1)
TU12
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-90 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Power typeof themacroNodeB
PowerType Configuring the power type for theNodeB. This parameter isavailable only for the macroNodeB. Optional parameters:l -48 V DC
l 24 V DC
l 220 V AC
-48 V DC
Internalplanning
Reportswitch forcall historyrecord
CHRSwitch When the NodeB CHR reportswitch is on, the NodeB uploadsthe CHR log to the FTP server thatis at the NodeB side.
OFF
Iubinterfaceboardgroupbackupmode
IUBGroup1 Group backup mode of the Iubinterface board, namely the NDTIor the NUTI, in slots 12 and 13Optional parameters:l REDUNDANCY (active and
standby backup): The boardmust be the NUTI. No sub-board can be added. Only thebaseboard held in slot 12 can beused. The attributes of the boardheld in slot 13 remainunchanged.
l SHARING (load sharing): TheNDTI and NUTI can be insertedin either slot 12 or 13. Both theboard of the baseband subrackand the sub-board can be used.
SHARING
IUBGroup2 Group backup mode of the Iubinterface board, namely the NUTI,in slots 14 and 15 Optionalparameters:l REDUNDANCY (active and
standby backup): No sub-boardcan be added. Only thebaseboard held in slot 14 can beused. The attributes of the boardheld in slot 15 remainunchanged.
l SHARING (load sharing): Onlythe sub-board added to theNUTI held in slots 14 and 15can be used.
SHARING
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-91
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a logical NodeB on the left of the window, and then click . The Create PhysicalNodeB dialog box is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-31.
Figure 6-31 Create Physical NodeB dialog box
Step 4 Based on the prepared data, select Series and Version. From the drop-down list of Template,select Do not use template, click OK to start importing the file, and the NodeB Creating dialogbox shows the importing progress.
Step 5 After the NodeB configuration file is imported, the Information dialog box is displayed. ClickOK to return to the Physical NodeB Basic Information window. The information of theconfigured physical NodeB is displayed on the right of the window.
Step 6 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 6-32.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-92 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-32 NodeB Equipment Layer window
Step 7 Click the Basic Info tab. Set the basic information of the NodeB.l Click the Basic tab. Set or modify the related parameters such as IP Attribute and FTPS
Policy based on the prepared data.l Click the More tab. Set or modify the related parameters such as Frame Mode and CHR
Switch based on the prepared data.l Click the DST tab. Set the time zone and DST-related parameters.
Step 8 Click to save the settings.
----End
6.4.2 Adding a BBU (Initial)This describes how to add a BBU. The BBU is of two models: HBBU (BBU3806) and HBBUC(BBU3806C).
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-93
NOTE
l On the Basic Info tab page of the NodeB Equipment Layer window, set the parameterClockSource to BITS, and the HBBUC cannot be added.
l The HBBU and the HBBUC should be inserted into their own slots as specified.
PrerequisiteThe physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.4.1 Manually Creating a PhysicalNodeB (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-22 Negotiation and planned data of the BBU
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Boardstatus
BoardStatus Blocking status of the board Optionalparameters:l Block
l Unblock
UnBlock
InternalplanningClock
sourceClockSource8K
E1/T1 ports for extracting the Iubinterface clock signals. Optionalparameters:l None
l Port 0 to port 7
Port 0
Bearermode
BearMode Optional parameters:l ATM: If the bearer mode is ATM,
the IP transport layer cannot usethe E1/T1 ports, that is, you cannotconfigure the PPP or MP links.
l IPv4: If the bearer mode is IPv4,the ATM transport layer cannotuse the E1/T1 ports, that is, youcannot configure the physicallinks.
ATM
Negotiation withthedestination
HSUPAswitch
HSUPA Optional parameters:l ENABLE (The HSUPA is
supported)l DISABLE (The HSUPA is not
supported)
DISABLE
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-94 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
ClockMode
ClockMode For the cascaded NodeBs, the clockof the upper-level NodeB is set toMASTER and that of the lower-levelNodeB is set to SLAVE. If the valueis not specified, the original clockmode is retained. Optionalparameters:l MASTER (primary mode)
l SLAVE (secondary mode)
SLAVE Networkplanning
Line Code LineCode Optional parameters:l HDB3 (for E1 mode)
l AMI (for E1 or T1 mode)
l B8ZS (for T1 mode)
HDB3
Negotiation withthedestination
FrameStructure
FrameStru Optional parameters:l E1_DOUBLE_FRAME (double
frame, for E1 mode)l E1_CRC4_MULTI_FRAME
(CRC-multiframe, for E1 mode)l T1_SUPER_FRAME (super
frame, for T1 mode)l T1_EXTENDED_SUPER_FRA
ME (extended super frame, for T1mode)
E1_CRC4_MULTI_FRAME
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-95
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch Optional parameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based
on the configured Iub bandwidthand the bandwidth occupied byR99 users, traffic is allocated toHSDPA users when the physicalbandwidth restriction is taken intoaccount.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow control ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, trafficis allocated to HSDPA users whenthe delay and packet loss on theIub interface are taken intoaccount. The RNC uses the R6switch to perform this function. Itis recommended that the RNC beused in compliance with the R6protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. TheRNC allocates the bandwidthaccording to the bandwidth on theUu interface reported by theNodeB. To perform this function,the reverse flow control switchmust be enabled by the RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Time delaythreshold
HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower thanthis threshold, you can infer that thelink is not congested.Value range:0 to 20
4
Discardratethreshold
HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frameloss ratio is not higher than thisthreshold.Value range:0 to 1000
1
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-96 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
WorkingMode
WorkMode Optional parameters:l OFF (inhibited mode): indicates
that the port works in inhibitedmode, that is, the port does notdetect the alarms. All ports workin such mode by default.
l Default (default mode): indicatesthat the system detects and reportsthe alarms in default mode. In suchmode, the UE cannot set the alarmID of this port or other parametersrelated to this port. The systemreports alarms based on its ownfixed setting rather than the user-defined setting.
l CUSTOM (customized mode):indicates that the UE can changethe binding relation, that is, thesystem reports the alarm and setthe alarm Bool based on thecustomer specified ID.
OFF
Internalplanning
Alarm ID AlarmId This parameter is valid only whenWorkMode is set to CUSTOM.
-
Alarmvoltage
ALarmVoltage
This parameter is valid only whenWorkMode is set to CUSTOM.Optional parameters:l HIGH (alarms related to high
impedance)l LOW (alarms related to low
impedance)
-
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-97
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-33.
Figure 6-33 Adding the BBU
NOTE
l The DBS3800 supports only 2 cascaded BBUs. The BBUs can be configured in subrack 0 and subrack1.
l The HBBUC can be configured only in slot 00 of subrack 0.
l The HBBUC can be configured only in subrack 0. Do not add the HBBUC in subrack 1.
Step 5 Right-click slot 00 of subrack 0, and choose Add HBBU... or Add HBBUC... from the shortcutmenu. Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and then click OK to add a BBU.
Step 6 (Optional) Right-click the configured HBBU, and choose Add UBTI... or Add EBBC....Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and then click OK to add a UBTI or anEBBC.
NOTE
l The HBBU can be configured with the UBTI and the EBBC plugboards.
l The channelized optical sub-board and the unchannelized optical sub-board can be configured on theUBTI.
l The HBBUC (BBU3806C) cannot be configured with the UBTI and the EBBC plugboards.
Step 7 (This task is performed only when the plugboard is UBTI.) Right-click the configured UBTI,and choose Add Channelled Coverboard... or Add UnChannelled Coverboard... from theshortcut menu. Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and then click OK to adda channelized optical sub-board or an unchannelized optical sub-board.
----End
6.4.3 Adding an Uplink/Downlink Baseband Resource Group andthe CMB (Initial, Distributed NodeB)
The baseband resources consists of uplink baseband resources and downlink baseband resources.By specifying the ID of the UL resource group, the uplink baseband resources of the cell areconfigured, and by specifying the ID of the DL resource group, the downlink baseband resources
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-98 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
of the cell are configured. This describes how to add an uplink or an downlink baseband resourcegroup so as to reasonably allocate the uplink or downlink baseband resources of the NodeB.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NOTE
l When configuring the downlink resource group, check that local cells pertaining to this resource groupshould be added to boards within the range of the resource group.
l The downlink processing units involved in the downlink resource group should pertain to an uplinkresource group. Otherwise, the alarm, informing that the downlink resource group is not a subset ofthe uplink resource group, will be reported.
l A maximum of six cells can be processed in a single uplink or downlink baseband resource group.When more than six cells are to be processed, you need to divide the baseband resources into groupsby adhering to the following policies:
l Each uplink resource group processes a maximum of six cells.
l Softer handover occurs between the cells that belong to one uplink resource group. Intra-frequencycells should be allocated in the same uplink resource group.
l When the previous policies are met, the number of resource groups should be as small as possible.For instance, it is unnecessary to divide the 3 x 2 configuration into two resource groups. In thiscase, only one resource group is required. That is, one resource group consisting of two carriers,six cells in total.
NOTE
When using the CMB, CMB data source such as TV channels of all or part of the cells within a NodeB isthe same. If all data sources are transferred over the Iub interface, it is a waste for the Iub resource. Withthe duplication function of the CME FACH, identical data sources are overlapped and will be transferredover the Iub interface as one data source. The NodeB fulfills the duplication of the CMB data betweencells. One source FACH and several corresponding destination FACHs form a CMB FACH group.
PrerequisiteThe BBU is configured. For details, refer to 6.4.2 Adding a BBU (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-23 Negotiation and planned data of the UL/DL baseband resource group
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
ID of theULbasebandresourcegroup
ULResourceGroupId
l A board such as the HBBU or theHBBUC that is not added to theUL baseband resource groupcannot process baseband services.
l An uplink baseband resourcegroup can process a maximum ofsix cells.
l Insufficient uplink basebandresources may result in a cellsetup failure.
1
Internalplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-99
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
ID of theDLbasebandresourcegroup
DLResourceGroupId
l A board such as the HBBU or theHBBUC that is not added to theUL baseband resource groupcannot process baseband services.
l The downlink processing unitswithin the downlink resourcegroup should belong to an uplinkresource group.
l The amount of local cellssupported by the resource groupis determined by the amount andthe specifications of the boardswithin the resource group.
0
Procedurel Add an uplink/downlink baseband resource group.
1. On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane,and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CMExpress window is displayed.
2. Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
3. Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer windowis displayed.
4. Click the Other Info tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-34.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-100 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-34 Adding an uplink baseband resource group
Table 6-24 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 List of uplink baseband resource groups
2 List of uplink baseband resources
3 List of uplink baseband resources added to the uplinkresource group
5. Click ULGroup, and in area 1, select ULResourceGroupId. Then, click to addone or multiple baseband resource groups.
6. Click to save the settings.7. Select an uplink resource group in area 1, and select an uplink resource item in area
2. Click , the selected item is added to the selected uplink resource groupand is shown in area 3.
8. Click DLGroup. Repeat Step 5 through Step 7 to add one or multiple downlinkresource groups.
l (Optional) Configure the CMB.1. Click CMB in Figure 6-34, and configure SrcCellId, SrcFachId, DestCellId, and
DestFachId.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-101
NOTE
l If the Iub transmission sharing function of the CMB service is required, the NodeB isrequired to support this function.
l One source FACH and several corresponding destination FACHs form a CMB FACHgroup.
l Before configuring the Iub transmission sharing function at the NodeB, ensure that thecorresponding CMB FACH group data is configured at the RNC. Otherwise, the normalservice may be affected.
l In one CMB FACH group, the source logical cell ID must be different from the destinationlogical cell ID.
----End
6.4.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Distributed NodeB)This describes how to add an RRU. The RRU is the outdoor RF remote unit. It is used to performfunctions such as the modulation and demodulation of baseband and RF signals, data processing,transferring data of the cascaded RRUs, and providing the multiplexing functions of the RFchannels for receiving and transmitting signals. Adding an RRU includes two parts: adding theRRU chain and adding the RRU module.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
l The RRUs are of the following types: MRRU, RHUB, and PRRU.
l If an RRU is required to be added to the branch, it must be the PRRU (PicoRRU) and thePRRU must be configured where the RHUB is already configured.
l One MRRU supports one A antenna, one B antenna, and four carriers; one PRRU has onlyone A antenna and supports two carriers.
PrerequisiteThe BBU is configured. For details, refer to 6.4.2 Adding a BBU (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-25 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU Chain
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Chaintype
Chain Type RRU topology structure Optionalparameters:l CHAIN (chain topology)
l RING (ring topology)
CHAIN
Internalplanning
Chain/Ring headsubracknumber
Head SubrackNo.
Number of the subrack that holdsthe head BBU in the chain or ringValue range: 0 through 1
0
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-102 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Chain/Ring headboardnumber
Head Board No. Number of the slot that holds thehead BBU in the chain or ringOptional parameters:0
0
Head portnumber
Head Port No. Number of the port on the headBBU that is connected to the RRUin the chain or ringValue range: 0 through 2
0
Endsubracknumber
End SubrackNo
Number of the subrack that holdsthe end BBU in the ring. Thisparameter is applicable only to thering topology.Value range: 0 through 1
-
End boardnumber
End Board No Number of the slot that holds theend BBU in the ring. Thisparameter is valid for only the ringtopology.Optional parameters:0
-
End portnumber
End Port No Number of the port on the endBBU that is connected to the RRUin the chain or ring. This parameteris valid for only the ring topology.Value range: 0 through 2
-
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-103
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Breakposition 1
Break Position1
This parameter indicates theposition of the first break point.When you add and delete an RRUat a particular position in thecurrent RRU topology (ring orchain), set a break point at thisposition. After the RRU is addedor deleted, delete the break point toresume the data.For RRU chain, only one breakpoint can be set. After the settingof break point, the RRU chain isdivided into two parts:l The first part refers to the
section between the head ofRRU chain and the break point.This part of RRU service is notaffected.
l The second part refers to thepost-break point section of theRRU chain. This part of RRUservice is disrupted because it isin separate status.
OFF
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-104 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Breakposition 2
Break Position2
Second position of the break pointonly for the ring topologyWhen you add and delete an RRUat a particular position in thecurrent RRU topology (ring orchain), set a break point at thisposition. After the RRU is addedor deleted, delete the break point toresume the data.For the RRU ring, two break pointscan be set. After the setting ofbreak point, the RRU chain isdivided into three parts:l The first part refers to the
section between the head the ofRRU ring and the first breakpoint. This part of RRU servicecan be affected.
l The second part refers to thesection between two breakpoints of the RRU ring. Thispart of RRU service is disruptedbecause it is in separate status.
l The third part refers to thesection between the secondbreak point and the end of theRRU ring. This part of RRUservice can be affected.
For the RRU ring, when only onebreak point is set, the actual case isthat two break points are set in thesame position, that is, two breakpoints overlap.
-
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-105
Table 6-26 Negotiation and planned data of the RRU
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
RFModule
- l In 1 x 1 configuration,configure one RF module.
l In 3 x 1 configuration,configure three RFmodules.
l In 3 x 2 configuration,configure three or six RFmodules.
l In 6 x 1 configuration,configure six RFmodules.
Configureeither theRRU or theWRFU
Networkplanning
RRU name RRUName Name of the MRRU Name
Internalplanning
RRU chainnumber
RRUChainNo This parameter indicates thenumber of the chain to whichthe RRU is connected.Value range: 0 through 249
0
RRUnumber
RRUNo The TRUNK positionindicates that the RRU is atthe cascaded position of themain chain or ring. TheBRANCH position indicatesthat the RRU is at thecascaded position where theparent node is located. Theparent node refers to theRHUB.Value range: 0 through 7
2
Boardstatus
BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRUOptional parameters:l Block
l Unblock
UnBlock
Topologyposition ofthe RRU
ToPoPosition Optional parameters:l TRUNK (in the main
ring)l BRANCH (under the
RHUB node)
TRUNK Networkplanning
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-106 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Initialcorrectionvalue forthe RTWP
RTWPofCarrierCarriernumberonRxRXchannel number
Set the initial correctionvalue for the RTWP of thecarrier and TX channelspecified by the RRU. Valuerange:l Number of Carrier: 0 to 3
(MRRU/WRFU), 0 to 1(PRRU)
l RX channel number: 0through 1
l Initial correction value forthe RTWP: -130 to +130,unit: 0.1 dB
0
RRU IFoffset
IFOffset Offset direction of theIntermediate Frequency (IF)filter Optional parameters:l BOTTOM: Offset to
bottom, that is, to theminimum value (Theinterference signalfrequency is greater thanor equal to the currentreceive frequency.)
l MIDDLE: Offset tomiddle, that is, no offset(no interference)
l TOP: Offset to top, that is,to the maximum value(The interference signalfrequency is smaller thanthe current receivefrequency.)
l MINUS_50M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l PLUS_50M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l MINUS_75M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
l PLUS_75M (only fourcarrier RRU support)
MIDDLE
Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRUValue range: -100 through+1000
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-107
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Vertical Vertical Vertical position of the RRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of theRRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Table 6-27 Negotiation and planned data of the RHUB
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
RRU name RRUName Name of the MRRU Name
Internalplanning
RRU chainnumber
RRUChainNo This parameter indicates thenumber of the chain to whichthe RRU is connected.Value range: 0 through 249
0
RRUnumber
RRUNo The TRUNK positionindicates that the RRU is atthe cascaded position of themain chain or ring. TheBRANCH position indicatesthat the RRU is at thecascaded position where theparent node is located. Theparent node refers to theRHUB.Value range: 0 through 7
2
Boardstatus
BoardStatus Blocking status of the RRUOptional parameters:l Block
l Unblock
UnBlock
Topologyposition ofthe RRU
ToPoPosition Optional parameters:l TRUNK (in the main
ring)l BRANCH (under the
RHUB node)
TRUNK Networkplanning
Floor Floor Floor for installing the RRUValue range: -100 through+1000
0
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-108 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Vertical Vertical Vertical position of the RRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal position of theRRUValue range: 0 through 1000
0
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-35.
Figure 6-35 Adding an RRU (DBS3800)
Step 5 Right-click the configured HBBU or HBBUC, and then choose Add RRUChain... from theshortcut menu. Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and then click OK todisplay the added RRU Chain.
Step 6 Right-click the added RRU Chain. Based on the actual network, choose Add MRRU..., AddRHUB... or Add PRRU... from the shortcut menu. Configure related parameters based onprepared data, and click OK to display the added MRRU, PRRU or RHUB.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-109
Step 7 (Optional) Right-click the added RHUB, and choose Add PicoRRU... from the shortcut menuso as to add the PRRU on the RHUB.
----End
6.4.5 Adding an NEMU (Initial, Distributed NodeB)This describes how to configure a NodeB Environment Monitoring Unit (NEMU) for theDBS3800.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
The NEMU can be configured only in slot 00 of subrack 0.
PrerequisiteThe BBU is configured. For details, refer to 6.4.2 Adding a BBU (Initial).
PreparationNone.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-36.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-110 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-36 Adding an NEMU
Step 5 Right-click the configured HBBU/HBBUC of subrack 0, and choose Add NEMU... from theshortcut menu. Configure related parameters based on prepared data, and then click OK to addan NEMU.
----End
6.4.6 Adding an NPMU (Initial, Distributed NodeB)This describes how to add a NodeB Power Monitoring Unit (NPMU) of the DBS3800.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l You may add the NPMU only in slot 00 of subrack 0 of the DBS3800 cabinet.
l You may the NPMU for the RRU (MRRU). One MRRU, however, can be configured with only oneNPMU.
Prerequisitel The BBU is configured. For details, refer to 6.4.2 Adding a BBU (Initial).
l The RRU is configured. For details, refer to 6.4.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, DistributedNodeB).
PreparationNone.
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-111
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the tab Device Panel, and add an NPMU in the DBS3800 cabinet, as shown in Figure6-37, and then add an NPMU for the RRU, as shown in Figure 6-38.
Figure 6-37 Adding an NPMU in the DBS3800 cabinet
Figure 6-38 Adding the NPMU for the RRU
Step 5 Add an NPMU.l Adding an NPMU in the DBS3800 cabinet: Right-click the configured HBBU/HBBUC of
subrack 0, and choose Add NPMU... from the shortcut menu. Configure related parametersbased on prepared data, and then click OK to add an NPMU.
l Adding the NPMU for the RRU: Right-click the configured MRRU, and choose AddNPMU... from the shortcut menu. Configure related parameters based on prepared data, andthen click OK to add an NPMU for the RRU.
----End
6.4.7 Adding an ALD (Initial)This describes how to add an ALD. The ALD consists of the SINGEL_RET, the MULTI_RET,the STMA, the SASU, and the RET_2G.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-112 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l Only the ALD that supports protocols such as AISG or 3GPP IUANT needs to be configured. TheALD can be configured on only the MAFU of subrack 3 for the macro NodeB or on the MRRU for thedistributed NodeB.
l In typical installation scenarios, you can add the ALD without manually entering the vendor codes orSNs, which can be obtained by scanning. In other installation scenarios, you are required to manuallyenter the vendor codes and SNs when adding the ALD. Otherwise, the system cannot communicatewith the ALD. The vendor codes and SNs must be entered at the same time. If only one of them isentered, the system provides a parameter illegality message.
l In 2G extended application scenarios, you are not required to configure the subrack number, the cabinetnumber, or the antenna connector number. In other scenarios, ensure that the configured subracknumber, the cabinet number, or the antenna connector number are consistent with the number of theequipment that the ALD is connected to. Otherwise, the mapping between the ALD and sector cannotbe determined.
Prerequisitel The RF module is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial).
l The RRU sites are configured. For details, refer to 6.4.4 Adding an RRU (Initial,Distributed NodeB).
Preparation
Table 6-28 Negotiation and planned data of the ALD
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Antennaconnectornumber
AntennaNo In the 2G extended scenario, thisparameter is unavailable.When dual-polarized RET isconfigured and the value is NOA;when single-polarized RET or STMAis configured, the value is NOA orNOB.
N0A Networkplanning
DeviceName
DeviceName Name of the ALD. The maximumlength is a string of 31 characters.
RET 1 Internalplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-113
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Scenario UseCase Scenario of the antenna Optionalparameters:l REGULAR: Regular installation,
that is, only one dual polarizationRET can be installed to anANT_Tx/RxA port, and this RETis controlled through this port.
l SECTOR_SPLITTING: Sectorsplitting, that is, a maximum of sixRETs can be installed to anANT_Tx/RxA port through asplitter, and these RETs arecontrolled through this port.
l DAISY_CHAIN: Antennacascading, that is, a maximum ofsix RETs installed to differentports can be cascaded to anANT_Tx/RxA port throughcontrol signal cables, and theseRETs are controlled through thisport.
l 2G_EXTENSION: 2G extension.The 2G RET is controlled throughthe NodeB. It is an extended modeof cascaded NodeBs.
REGULAR
Networkplanning
Antennapolarization type
RETType When the device type is eitherSINGLE_RET or MULTI_RETsupported by the AISG protocol, thisparameter is valid. Optionalparameters:l In the scenario of antenna
cascaded application, theparameter value can be set to eitherDUAL (dual polarization antenna)or SINGLE (single polarizationantenna).
l In other scenarios other thanantenna cascading, the value ofthis parameter can only be DUAL.
DUAL
Vendorcode
VendorCode Vendor code of the ALD. The lengthis a 2-byte letter or number.For details about the relation betweenthe vendor code and vendor name ofthe ALD, refer to the AISG protocol.
-
Internalplanning
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-114 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Equipment serialnumber
SerialNo Serial number of the ALD. Themaximum length is a 17-byte letter ornumber.
-
Antennasubunitnumber
SubUnit Select different subunit numbersaccording to different antenna devicetypes:l AISG1.1 The subunit number of
STMA can only be 0.l AISG2.0 The subunit number of
STMA and SASU can be 1 or 2.l When multiple antennas support 6
subunits, the subunit numberranges from 1 to 6. When multipleantennas do not support 6 subunits,the subunit number ranges from 1to 2.
l The subunit number for a singleantenna is not displayed, and is 0by default.
0
NetworkplanningAntenna
tilt angleAntTilt Downtilt of the RET antenna
Value range: -100 through +3000
Workingmode ofthe STMA
BypassMode Optional parameters:l NORMAL (normal mode)
l Bypass mode
NORMAL
SASUgain
l GSMGain
l UMTSGain
According to different types ofchannels, the SASU gain can bedivided into the following two types:l GSMGain indicates the SASU
gain in the GSM channel. Valuerange: 0 through 255.
l UMTSGain indicates the SASUgain in the UMTS channel. Valuerange: 0 through 255.
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-115
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
DC switchon theSASUantennaconnector
DCSwitch DC switch (on the SASU antennaconnector) status When the status isset to GSM, the DC power load of theSASU GSM cannot be started.Optional parameters:l GSM (The GSM feeder supplies
the power)l UMTS (The UMTS feeder
supplies the power)l OFF
UMTS
SASUGSM DCpower load
DCload The DC power load is applied to theTMA that simulates the GSM system.The SASU needs to inform the GSMthat a TMA is connected to the BTSantenna when the UE sets a relativelyhigh gain for the GSM Rx channelthrough the WCDMA NodeB. Theeasiest method is that you add a DCload to the GSM BTS. In thissituation, the GSM BTS is informedof the TMA connected to the antennaby checking the DC power of theantenna.
20
STMAgain
Gain Value range: 0 through 255 0
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Equipment Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click the Device Panel tab, and right-click the added MAFU in subrack 3 or the added MRRUin the RRUChain subrack. Choose Antenna Line Device from the shortcut menu. The AntennaLine Device window is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-39.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-116 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-39 Adding the ALD
Step 5 Click the tab SINGLE_RET or MULTI_RET, and click . Configure related parameters
based on prepared data, and then click to add an RET.
Step 6 Click the STMA tab, and click . Set related parameters based on the prepared data, and click
to add an STMA.
Step 7 Click the STMA tab, and click . Set related parameters based on the prepared data, and click
to add an SASU.
Step 8 Click the RET_2G tab, and click . Set related parameters based on the prepared data, and
click to add an RET_2G.
----End
6.5 Manually Adding the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB(over ATM)
This describes how to configure the transport layer data of the NodeB in ATM transport mode.
PrerequisiteThe data of the equipment layer of the NodeB is configured. For details, refer to:
l 6.2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial)
l 6.4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial)
The process of configuring the NodeB transport layer data over ATM is as follows:
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-117
6.5.1 Adding Links at the Physical Layer (Initial)This describes how to configure the physical layer data of the NodeB in ATM transport mode.The physical layer data consists of the IMA group, IMA link, UNI link, Fractional ATM link,unstructured CES channel, structured CES channel, and timeslot cross channel. You need toconfigure at least one type from among the IMA group, IMA link, UNI link, and Fractional ATMlink. And you can configure only one type or configure all the types.
6.5.2 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial, over ATM)This describes how to add the transmission resource group, which is used to allocates thebandwidth of the physical link to the transmission resource group for carrying the data on thecontrol plane, the user plane, and the OM channel. Each group occupies one portion of thebandwidth and has separate access control, congestion control and HSPA flow control.
6.5.3 Adding SAAL Links (Initial)This describes how to add SAAL links. The SAAL links are used to carry the NBAP and ALCAPwhen the Iub interface is over ATM.
6.5.4 Adding an NBAP (Initial)This describes how to configure the NodeB Control Port (NCP) and Communication ControlPort (CCP). These two ports are carried on the SAAL links.
6.5.5 Adding an ALCAP (Initial)This describes how to configure an AAL2 node to the NodeB so that the ALCAP is added at theNodeB. The ALCAP allocates the micro channels of the AAL2 path.
6.5.6 Adding AAL2 Path Data (Initial)This describes how to add AAL2 PATH data over ATM. The AAL2 path carries the user planedata between the RNC and other equipment.
6.5.7 Adding an OMCH of the NodeB (Initial, over ATM)This describes how to add an Operation and Maintenance Channel (OMCH) of the NodeB.
6.5.8 Adding a Treelink PVC (Initial)This describes how to add a treelink PVC to the Hub NodeB. When the NodeB are cascaded,the treelink PVC added to the Hub NodeB can provide the data transmission channel betweenthe upper-level NE and the lower-level NE.
6.5.1 Adding Links at the Physical Layer (Initial)This describes how to configure the physical layer data of the NodeB in ATM transport mode.The physical layer data consists of the IMA group, IMA link, UNI link, Fractional ATM link,unstructured CES channel, structured CES channel, and timeslot cross channel. You need toconfigure at least one type from among the IMA group, IMA link, UNI link, and Fractional ATMlink. And you can configure only one type or configure all the types.
6.5.1.1 Adding an IMA Group and IMA Links (Initial)This describes how to configure the IMA group and IMA links. The IMA is a transmission modeover the TC sub-layer of the ATM physical layer. The IMA technology multiplexes multiplelow-speed links for transmitting high-speed ATM cell flows, so as to achieve wideband ATMtransmission.
6.5.1.2 Adding UNI Links (Initial)The UNI is a transmission mode over the TC sub-layer of the ATM physical layer. A UNI linkuses all the timeslots of an E1/T1 port. This describes how to add UNI links.
6.5.1.3 Adding Fractional ATM Links (Initial)
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-118 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
The fractional ATM is a transmission mode over the TC sub-layer of the ATM physical layerand it is an exceptional case of the UNI link. This describes how to add fractional ATM links.
6.5.1.4 Adding SDT CES or UDT CES Link (Initial)The Circuit Emulation Service (CES) provides the transmission channel for GSM services to betransmitted over the 3G network. The CES links use either Structured Data Transfer (SDT) modeor Unstructured Data Transfer (UDT) mode. This describes how to configure the SDT CES orUDT CES link. The Circuit Emulation Service (CES) provides the transmission channel forGSM services to be transmitted over the 3G network. The CES links use either Structured DataTransfer (SDT) mode or Unstructured Data Transfer (UDT) mode. This describes how toconfigure the SDT CES or the UDT CES link. The SDT CES and the UDT CES are onlyconfigured in the macro NodeB.
6.5.1.5 Adding a Timeslot Cross Channel (Initial, over ATM)This describes how to add a timeslot cross channel for the 2G equipment so as to transmit thedata of services on the 3G network.
Adding an IMA Group and IMA Links (Initial)
This describes how to configure the IMA group and IMA links. The IMA is a transmission modeover the TC sub-layer of the ATM physical layer. The IMA technology multiplexes multiplelow-speed links for transmitting high-speed ATM cell flows, so as to achieve wideband ATMtransmission.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l After the IMA group is created, you can add the IMA links in the IMA group.
l The IMA links and the matching IMA group should be configured on the same baseboard or subboard.
l The E1/T1 ports used by the ATM link, UNI link, fractional ATM link, timeslot cross and CES linkshould not conflict.
l A maximum of four IMA groups can be configured on the same baseboard or E1 coverboard. Eachchannelized optical coverboard can be configured with up to two IMA groups.
l Each channelized optical coverboard can be configured with a maximum of 63 IMA links. Each IMAgroup can be configured with up to 32 IMA links.
l The total number of IMA groups, UNI links and Fractional ATM links on the same baseboard or E1coverboard does not exceed eight.
l The total number of IMA links, UNI links and Fractional ATM links on the same baseboard or E1coverboard does not exceed eight.
l The total number of IMA groups and UNI links on the same channelized optical subboard does notexceed two.
Prerequisitel The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a
Physical NodeB (Initial).
l The NDTI/NUTI of the Macro NodeB is configured, as described in 6.2.2 Adding theBoards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial).
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-119
l The BBU of the distributed NodeB is configured, as described in 6.4.2 Adding a BBU(Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-29 Negotiation and planned data of the IMA group and IMA links
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Slot No. SlotNo Number of slot where the NDTI orNUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 holdonly the NUTI)Value range: 12 through 15
14
Internalplanning
Sub-boardtype
SubBdType Type of the sub-board where the E1/T1 port used by the IMA link islocated Optional parameters:l Baseboard
l E1 CoverBoard: E1 coverboard
l Channelled CoverBoard:channelized optical sub-board
ChannelledCoverBoard
IMA groupID
IMAId l When SubBdType is BaseBoard,the value range is 0 through 3.
l When SubBdType is E1CoverBoard, the value range is 0through 3.
l When SubBdType is ChannelledCoverBoard, the value range is 0through 1.
0
Transmitframelength
IMATxFrameLength
Longer transmit frame can enhancetransmission efficiency but reduceserror sensitivity. Therefore, thedefault value is recommended.Optional parameters:l D32
l D64
l D128
l D256
D128
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-120 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Minimumactive links
IMAMinActiveLinks
Threshold for identifying theavailability of the IMA group Forexample, if the value is 3, there are atleast three active IMA links in anIMA group and thus this group isavailable. If there are less than threeactive links, the IMA group isunavailable.l When SubBdType is BaseBoard,
the value range is 1 through 8.l When SubBdType is E1
CoverBoard, the value range is 1through 8.
l When SubBdType is ChannelledCoverBoard, the value range is 1through 32.
1
Differential maximumdelay
IMADiffMaxDelay
Different transmission links in anIMA group may result in differenttransmission delays. Thus, there is achange in the relative delay betweenlinks, which is called link differentialdelay. The LODS alarms are reportedwhen the link differential delayoccurs.Value range: 4 through 100
25
Scramblemode
ScrambleMode
Optional parameters:l DISABLE (unavailable, the
scramble mode is disabled)l ENABLE (The scramble mode
must be enabled if the E1/T1transmission uses AMI linecodes.)
ENABLE
Timeslot16 support
TimeSlot16 The channelized optical sub-boarddoes not support this function.Optional parameters:l ENABLE
l DISABLE
After this parameter is enabled, thebandwidth of each IMA link in theIMA group is added by 64 kbit/s.
DISABLE
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-121
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Linknumber
LinkNo Number of the E1/T1 ports for thelinks in an IMA group.l When SubBdType is BaseBoard,
the value range is 0 through 7.l When SubBdType is E1
CoverBoard, the value range is 0through 7.
l When SubBdType is ChannelledCoverBoard, the value range is 0through 62.
0, 1, 2 Negotiation withthedestination
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch
Optional parameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based
on the configured Iub bandwidthand the bandwidth occupied byR99 users, traffic is allocated toHSDPA users when the physicalbandwidth restriction is taken intoaccount.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow control ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, trafficis allocated to HSDPA users whenthe delay and packet loss on theIub interface are taken intoaccount. The RNC uses the R6switch to perform this function. Itis recommended that the RNC beused in compliance with the R6protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. TheRNC allocates the bandwidthaccording to the bandwidth on theUu interface reported by theNodeB. To perform this function,the reverse flow control switchmust be enabled by the RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Internalplanning
Time delaythreshold
HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower thanthis threshold, you can infer that thelink is not congested.Value range: 0 through 20
4
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-122 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Discardratethreshold
HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frameloss ratio is not higher than thisthreshold.Value range: 0 through 1000
1
Procedurel Add the IMA group and the IMA link individually.
1. On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane,and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CMExpress window is displayed.
2. Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
3. Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB ATM Transport Layerwindow is displayed.
4. Click ATMPort, and then click the IMA tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown inFigure 6-40.
Figure 6-40 Configuring the IMA group and the IMA link individually
5. Select SubrackNo, and click . The Search Iub Board window is displayed, asshown in Figure 6-41.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-123
Figure 6-41 Search Iub Board window
6. Select one interface board for the macro NodeB or a BBU for the distributed NodeB,and click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window. Then, click
to add an IMA group.
7. Select LinkNo, and click . The Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed. Selectan E1/T1 port, and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer
window. Click to add an IMA link.l Add UNI groups and links in bulk.
1. In the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window, click . The NodeBATM Bulk Link CM window is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-42.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-124 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-42 Configuring the IMA links in batches
Table 6-30 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 IMA group list
2 Available E1/T1 port on the interface board where the IMAgroup is configured
3 E1/T1 port assigned to the IMA link on the interface boardwhere the IMA group is configured
2. In area 1, select an IMA group; in area 2, select an E1/T1 port, and then click
to add an IMA link.
----End
Adding UNI Links (Initial)The UNI is a transmission mode over the TC sub-layer of the ATM physical layer. A UNI linkuses all the timeslots of an E1/T1 port. This describes how to add UNI links.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-125
NOTE
l The E1/T1 ports used by the ATM link, UNI link, fractional ATM link, timeslot cross and CES linkshould not conflict.
l The total number of IMA groups, UNI links and Fractional ATM links on the same baseboard or E1coverboard does not exceed eight.
l The total number of IMA links, UNI links and Fractional ATM links on the same baseboard or E1coverboard does not exceed eight.
l The total number of IMA groups and UNI links on the same channelized optical subboard does notexceed two.
Prerequisitel The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a
Physical NodeB (Initial).l The NDTI/NUTI of the Macro NodeB is configured, as described in 6.2.2 Adding the
Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial).l The BBU of the distributed NodeB is configured, as described in 6.4.2 Adding a BBU
(Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-31 Negotiation and planned data of the UNI links
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Slot No. SlotNo Number of slot where the NDTIor NUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15hold only the NUTI)Value range: 12 through 15
12
Internalplanning
Sub-boardtype
SubBdType Type of the sub-board where theE1/T1 port is located by the UNIlink Optional parameters:l Baseboard
l E1 CoverBoard: E1coverboard
l Channelled CoverBoard:channelized optical sub-board
BaseBoard
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-126 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Linknumber
LinkNo Number of the E1/T1 ports forUNI linksl When SubBdType is
BaseBoard, the value range is0 through 7.
l When SubBdType is E1CoverBoard, the value range is0 through 7.
l When SubBdType isChannelled CoverBoard, thevalue range is 0 through 62.
3 Negotiationwith thedestination
Scramblemode
ScrambleMode
Optional parameters:l DISABLE (unavailable, the
scramble mode is disabled)l ENABLE (The scramble mode
must be enabled if the E1/T1transmission uses AMI linecodes.)
ENABLE
InternalplanningTimeslot
16 supportTimeSlot16 The channelized optical sub-
board does not support thisfunction. Optional parameters:l ENABLE
l DISABLE
After this parameter is enabled,the bandwidth of the UNI link isadded by 64 kbit/s.
DISABLE
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-127
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch
Optional parameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL:
Based on the configured Iubbandwidth and the bandwidthoccupied by R99 users, trafficis allocated to HSDPA userswhen the physical bandwidthrestriction is taken intoaccount.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flowcontrol ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL,traffic is allocated to HSDPAusers when the delay andpacket loss on the Iub interfaceare taken into account. TheRNC uses the R6 switch toperform this function. It isrecommended that the RNC beused in compliance with the R6protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: TheNodeB does not allocatebandwidth according to theconfiguration or delay on theIub interface. The RNCallocates the bandwidthaccording to the bandwidth onthe Uu interface reported bythe NodeB. To perform thisfunction, the reverse flowcontrol switch must be enabledby the RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Time delaythreshold
HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower thanthis threshold, you can infer thatthe link is not congested.Value range: 0 through 20
4
Discardratethreshold
HsdpaDR The link is not congested whenframe loss ratio is not higher thanthis threshold.Value range: 0 through 1000
1
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-128 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Procedurel Add the IMA group and the IMA link individually.
1. On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane,and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CMExpress window is displayed.
2. Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
3. Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB ATM Transport Layerwindow is displayed.
4. Click ATMPort, and then click the UNI tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown inFigure 6-43.
Figure 6-43 Configure the UNI links individually.
5. Select SubrackNo, and click . The Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed. Selectan E1/T1 port, and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer
window. Click to add an UNI link.l Add UNI groups and links in bulk.
1. In the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window, click . The NodeBATM Bulk Link CM window is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-44.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-129
Figure 6-44 Configure the UNI links in batches.
Table 6-32 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Available E1/T1 port for the UNI link on the configured Iubinterface board
2 E1/T1 port assigned to the UNI link
2. In area 1, select an E1/T1 port, and then click to add one UNI link.
----End
Adding Fractional ATM Links (Initial)The fractional ATM is a transmission mode over the TC sub-layer of the ATM physical layerand it is an exceptional case of the UNI link. This describes how to add fractional ATM links.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-130 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
NOTE
l The Fractional ATM link can be configured on only the E1/T1 port 0 through 1 on the baseboards inslots 12 through 15.
l One E1/T1 port can be configured with multiple Fractional ATM links if the timeslots occupied by thelinks do not conflict.
l The total number of IMA groups, UNI links and Fractional ATM links on the same baseboard doesnot exceed eight.
l The total number of IMA links, UNI links and Fractional ATM links on the same baseboard does notexceed eight.
Prerequisitel The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a
Physical NodeB (Initial).
l The NDTI/NUTI of the Macro NodeB is configured, as described in 6.2.2 Adding theBoards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial).
l The BBU of the distributed NodeB is configured, as described in 6.4.2 Adding a BBU(Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-33 Negotiation and planned data of the fractional ATM links
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Slot No. SlotNo Number of slot where the NDTI orNUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 holdonly the NUTI)Value range: 12 through 15
13
InternalplanningSub-board
typeSubBdType Type of the sub-board with the E1/
T1 port available for the fractionalATM link Optional parameters:Baseboard
BaseBoard
Port No. E1T1No Number of the E1/T1 port availablefor the fractional ATM linkValue range: 0 through 1
0 Negotiation with thedestination
Linknumber
LinkNo Value range: 0 through 7 1 Internalplanning
Timeslots TSBitMap The fractional ATM link providestimeslots for the 3G equipment. Ifport 0 is configured, the timeslotsmust be reserved for timeslot crossconnection.Value range: TS1 to TS31
TS24 toTS31 Negotiatio
n with thedestination
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-131
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Scramblemode
ScrambleMode
Optional parameters:l DISABLE (unavailable, the
scramble mode is disabled)l ENABLE (The scramble mode
must be enabled if the E1/T1transmission uses AMI linecodes.)
ENABLE
Internalplanning
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch Optional parameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based
on the configured Iub bandwidthand the bandwidth occupied byR99 users, traffic is allocated toHSDPA users when the physicalbandwidth restriction is takeninto account.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow controlof SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL,traffic is allocated to HSDPAusers when the delay and packetloss on the Iub interface are takeninto account. The RNC uses theR6 switch to perform thisfunction. It is recommended thatthe RNC be used in compliancewith the R6 protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. TheRNC allocates the bandwidthaccording to the bandwidth onthe Uu interface reported by theNodeB. To perform thisfunction, the reverse flow controlswitch must be enabled by theRNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Time delaythreshold
HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower thanthis threshold, you can infer that thelink is not congested.Value range: 0 through 20
4
Discardratethreshold
HsdpaDR The link is not congested whenframe loss ratio is not higher thanthis threshold.Value range: 0 through 1000
1
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-132 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click ATMPort, and then click the Fractional ATM tab. The tab page is displayed, as shownin Figure 6-45.
Figure 6-45 Adding a fractional ATM link
Step 5 Select SubrackNo, and click . The Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed. Select an E1/T1 port, and click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window.
Step 6 Select TSBitMap, and then click . The TimeSlot Select dialog box is displayed. Select thetimeslot to be used, and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window.
NOTE
The CME automatically filters the timeslot that is already occupied or reserved on the same E1/T1 port.The available timeslots appear yellow. The used timeslots appear dark green.
Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add fractionalATM links.
----End
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-133
Adding SDT CES or UDT CES Link (Initial)The Circuit Emulation Service (CES) provides the transmission channel for GSM services to betransmitted over the 3G network. The CES links use either Structured Data Transfer (SDT) modeor Unstructured Data Transfer (UDT) mode. This describes how to configure the SDT CES orUDT CES link. The Circuit Emulation Service (CES) provides the transmission channel forGSM services to be transmitted over the 3G network. The CES links use either Structured DataTransfer (SDT) mode or Unstructured Data Transfer (UDT) mode. This describes how toconfigure the SDT CES or the UDT CES link. The SDT CES and the UDT CES are onlyconfigured in the macro NodeB.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l The SDT CES and UDT CES can be configured only on E1/T1 0 through 1 of the NDTI baseboard.
l The SDT CES and the UDT CES exclusively occupy an E1/T1 port.
l The bandwidth of the SDT or UDT CES link must be lower than that of the physical bearer link. TheUDT CES link occupies relatively high bandwidth. Only the IMA link can be used as the physicalbearer link.
l The formula (unit: kbit/s, each cell has 53 bytes) to calculate the CES links is as follows:
l UDT CES: 64 x 32 x bytes of a cell/partial fill rate
l SDT CES: 64 x selected timeslots except for slot 0 x bytes of a cell/partial fill rate
Prerequisitel The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a
Physical NodeB (Initial).l The NUTI of the macro NodeB is configured, as described in 6.2.2 Adding the Boards in
the Baseband Subrack (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-34 Negotiation and planned data of the SDT CES
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type Type Type of the interface that carries theSDT CES channels Optionalparameters:l FRAATM
l IMA
l UNI
l STM1
FRAATM
Internalplanning
Source slotNo.
PortNo Number of the slot that holds the NDTIValue range: 12 through 13
12
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-134 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Sourcesub-boardtype
SubBdType
Type of the sub-board where thesource E1/T1 port is located by theSDT CES channel Optionalparameters: Baseboard
BaseBoard
Source portNo.
PortNo Number of the source E1/T1 ports forthe SDT CES channelValue range: 0 through 1
0
Partial filllevel
PFL ATM cell has 48-byte payloads.Except for the first byte, the other 47bytes can be used to transmit timeslotsignals. Each timeslot occupies onebyte. The number of filling bytes isthat of valid bytes filled in each ATMcell.Value range: 4 through 47, and thevalue should be greater than thenumber of selected timeslots exceptfor slot 0.
47
Timeslots TSBitMap Timeslot 0 is unavailable.Value range: TS1 to TS31
TS1 toTS7
Destination slot No.
SlotNo Number of slot where the NDTI orNUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 holdonly the NUTI)Value range: 12 through 15
13
Destination sub-board type
SubBdType
Type of the sub-board where thedestination E1/T1 port is located bythe SDT CES channel Optionalparameters:l Baseboard
l E1 CoverBoard: E1 coverboard
l Channelled CoverBoard:channelized optical sub-board
l Unchannelled CoverBoard:unchannelized optical sub-board
BaseBoard
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-135
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Destination port No.
E1T1No Number of the destination E1/T1 portfor the SDT CES channel (Thisparameter is valid only when Type isset to FRAATM or UNI).l When Type is set to FRAATM and
SubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is BaseBoard, the value rangeis 0 through 7.
l When Type is set to UNI andSubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is BaseBoard or E1CoverBoard, the value range is 0through 7.
l When Type is set to UNI andSubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is Channelled CoverBoard,the value range is 0 through 62.
0
Link No./IMA ID
LinkNo/IMAId
Number of the fractional ATM or UNIlink, of the IMA group, or of the STM1optical port that carries the SDT CESchannel.l When Type is set to FRAATM and
SubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is BaseBoard, the value rangeis 0 through 7.
l When Type is set to UNI andSubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is BaseBoard or E1CoverBoard, the value range is 0through 7.
l When Type is set to UNI andSubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is Channelled CoverBoard,the value range is 0 through 62.
l When Type is set to IMA andSubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is BaseBoard or E1CoverBoard, the value range is 0through 3.
l When Type is set to IMA andSubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is Channelled CoverBoard,the value range is 0 through 1.
l When Type is STM1, the valuerange is 0 through 1.
0
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-136 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Virtualchannelidentifier
VPI Identifier of the virtual channel for theSDT CES channel.Value range: 0 through 31 (sixsuccessive values from 0 to 31)
1
Virtualchannelidentifier
VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for theSDT CES channel.l When the interface board is the
NDTI, the value range is 32 through255.
l When the interface board is theNUTI, the value range is 32 through127.
32
Table 6-35 Negotiation and planned data of the UDT CES
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type Type Type of the interface that carries theUDT CES channel Optionalparameters:l IMA
l STM1
IMA
Internalplanning
Source slotNo.
PortNo Number of the slot that holds the NDTIValue range: 12 through 13
12
Sourcesub-boardtype
SubBdType
Type of the sub-board where thesource E1/T1 port is located by theUDT CES channel Optionalparameters: Baseboard
BaseBoard
Source portNo.
PortNo Number of the source E1/T1 ports forthe UDT CES channelValue range: 0 through 1
1
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-137
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Partial filllevel
PFL The value of the partial fill levelaffects both the transmissionbandwidth and the transmission delay.When the value reaches the maximumof 47, the transmission bandwidth isnot affected, and the transmissiondelay reaches the maximum value;when the value is smaller than 47, thetransmission bandwidth equals to theoriginal transmission bandwidth x (53/PFL), and the transmission delay isreduced. In order not to affect thetransmission bandwidth, set thedefault value to 47.Value range: 4 through 47
47
Tx ClockMode
TxClockMode
Optional parameters:l NOACM (non-adaptive clock
mode)l NOACM (adaptive clock mode)
ACM
Destination slot No.
SlotNo Number of slot where the NDTI orNUTI is held (Slots 14 and 15 holdonly the NUTI)Value range: 12 through 15
14
Destination sub-board type
SubBdType
Type of the sub-board where thedestination E1/T1 port is located bythe UDT CES channel Optionalparameters:l Baseboard
l E1 CoverBoard: E1 coverboard
l Channelled CoverBoard:channelized optical sub-board
l Unchannelled CoverBoard:unchannelized optical sub-board
ChannelledCoverBoard
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-138 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Opticalport No./IMA ID
LinkNo/IMAId
Number of the IMA group or STM1optical port that carries the UDT CESchannel.l When Type is set to IMA and
SubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is BaseBoard or E1CoverBoard, the value range is 0through 3.
l When Type is set to IMA andSubBdType(destination sub-boardtype) is Channelled CoverBoard,the value range is 0 through 1.
l When Type is STM1, the valuerange is 0 through 1.
0
Virtualchannelidentifier
VPI Identifier of the virtual channel for theUDT CES channel.Value range: 0 through 31 (sixsuccessive values from 0 to 31)
1
Virtualchannelidentifier
VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for theUDT CES channel.l When the interface board is the
NDTI, the value range is 32 through255.
l When the interface board is theNUTI, the value range is 32 through127.
32
Procedurel Configure the SDT CES links.
1. On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane,and then click NodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CMExpress window is displayed.
2. Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
3. Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB ATM Transport Layerwindow is displayed.
4. Click Network, and then click the SDT tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown inFigure 6-46.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-139
Figure 6-46 Configuring the SDT CES links
Table 6-36 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Physical bearer link
2 SDT CES configuration area
5. In area 1, select a physical bearer link; In area 2, select SubrackNo and then click, the Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed. Select an E1/T1 port, and click
OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window.
NOTE
The SDT and UDT CES each inclusively occupies an E1/T1 port, and thus the CMEautomatically filters the E1/T1 port that is already used by the UDT CES link.
6. Select TSBitMap, and then click . The TimeSlot Select dialog box is displayed.Select the timeslot to be used, and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATMTransport Layer window.
NOTE
The CME automatically filters the timeslot that is already occupied or reserved on the sameE1/T1 port. The available timeslots appear yellow. The used timeslots appear dark green.
7. Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add anSDT CES link.
l Configure the UDT CES links.
1. In the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window, click the UDT tab, as shown in Figure6-47.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-140 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-47 Configuring the UDT CES links
Table 6-37 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Physical bearer link (The system automatically filters theIMA link.)
2 UDT CES configuration area
2. In area 1, select an IMA link as the physical bearer link providing bandwidth for theUDT link. In area 2, select SubrackNo, and click . The Search E1/T1 Port windowis displayed. Select an E1/T1 port, and click OK to return to the NodeB ATMTransport Layer window.
NOTE
The SDT and UDT CES each inclusively occupies an E1/T1 port, and thus the CMEautomatically filters the E1/T1 port that is already used by the SDT CES link.
3. Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add anSDT CES link.
----End
Adding a Timeslot Cross Channel (Initial, over ATM)
This describes how to add a timeslot cross channel for the 2G equipment so as to transmit thedata of services on the 3G network.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-141
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l The timeslot cross channel can be configured on only the E1/T1 port 2 through 3 on the baseboards inslots 12 through 15.
l No IMA or UNI links can be added to the source E1/T1 link where the timeslots cross channel isconfigured.
l The source and destination ports of the timeslot cross channel must be different, and the same E1/T1port cannot be repeatedly used.
l When both E1/T1 2 and 3 use the timeslot cross channel, the timeslots of both links do not conflict.That is, the fractional ATM link timeslot that is configured to E1/T1 0 cannot conflict with the fractionalATM link timeslot that is configured to either E1/T1 2 or 3.
PrerequisiteThe negotiation and planned data is ready.
Preparation
Table 6-38 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Source slotNo.
SlotNo Number of the slot that holdsthe NDTI or NUTIValue range: 12 through 15
13
Internalplanning
Sourceport No.
PortNo Number of the source E1/T1ports for timeslot cross linksValue range: 2 through 3
3
Sourcetimeslots
TSBitMap Value range: TS1 to TS31 TS16 to TS23
Destination slot No.
DestSlotNo
Number of the slot that holdsthe NDTI or NUTI (Thenumber must be identicalwith that of the SlotNo)Value range: 12 through 15
13
Destination port No.
DestPortNo
Number of the destinationE1/T1 ports for timeslotcross linksValue range: 0
0
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-142 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click Network, and then click the TSCross tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure6-48.
Figure 6-48 Configuring the timeslot cross channel
Table 6-39 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Area for the destination port
2 Configuration area of the timeslot cross channel
Step 5 In area 1, select a destination port; In area 2, select TScrossNo, and then click , the SearchE1/T1 Port window is displayed. Select an E1/T1 port, and click OK to return to the NodeBATM Transport Layer window.
Step 6 Select TSBitMap, and then click . The TimeSlot Select dialog box is displayed. Select thetimeslot to be used, and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-143
NOTE
The CME automatically filters the timeslot that is already occupied or reserved on the same E1/T1 port.The available timeslots appear yellow. The used timeslots appear dark green.
Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add a timeslotcross channel.
----End
6.5.2 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial, over ATM)This describes how to add the transmission resource group, which is used to allocates thebandwidth of the physical link to the transmission resource group for carrying the data on thecontrol plane, the user plane, and the OM channel. Each group occupies one portion of thebandwidth and has separate access control, congestion control and HSPA flow control.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional. The configuration is required only when the SAAL links, the AAL2PATH or the OMCH links join the transmission resource group.
NOTE
l Each physical link can be configured with a maximum of four transmission groups, that is, the totalnumber of transmission groups over ATM and IP.
l Each Iub interface board or BBU supports a maximum of 16 transmission resource groups over ATMor 8 transmission resource groups over IP.
l The transmit bandwidth of the transmission resource group should be not greater than the idlebandwidth at the physical links.
Prerequisite
The physical layer data is configured, refer to 6.5.1 Adding Links at the Physical Layer(Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-40 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over ATM)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Port type Type Type of the interface that carries thetransmission resource group Optionalparameters:l FRAATM
l IMA
l UNI
l STM1
IMA
Internalplanning
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-144 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Resourcegroupnumber
RscgrpNo Value range: 0 through 3 1
Transmitbandwidth
TxBandwidth
The transmit bandwidth of the resourcegroup cannot exceed the bandwidth ofthe port to which the resource groupbelong.Value range: 32 through 15800
5000
Receivebandwidth
RxBandwidth
Receive bandwidth of the resourcegroup.Value range: 30 through 20000
5000
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click RSCGroup, as shown in Figure 6-49.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-145
Figure 6-49 Configuring the transmission resource group
Table 6-41 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configured physical link list
2 Configuration area for the transmission resource group
Step 5 In area 1, select a physical bearer link; In area 2, select RscgrpNo and then click .
Step 6 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add a transmissionresource group over ATM.
----End
6.5.3 Adding SAAL Links (Initial)This describes how to add SAAL links. The SAAL links are used to carry the NBAP and ALCAPwhen the Iub interface is over ATM.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-146 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
NOTE
l The PCR value should be greater than the SCR value for the SAAL.
l The PCR value of the SAAL link should be less than or equal to the available bandwidth of the physicallink that carries this SAAL link.
l If the SAAL is added to the transmission resource group, the PCR of the SAAL should be less than orequal to the bandwidth of the transmission resource group.
Prerequisitel The physical layer link is configured, refer to 6.5.1 Adding Links at the Physical Layer
(Initial).l The transmission resource group is configured, refer to 6.5.2 Adding Transmission
Resource Group (Initial, over ATM).
Preparation
Table 6-42 Negotiation and planned data of the SAAL links
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Port type Type Type of the interface that carries theSAAL links Optional parameters:l FRAATM
l IMA
l UNI
l STM1
IMA
Negotiation withthedestination
Virtualchannelidentifier
VPI Identifier of the virtual channel for theSAAL links.Value range:l Macro NodeB: 0 through 31 (six
successive values from 0 to 31)l Distributed NodeB: 0 through 29
1
Virtualchannelidentifier
VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for theSAAL links.Value range:l Macro NodeB: 32 through 255
(NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI)l Distributed NodeB: 32 through 127
34
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-147
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Servicetype
ServiceType
When this parameter is set to CBR orUBR, you need to set only theparameter PCR; when this parameteris set to RTVBR or NRTVBR, youneed to set parameters SCR and PCR;when this parameter is set to UBR+,you need to set parameters PCR andMCR.Optional parameters:l CBR (applicable to the CES
channel)l RTVBR (applicable to services
carried on the AAL2 path)l NRTVBR (applicable to services
carried on the AAL5 path)l UBR+ (unspecified bit rate,
provides cell rate guarantee)l UBR (unspecified bit rate)
RTVBR
Peak cellrate
PCR Peak cell rate of the ATM channelWhen the service type is RTVBR,NRTVBR or UBR+, the value of thisparameter should be greater than thatof the SCR or MCR.l When the service type is CBR or
UBR, the value range is 30 to 6760.l When the service type is RTVBR,
NRTVBR or UBR+, the value rangeis 31 to 6760.
200
Minimumcell rate
MCR The value of the MCR of the ATMchannel should be smaller than that ofthe PCR. This parameter is valid onlywhen the service type is UBR+.Value range: 30 through 6759
-
Sustainablecell rate
SCR The value of the SCR of the ATMchannel should be smaller than that ofthe PCR. This parameter is valid onlywhen the service type is RTVBR orNRTVBRValue range: 30 through 6759
180
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-148 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Join theresourcegroup
JoinRscgrp Specify whether this link should beadded to the resource group. Optionalparameters:l DISABLE
l ENABLE
ENABLE
Internalplanning
Resourcegroupnumber
RscgrpNo Number of the ATM transmissionresource groupValue range: 0 through 3
1
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click SAAL, as shown in Figure 6-50.
Figure 6-50 Configuring the SAAL
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-149
Table 6-43 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configured physical link list
2 Transmission resource group carried on the corresponding physicallink
3 Configuration area for the SAAL links
Step 5 In area 1, select the physical bearer link. Then the transmission resource group carried on this
physical link is displayed in area 2. In area 3, click SAALNo, and click .
Step 6 (Optional) Set JoinRscgrp to ENABLE. Select RscgrpNo, and click , the Search ResourceGroup window is displayed. Select a transmission resource group, and click OK to return tothe NodeB ATM Transport Layer window.
NOTE
The physical bearer type of the transmission resource group is identical with that of the SAAL link. Figure6-50 and Table 6-43 show the matching relation.
Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add an SAALlink.
----End
6.5.4 Adding an NBAP (Initial)This describes how to configure the NodeB Control Port (NCP) and Communication ControlPort (CCP). These two ports are carried on the SAAL links.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NOTE
l One NodeB can be configured with the active and the standby NCPs or CCPs.
l Each SAAL link can be configured with only one NCP or CCP.
l The active and the standby NCPs or CCPs should be configured on different links. For example, if theactive one is configured on the SAAL, the standby one should be configured on the SCTP. Otherwisethe configuration is invalid.
PrerequisiteThe SAAL links are configured, as described in 6.5.3 Adding SAAL Links (Initial).
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-150 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Preparation
Table 6-44 Negotiation and planned data of the NBAP
Input Data FieldName
Description Example
Source
NCP
Port type PortType Optional parameters:l NCP
l CCP
NCPInternalplanning
SAALnumber
SAALNo SAAL number that carries theNCPValue range: 0 through 63
1 Negotiation withthedestination
Flag Flag Master/slave flag for thetransmission channels Optionalparameters:l SLAVE
l MASTER
MASTER
Internalplanning
CCP
Port type PortType Optional parameters:l NCP
l CCP
CCPInternalplanning
Port No. PortNo Number of the CCP port. Thisparameter is valid only whenPortType is set to CCP.Value range: 0 through 65535
0
Negotiation withthedestination
SAALnumber
SAALNo SAAL number that carries theCCPValue range: 0 through 63
2
Flag Flag Master/slave flag for thetransmission channels Optionalparameters:l SLAVE
l MASTER
MASTER
Internalplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-151
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click NBAP, as shown in Figure 6-51.
Figure 6-51 Configuring the NCP and the CCP
Table 6-45 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configured SAAL link list
2 Configuration area of the NBAP
Step 5 In area 1, select an SAAL link; in area 2, select PortType and then click . Configure related
parameters based on prepared data, and then click to add an NCP link.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-152 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Step 6 In area 1, select an SAAL link; in area 2, select PortType and then click . Configure related
parameters based on prepared data, and then click to add an CCP link.
----End
6.5.5 Adding an ALCAP (Initial)This describes how to configure an AAL2 node to the NodeB so that the ALCAP is added at theNodeB. The ALCAP allocates the micro channels of the AAL2 path.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NOTE
l One NodeB can be configured with multiple adjacent nodes.
l One NodeB can be configured with either one end node or one exchange node.
l The ATM address must begin with 39/45/47 and end with that in accordance with the protocol.
l The distributed NodeB can be configured with only the nodes of type.
Prerequisitel The SAAL links are configured, as described in 6.5.3 Adding SAAL Links (Initial).
l An exchange node cannot be configured on the SAAL over the NDTI. Therefore, you needto configure the SAAL over the NUTI before you configure the exchange node if required.
Preparation
Table 6-46 Negotiation and planned data of the ALCAP
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Node type NodeType The exchange node must be configuredbefore configuring the adjacent node.The exchange node cannot be carried onthe SAAL link on the NDTI. Optionalparameters:l LOCAL (peer node)
l HUB (switch node, indicating thatthe NodeB has a lower-level NodeB)
l ADJNODE (adjacent node,indicating the lower-level NodeB)
LOCAL
Internalplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-153
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Adjacentnodeidentifier
ANI Identify an adjacent node. Thisparameter is valid only when theparameter NodeType is set toADJNODE.Value range: 0 through 31
-
Networkserviceaccesspoint
NSAP The full name is: Net service accesspoint.When the NodeB uses ATMtransmission, the NSAP is the addressof the NodeB that is connected to theAAL2 path. The address is ahexadecimal with a length of 20 bytes(excluding the prefix H').
H'3901010101010101010101010101010101010101
SAALnumber
SAALNo SAAL number that carries the ALCAPValue range: 0 through 63
3
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click ALCAP, as shown in Figure 6-52.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-154 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-52 Adding the AAL2 node
Table 6-47 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configured SAAL link list
2 Configuration area of the ALCAP
Step 5 In area 1, select an SAAL link; in area 2, select NodeType and then click .
Step 6 In the drop-down list, select the node type of the AAL2 link, and configure other parameters
based on prepared data. Click to add an AAL2 node.
NOTE
l The NodeType is set to :NSAP must be the same as the NSAP of the logical NodeB created at theRNC side.
l The NodeType is set to :NSAP can be configured only at the NodeB side.
l The NodeType is set to :NSAP needs no configuration.
----End
6.5.6 Adding AAL2 Path Data (Initial)This describes how to add AAL2 PATH data over ATM. The AAL2 path carries the user planedata between the RNC and other equipment.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-155
NOTE
l Each NDTI board can be configured with a maximum of 16 AAL2 PATH; Each NUTI board can beconfigured with a maximum of 32 AAL2 PATH.
l The sum of the IP paths and AAL2 paths configured on one NodeB should be less than or equal to 16.
l For an AAL2 path, the PCR value should be greater than the SCR value.
l The PCR value of the AAL2 path should be less than or equal to the available bandwidth of the physicallink that carries the AAL2 path.
l If a physical port is configured with the transmission resource groups, all the AAL2 paths should beadded to a certain transmission resource group, and the PCR of the AAL2 path should be less than thebandwidth of the transmission resource group.
l If a physical port is configured with AAL2 path links or IP path links, and the links are not in a resourcegroup. No transmission resource group can be added to this physical port.
Prerequisitel The AAL2 nodes are configured. For details, refer to 6.5.5 Adding an ALCAP (Initial).
l The transmission resource group is configured, refer to 6.5.2 Adding TransmissionResource Group (Initial, over ATM).
Preparation
Table 6-48 Negotiation and planned data of the AAL2 PATH
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type Type Type of the interface that carries theAAL2 PATH Optional parameters:l FRAATM
l IMA
l UNI
l STM1
IMA
Negotiation withthedestination
PATH type PathType Type of the AAL2 path, whichindicates the desired service typecarried on the path. Optionalparameters: RT, NRT, HSPA_RT,HSPA_NRT
RT
Virtualchannelidentifier
VPI Identifier of the virtual channel for theAAL2 path.Value range:l Macro NodeB: 0 through 31 (six
successive values from 0 to 31)l Distributed NodeB: 0 through 29
1
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-156 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Virtualchannelidentifier
VCI Identifier of the virtual channel for theAAL2 path.Value range:l Macro NodeB: 32 through 255
(NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI)l Distributed NodeB: 32 through 127
37
Servicetype
ServiceType
Optional parameters:l CBR (applicable to the CES
channel)l RTVBR (applicable to services
carried on the AAL2 path)l NRTVBR (applicable to services
carried on the AAL5 path)l UBR+ (unspecified bit rate,
provides cell rate guarantee)l UBR (unspecified bit rate)
RTVBR
Peak cellrate
PCR Peak cell rate of the ATM channelWhen the service type is RTVBR,NRTVBR or UBR+, the value of thisparameter should be greater than that ofthe SCR. This parameter should be oneof the bandwidth parameters for thetransmission direction.l When the sub-board type is
BaseBoard, and the service type isCBR or UBR, the value range is 30through 15800.
l When the sub-board type isChannelled CoverBoard orUnchannelled CoverBoard, and theservice type is RTVBR,NRTVBR,or UBR+, the value rangeis 31 through 15800.
1920
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-157
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Sustainable cell rate
SCR The value of the SCR of the ATMchannel should be smaller than that ofthe PCR. This parameter is valid onlywhen the service type is RTVBR orNRTVBRThis parameter should beone of the bandwidth parameters for thetransmission direction.l When sub-board type is BaseBoard,
the value range is 30 through 15799.l When the sub-board type is
Channelled CoverBoard orUnchannelled CoverBoard, thevalue range is 30 through 6759.
960
Receivedcell rate
RCR This parameter must be consistent withthe downlink bandwidth configured bythe RNC. This parameter acts as animportant factor in flow control by theNodeB receive bandwidth. Whether ornot this parameter is correctlyconfigured will affect the effect of flowcontrol.Value range: 64 through 20000
2048
Join theresourcegroup
JoinRscgrp Specify whether AAL2 path should beadded to the resource group. Optionalparameters:l DISABLE
l ENABLE
ENABLE
Internalplanning
Resourcegroupnumber
RscgrpNo Number of the ATM transmissionresource groupValue range: 0 through 3
1
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-158 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click AAL2PATH, as shown in Figure 6-53.
Figure 6-53 Configuring the AAL2 PATH
Table 6-49 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configured AAL2 node list
2 Configured physical link list
3 Transmission resource group carried on the corresponding physicallink
4 Configuration area for the AAL2 path
Step 5 In area 1, select an AAL2 node; in area 2, select the physical bearer link. Then the transmissionresource group carried on this physical link is displayed in area 3. In area 4, click
AAL2PathId, and click .NOTE
The physical bearer type of the resource group is the same as that of the AAL2 PATH. Figure 6-53 andTable 6-49 show the matching relation.
Step 6 (Optional) Set JoinRscgrp to ENABLE. Select RscgrpNo, and click , the Search ResourceGroup window is displayed. Select a transmission resource group, and click OK to return tothe NodeB ATM Transport Layer window.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-159
Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add an AAL2path link.
NOTE
l If the service type is either RTVBR or NRTVBR, the value of the parameter should meet the followingcondition: 0 < SCR < PCR ≤ RSCGRP configuration bandwidth.
l If the service type is UBR+, the value of the parameter should meet the following condition: MCR<PCRand 0<MCR<PCR<=bandwidth configured for the RSCGRP
----End
6.5.7 Adding an OMCH of the NodeB (Initial, over ATM)This describes how to add an Operation and Maintenance Channel (OMCH) of the NodeB.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l In ATM transport mode, only one OMCH can be configured. It can be either active or standby. If theconfigured OMCH is active, it takes effect as the active channel; if the configured OMCH is standby,the configuration does not take effect.
l Local IP addresses of two OMCH channels cannot be on the same network segment.
l The local IP address and the destination IP address of the OMCH must be in the same network segment.
l For an OMCH, the PCR value should be greater than the SCR value.
l The PCR value of the OMCH should be less than or equal to the available bandwidth of the physicallink that carries the OMCH.
l If the OMCH is added to the transmission resource group, the PCR of the OMCH should be less thanor equal to the bandwidth of the transmission resource group.
Prerequisitel The physical layer link is configured, refer to 6.5.1 Adding Links at the Physical Layer
(Initial).l The transmission resource group is configured, refer to 6.5.2 Adding Transmission
Resource Group (Initial, over ATM).
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-160 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Preparation
Table 6-50 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (ATM)
Input Data FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type Type Type of the interface that carries theOMCH Optional parameters:l FRAATM
l IMA
l UNI
l STM1
UNI
Negotiation withthedestination
Virtualchannelidentifier
VPI Virtual channel for the OMCHValue range:l Macro NodeB: 1 or within the VPI
range of the actual boardconfiguration
l Distributed NodeB: 0 through 29
1
Virtualchannelidentifier
VCI Virtual channel for the OMCHValue range:l Macro NodeB: 32 through 255
(NDTI) or 32 through 127 (NUTI)l Distributed NodeB: 32 through 127
33
Service type ServiceType
Optional parameters:l CBR (applicable to the CES
channel)l RTVBR (applicable to services
carried on the AAL2 path)l NRTVBR (applicable to services
carried on the AAL5 path)l UBR+ (unspecified bit rate,
provides cell rate guarantee)l UBR (unspecified bit rate)
CBR
Peak cellrate
PCR Peak cell rate of the ATM channelWhen the service type is RTVBR,NRTVBR or UBR+, the value of thisparameter should be greater than that ofthe SCR.l When the service type is CBR or
UBR, the value range is 30 to 6760.l When the service type is RTVBR,
NRTVBR or UBR+, the value rangeis 31 to 6760.
512
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-161
Input Data FieldName
Description Example Source
Sustainablecell rate
SCR The value of the SCR of the ATMchannel should be smaller than that ofthe PCR. This parameter is valid onlywhen the service type is RTVBR orNRTVBRValue range: 30 through 6759
-
Local IPaddress ofthe OMCH
LocalIP IP address for NodeB remotemaintenance
10.1.2.10
DestinationIP addressof theOMCH
DestIP Destination IP address for NodeBremote maintenance, that is, the IPaddress configured on the ATMinterface board at the RNC.
10.1.2.1
Destinationsubnet maskof theOMCH
DestIPMask
Subnet mask of the destination IPaddress for NodeB remote maintenance
255.255.255.0
Join theresourcegroup
JoinRscgrp Specify whether AAL2 path should beadded to the resource group. Optionalparameters:l DISABLE
l ENABLE
ENABLE
Internalplanning
Resourcegroupnumber
RscgrpNo Number of the ATM transmissionresource groupValue range: 0 through 3
2
Flag Flag Master/slave flag for the remote OMchannels Optional parameters:l SLAVE
l MASTER
MASTER
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-162 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click OMCH, as shown in Figure 6-54.
Figure 6-54 Adding an OMCH
Table 6-51 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configured physical link list
2 Transmission resource group carried on the corresponding physicallink
3 OMCH configuration area
Step 5 In area 1, select the physical bearer link. Then the transmission resource group carried on thisphysical link is displayed in area 2.
Step 6 In area 3, select LocalIP, and click , the LocalIP & Mask dialog box is displayed. Set thepeer IP address and the mask of the OMCH, and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATMTransport Layer window.
Step 7 Select DestIP, and click . The IP and IP Mask dialog box is displayed. Set the peer IP addressand the mask of the OMCH, and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATM TransportLayer window.
Step 8 (Optional) Set JoinRscgrp to ENABLE. Select RscgrpNo, and click , the Search ResourceGroup window is displayed. Select a transmission resource group, and click OK to return tothe NodeB ATM Transport Layer window.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-163
NOTE
The physical bearer type of the resource group is identical with that of the OMCH. Figure 6-54 and Table6-51 show the matching relation.
Step 9 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add an OMCHlink.
----End
6.5.8 Adding a Treelink PVC (Initial)This describes how to add a treelink PVC to the Hub NodeB. When the NodeB are cascaded,the treelink PVC added to the Hub NodeB can provide the data transmission channel betweenthe upper-level NE and the lower-level NE.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l The source port and the destination port must be different.
l For the treelink PVC, the PCR value should be greater than the SCR value.
l The bandwidth of the treelink PVC should be less than or equal to the bandwidth of the physical port(such as the types of IMA group and UNI link) that bears the treelink PVC.
PrerequisiteThe physical layer link is configured, refer to 6.5.1 Adding Links at the Physical Layer(Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-52 Negotiation and planned data of the treelink PVC
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
Source porttype
SourceType Type of the interface that carries thesource port of the treelink PVCOptional parameters:l FRAATM
l IMA
l UNI
l STM1
FRAATM
Internalplanning
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-164 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
Destination port type
DestinationType
Type of the interface that carries thedestination port of the treelink PVCOptional parameters:l FRAATM
l IMA
l UNI
l STM1
UNI
ByPassMode
ByPassMode When the NodeB is powered off orexceptions occur to the NodeB, theE1/T1 can be connected to the lowernode by switching to theByPassMode. The treelink PVC is setusing the ByPassMode that thusguarantees the connection betweenthe lower node and the RNC. Optionalparameters:l DISABLE (disable the
ByPassMode)l ENABLE (enable the
ByPassMode)
DISABLE
Source VPI SourVPI Virtual channel used by the upperlevel network linkl For the VP switching, the source
port VPI must be beyond the VPIconfigured to the board, and thevalue cannot be 1.
l For the VC switching, the sourceport VPI must be within the VPIconfigured to the board, and thevalue can be 1.
l For the VC switching, the SourVPIand the DestVPI must meet theconditions of the source board andthe destination board respectively.
1
Negotiation withthedestination
SourceVCI
SourVCI Identifier of the virtual channel for theupper-level links. This parameter isvalid for VC switching.l For the macro NodeB, the value
range is 32 through 255 (NDTI) or32 through 127 (NUTI)
l For the distributed NodeB, thevalue range is 32 through 127
33
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-165
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
Destination VPI
DestVPI Virtual channel used by the lower-level network linkl For the VP switching, the
destination port VPI must bebeyond the VPI configured to theboard, and the value cannot be 1.
l For the VC switching, thedestination port VPI must be withinthe VPI configured to the board,and the value can be 1.
l For the VC switching, the SourVPIand the DestVPI must meet theconditions of the source board andthe destination board respectively.
1
Destination VCI
DestVCI Identifier of the virtual channel for thelower-level links. This parameter isvalid for VC switching.l For the macro NodeB, the value
range is 32 through 255 (NDTI) or32 through 127 (NUTI)
l For the distributed NodeB, thevalue range is 32 through 127
32
Servicetype
ServiceType Optional parameters:l RTVBR
l NRTVBR
l UBR (unspecified bit rate)
l UBR+ (unspecified bit rate,provides cell rate guarantee)
RTVBR
Peak cellrate
PCR Peak cell rate of the ATM channelWhen the service type is RTVBR,NRTVBR or UBR+, the value of thisparameter should be greater than thatof the SCR.l When the service type is UBR, the
value range is 30 to 6760.l When the service type is RTVBR,
NRTVBR or UBR+, the valuerange is 31 to 6760.
400
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-166 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
Sustainable cell rate
SCR The value of the SCR of the ATMchannel should be smaller than that ofthe PCR. This parameter is valid onlywhen the service type is RTVBR orNRTVBRValue range: 30 through 6759
380
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click Network, and then click the TreeLink PVC tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown inFigure 6-55.
Figure 6-55 NodeB ATM Transport Layer (Treelink PVC) window
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-167
Table 6-53 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Source port list: shows all configured physical links
2 Destination port list: shows all configured physical links
3 Treelink PVC configuration area
Step 5 Select a source port in area 1; select a destination port in area 2.
Step 6 In area 3, select VCXNo, and then click to add a TreeLink PVC. The CME automaticallyallocates parameters SourVPI, SourVCI, DestVPI, and DestVCI. Set the other parameters
such as VCXType, ServiceType, PCR, and SCR. Click to add a treelink PVC.
NOTE
l For the VP switching, the source port VPI must be out of the VPI range configured to the board, andthe value cannot be 1; The destination port VPI must be out of the VPI range configured to the board,and the value cannot be 1.
l For the VC switching, the source port VPI must be within the VPI range configured to the board, andthe value can be 1; the destination port VPI must be within the VPI range configured to the board, andthe value can be 1.
----End
6.6 Manually Adding Transport Layer Data of the NodeB(over IP)
This describes how to configure the transport layer data of the NodeB in IP transport mode.
PrerequisiteNOTE
In the TCP/IP protocol, the reserved IP addresses are as follows:
l 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255
l 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255
l 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255
l 127.*.*.*: local loop address
To configure the distributed NodeB, the CME reserves the following IP addresses:
l 10.22.1.*/24: reserved for inter-BBU communication
l 17.21.2.15/16: reserved for DBS3800 or iDBS3800 local maintenance.
To configure the macro NodeB, the CME reserves the following IP addresses:
l 10.22.1.*/24: reserved for communications between the NMPT and the standby NMPT, betweenbaseband boards, and between the NMPT and the NodeB Iub interface board.
l 17.21.2.15/16: reserved for BTS3812A/BTS3812E/BTS3812AE local maintenance.
The data of the equipment layer of the NodeB is configured. For details, refer to:
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-168 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
l 6.2 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the BTS3812AE/BTS3812A (Initial)
l 6.4 Adding Equipment Layer Data of the DBS3800 (Initial)
The process of configuring the NodeB transport layer data over IP is as follows:
6.6.1 Adding a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial)This describes how to configure the data at the data link layer of the NodeB. The data link layerconsists of the PPP link, MLPPP link, PPPoE link, IP address of the FE port, and the timeslotcross channel. You need to configure at least one type from the PPP link, MLPPP link, PPPoElink, and IP address of the FE port. And you can configure only one type or configure all thetypes.
6.6.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial)This describes how to add an IP route for transmitting the NodeB IP data of the transmissioncontrol plane, the user plane, and the management plane.
6.6.3 Adding SCTP Links (Initial)This describes how to add SCTP links. The SCTP links are used to carry the IPCP, that is, theNBAP at the IP transport layer.
6.6.4 Adding an IPCP (Initial)This describes how to configure the NodeB Control Port (NCP) and Communication ControlPort (CCP). These two ports are carried on the SCTP links.
6.6.5 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial, over IP)This describes how to add the transmission resource group, which is used to allocates thebandwidth of the physical link to the transmission resource group for carrying the UE data. Eachresource group has its separate access control, congestion control, and HSPA flow control.
6.6.6 Adding IP Path Data (Initial)This describes how to add an IP PATH for transmitting the user plane data.
6.6.7 Adding an OMCH of the NodeB (Initial, over IP)This describes how to configure an OMCH of the NodeB in IP transport mode.
6.6.8 Adding A Bound Destination Network Segment to the Transmission Resource Group(Initial, IP)This describes how to add a bound destination network segment to the transmission resourcegroup. All data to the subnet from the port of the transmission resource group will be calculatedin the transmission resource group.
6.6.9 Adding IP Clock Links (Initial)This describe how to add IP clock links. The NodeB can obtain the clock signals from the clockserver through the IP link.
6.6.10 Modifying IP QoS Data (Initial)This describes how to modify the signaling and Operation and Maintenance (OM) priorities.
6.6.1 Adding a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial)This describes how to configure the data at the data link layer of the NodeB. The data link layerconsists of the PPP link, MLPPP link, PPPoE link, IP address of the FE port, and the timeslotcross channel. You need to configure at least one type from the PPP link, MLPPP link, PPPoElink, and IP address of the FE port. And you can configure only one type or configure all thetypes.
6.6.1.1 Adding PPP Link Data (Initial)
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-169
This describes how to add PPP data. This task is optional when the NodeB uses the E1/T1 cables.
6.6.1.2 Adding MLPPP Data (Initial)This describes how to add PPP data. This task is optional when the NodeB uses the E1/T1 cables.The MLPPP group combines multiple PPP links into a logical link.
6.6.1.3 Adding PPPoE Data (Initial)This describes how to add PPPoE data when multiple NodeBs connect to the RNC through theAccess Concentration (AC) in PPP over Ethernet network topology.
6.6.1.4 Adding DEVIP Data (Initial)This describes how to add the device IP address to the IP port. The IP ports can be any of thefollowing types: PPP, MLPPP, or Ethernet.
6.6.1.5 Adding a Timeslot Cross Channel (Initial, over ATM)This describes how to add a timeslot cross channel for the 2G equipment so as to transmit thedata of services on the 3G network.
Adding PPP Link Data (Initial)
This describes how to add PPP data. This task is optional when the NodeB uses the E1/T1 cables.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l Local IP addresses of various PPP links cannot be on the same network segment.
l Local IP addresses of the PPP link, the MLPPP group, and the PPPoE link cannot be on the samenetwork segment.
l One E1/T1 port can be configured with multiple PPP links and MLPPP links if the timeslots occupiedby the links do not conflict.
Prerequisitel The macro NodeB is configured with the NUTI board, and the bearer type of the NUTI is
set to IPV4. For details, refer to 6.2.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack(Initial)
l The distributed NodeB is configured with the BBU, and the bearer type of the BBU is setto IPV4. For details, refer to 6.4.2 Adding a BBU (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-54 Negotiation and planned data of the ppp links
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Slot No. SlotNo Number of the slot that holds theNUTIValue range: 12 through 15
13Internalplanning
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-170 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Port No. PortNo Number of the E1/T1 ports for PPPlinksValue range: 0 through 7
0
Linknumber
LinkNo Each PPP link and each MLPPP linkmust have a unique number.Value range: 0 through 15
0
Authentication type
AuthType Optional parameters:l NONAUTH (without
authentication)l PAP (with PAP authentication)
l CHAP (with CHAPauthentication)
NONAUTH
User name UserName When AuthType is not set toNONAUTH, this field is mandatory,otherwise, the authentication fails.Value range: not greater than 64characters
-
Timeslotmap
TSBitMap A map of the timeslots for PPP links.The map is presented in binaryformat or the chart. If a timeslot isselected, it is in use. Otherwise, it isnot in use.
TS1 toTS15
Negotiation withthedestination
Local IPaddress
LocalIP Local IP address of the PPP link.When the value is 0.0.0.0, it indicatesthat the parameter needs to benegotiated with the RNC.
17.17.17.111
Destination IPaddress
PeerIP Destination IP address of the PPPlinkl In cascading mode, this parameter
specifies the IP address of a lower-level cascaded node.
l In non-cascading mode, when thevalue is 0, it indicates that theparameter needs to be negotiatedwith an upper-level node.
17.17.17.17
IP headercompression
IPHC Optional parameters:l DISABLE: The IP header of the
peer end is not compressed.l ENABLE: The UDP/IP header of
the peer end is compressed.
ENABLE
Internalplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-171
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
PPPmultiframemultiplexing
PPPMux Optional parameters:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
DISABLE
Maximumreceivedunit
MRU Expected value sent from the peerendValue range: 128 through 1500
1500
Restarttimer ofpacketrequestresponse
RestartTimer Value range: 1 through 65535 3000
Protocolfieldcompress
PFC Optional parameters:l ENABLE
l DISABLE
ENABLE
Address &controlfieldcompress
ACFC Optional parameters:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
ENABLE
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-172 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch Optional parameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based
on the configured Iub bandwidthand the bandwidth occupied byR99 users, traffic is allocated toHSDPA users when the physicalbandwidth restriction is taken intoaccount.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL: According to the flow control ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, trafficis allocated to HSDPA users whenthe delay and packet loss on theIub interface are taken intoaccount. The RNC uses the R6switch to perform this function. Itis recommended that the RNC beused in compliance with the R6protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. TheRNC allocates the bandwidthaccording to the bandwidth on theUu interface reported by theNodeB. To perform this function,the reverse flow control switchmust be enabled by the RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Time delaythreshold
HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower thanthis threshold, you can infer that thelink is not congested.Value range: 0 through 20
4
Discardratethreshold
HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frameloss ratio is not higher than thisthreshold.Value range: 0 through 1000
1
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-173
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click IPPort, and then click the PPP tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-56.
Figure 6-56 Adding a PPP link
Step 5 Select SubrackNo, and click . The Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed. Select an E1/T1 port, and click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window.
Step 6 Select TSBitMap, and then click . The TimeSlot Select dialog box is displayed. Select thetimeslot to be used, and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window.
NOTE
The CME automatically filters the timeslot that is already occupied or reserved on the same E1/T1 port.The available timeslots appear yellow. The used timeslots appear dark green.
Step 7 Select LocalIP , and click , the LocalIP & LocalMask dialog box is displayed. Set the localIP address and mask for the PPP link, and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP TransportLayer window.
Step 8 Select PeerIP, and click , the PeerIP dialog box is displayed. Set the local IP address andmask for the PPP link, and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-174 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Step 9 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add a PPP link.
----End
Adding MLPPP Data (Initial)This describes how to add PPP data. This task is optional when the NodeB uses the E1/T1 cables.The MLPPP group combines multiple PPP links into a logical link.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l Local IP addresses of various MLPPP groups cannot be on the same network segment.
l Local IP addresses of the PPP link, the MLPPP group, and the PPPoE link cannot be on the samenetwork segment.
l One E1/T1 port can be configured with multiple PPP links and MLPPP links if the timeslots occupiedby the links do not conflict.
l Each Iub interface board or BBU can be configured with a maximum of four MLPPP groups, and eachMLPPP group can be configured with a maximum of 16 MLPPP links.
Prerequisitel The macro NodeB is configured with the NUTI board, and the bearer type of the NUTI is
set to IPV4. For details, refer to 6.2.2 Adding the Boards in the Baseband Subrack(Initial)
l The distributed NodeB is configured with the BBU, and the bearer type of the BBU is setto IPV4. For details, refer to 6.4.2 Adding a BBU (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-55 Negotiation and planned data of the MLPPP group and MLPPP links
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
Slot No. SlotNo Number of the slot that holds theNUTIValue range: 12 through 15
13
Internalplanning
MLPPPgroupnumber
GroupNo MLPPP group numberValue range: 0 through 3
0
Authentication type
AuthType Optional parameters:l NONAUTH (without
authentication)l PAP (with PAP authentication)
l CHAP (with CHAP authentication)
NONAUTH
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-175
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
User name UserName When AuthType is not set toNONAUTH, this field is mandatory,otherwise, the authentication fails.Value range: not greater than 64characters
-
Local IPaddress
LocalIP Local IP address of the MLPPP group 16.16.16.111
Negotiation withthedestination
Localsubnetmask
LocalMask Subnet mask of the local IP address forthe MLPPP group
255.255.255.0
Destination IPaddress
PeerIP Peer IP address of the MLPPP group 16.16.16.16
Port No. PortNo Number of the E1/T1 ports forMLPPP linksValue range: 0 through 7
0
Internalplanning
Linknumber
LinkNo Number of the MLPPP link that joinsthe MLPPP group. Each MLPPP andeach PPP link must have a uniquenumber.Value range: 0 through 15
1
Timeslotmap
TSBitMap A map of the timeslots for MLPPPlinks. The map is presented in binaryformat or the chart. If a timeslot isselected, it is in use. Otherwise, it isnot in use.
TS24 toTS31
Negotiation withthedestination
IP headercompression
IPHC Optional parameters:l DISABLE: The IP header of the
peer end is not compressed.l ENABLE: The UDP/IP header of
the peer end is compressed.
ENABLE
Internalplanning
PPPmultiframemultiplexing
PPPMux Optional parameters:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
DISABLE
Multi-classPPP
MCPPP Optional parameters:l ENABLE (using the MCPPP)
l DISABLE (not using the MCPPP)
ENABLE
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-176 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
Maximumreceivedunit
MRU Expected value sent from the peer endValue range: 128 through 1500
1500
Restarttimer ofpacketrequestresponse
RestartTimer Value range: 1 through 65535 3000
Protocolfieldcompress
PFC Optional parameters:l ENABLE
l DISABLE
ENABLE
Address &controlfieldcompress
ACFC Optional parameters:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
ENABLE
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch Optional parameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on
the configured Iub bandwidth andthe bandwidth occupied by R99users, traffic is allocated to HSDPAusers when the physical bandwidthrestriction is taken into account.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL:According to the flow control ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, traffic isallocated to HSDPA users when thedelay and packet loss on the Iubinterface are taken into account.The RNC uses the R6 switch toperform this function. It isrecommended that the RNC be usedin compliance with the R6 protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. TheRNC allocates the bandwidthaccording to the bandwidth on theUu interface reported by theNodeB. To perform this function,the reverse flow control switchmust be enabled by the RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-177
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
Time delaythreshold
HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than thisthreshold, you can infer that the link isnot congested.Value range: 0 through 20
4
Discardratethreshold
HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frameloss ratio is not higher than thisthreshold.Value range: 0 through 1000
1
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click IPPort, and then click the MP tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-57.
Figure 6-57 Adding the MLPPP group and the MLPPP link
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-178 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 6-56 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configuration area of the MLPPP group
2 Configuration area of the MLPPP links
Step 5 In area 1, select SubrackNo, and click . The Search Iub Board window is displayed, asshown in Figure 6-58. Select an interface board, and click OK to return to the NodeB IPTransport Layer window.
Figure 6-58 Search Iub Board window
NOTE
In the Search Iub Board window, the NUTIs configured to slots 12 and 13 are displayed.
Step 6 Select LocalIP , and click , the LocalIP & LocalMask dialog box is displayed. Set the localIP address and mask for the MLPPP group, and then click OK to return to the NodeB IPTransport Layer window.
Step 7 Select PeerIP, and click , the PeerIP dialog box is displayed. Set the local IP address andmask for the MLPPP group, and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layerwindow.
Step 8 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add an MLPPPgroup.
Step 9 In area 2, select SubrackNo, and click . The Search E1/T1 Port window is displayed. Selectan E1/T1 port, and click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window.
Step 10 Select TSBitMap, and then click . The TimeSlot Select dialog box is displayed. Select thetimeslot to be used, and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-179
NOTE
The CME automatically filters the timeslot that is already occupied or reserved on the same E1/T1 port.The available timeslots appear yellow. The used timeslots appear dark green.
Step 11 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add an MLPPPlink.
----End
Adding PPPoE Data (Initial)This describes how to add PPPoE data when multiple NodeBs connect to the RNC through theAccess Concentration (AC) in PPP over Ethernet network topology.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l Local IP addresses of various PPPoE links cannot be on the same network segment.
l Local IP addresses of the PPP link, the MLPPP group, and the PPPoE link cannot be on the samenetwork segment.
l The PPPoE links are configured to FE port 0 or 1 on the NUTI boards of slots 12 through 15.
l The PPPoE link and the ETH link can use the same FE port.
Prerequisitel The NUTI of the Macro NodeB is configured, as described in 6.2.2 Adding the Boards in
the Baseband Subrack (Initial).l The BBU of the distributed NodeB is configured, as described in 6.4.2 Adding a BBU
(Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-57 Negotiation and planned data of the PPPoE links
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Slot No. SlotNo Number of the slot that holds the NUTIValue range: 12 through 15
13
InternalplanningPort No. PortNo Number of the FE port for the PPPoE
linkValue range: 0 through 1
0
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-180 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Authentication type
AuthType Optional parameters:l NONAUTH (without authentication)
l PAP (with PAP authentication)
l CHAP (with CHAP authentication)
NONAUTH
User name UserName This parameter is valid only whenAuthType is set to PAP or CHAP.Value range: not greater than 64characters
-
Local IPaddress
LocalIP Local IP address of the PPPoE link 12.3.0.1 Negotiation withthedestination
Localsubnetmask
LocalMask Subnet mask of the local IP address 255.255.255.0
IP headercompression
IPHC Optional parameters:l DISABLE: The IP header of the peer
end is not compressed.l ENABLE: The UDP/IP header of the
peer end is compressed.
ENABLE
Internalplanning
Maximumreceivedunit
MRU Expected value sent from the peer endValue range: 128 through 1500
1450
Restarttimer ofpacketrequestresponse
RestartTimer
Value range: 1 through 65535 3000
PPPmultiframemultiplexing
PPPMux Optional parameters:
l ENABLE
l DISABLE
DISABLE
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-181
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
HSDPAswitch
HsdpaSwitch
Optional parameters:l SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL: Based on
the configured Iub bandwidth and thebandwidth occupied by R99 users,traffic is allocated to HSDPA userswhen the physical bandwidthrestriction is taken into account.
l AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL:According to the flow control ofSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, traffic isallocated to HSDPA users when thedelay and packet loss on the Iubinterface are taken into account. TheRNC uses the R6 switch to performthis function. It is recommended thatthe RNC be used in compliance withthe R6 protocol.
l NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeBdoes not allocate bandwidthaccording to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. The RNCallocates the bandwidth according tothe bandwidth on the Uu interfacereported by the NodeB. To performthis function, the reverse flow controlswitch must be enabled by the RNC.
AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL
Time delaythreshold
HsdpaTD When the time delay is lower than thisthreshold, you can infer that the link isnot congested.Value range: 0 through 20
4
Discardratethreshold
HsdpaDR The link is not congested when frameloss ratio is not higher than thisthreshold.Value range: 0 through 1000
1
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-182 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click IPPort, and then click the PPPoE tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure6-59.
Figure 6-59 Adding a PPPoE link
Step 5 Select SubrackNo, and click . The Search Ethernet Port window is displayed. Select anFE port, and click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window.
Step 6 Select LocalIP , and click , the LocalIP & LocalMask dialog box is displayed. Set the localIP address and mask for the PPPoE link, and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP TransportLayer window.
Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add a PPPoE link.
----End
Adding DEVIP Data (Initial)This describes how to add the device IP address to the IP port. The IP ports can be any of thefollowing types: PPP, MLPPP, or Ethernet.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-183
NOTE
l The four IP port types are: ETH, PPP, MLPPP, and PPPoE.
l A maximum of four IP addresses can be added to one IP port.
l IP addresses for different ports cannot be on the same network segment; IP addresses for the same portcan be on the same network segment.
Prerequisitel The NUTI of the Macro NodeB is configured, as described in 6.2.2 Adding the Boards in
the Baseband Subrack (Initial).
l The BBU of the distributed NodeB is configured, as described in 6.4.2 Adding a BBU(Initial).
l The PPP link, MLPPP group, and the PPPoE link are configured. For details, refer to 6.6.1Adding a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-58 Negotiation and planned data of the DEVIP
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Slot No. SlotNo Number of the slot that holds the NUTIValue range: 12 through 15
13
Internalplanning
Port No. PortNo l For the PPP link, the MLPPP group,and the PPPoE link, PortNorepresents the port number for theconfigured PPP link, the MLPPPgroup, and the PPPoE link.
l For the ETH link, the port valueranges from 0 to 1.
0
Port type PortType The port types consist of the followingitems:l ETH: indicates the available FE port
on the NUTI.l MLPPP: indicates the configured
MLPPP group.l PPP: indicates the configured PPP
link.l PPPoE: indicates the configured
PPPoE link.
ETH
Local IPaddress
LocalIP Local IP address of the device IP 12.11.12.12
Negotiation withthedestination
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-184 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example
Source
Subnetmask of thelocal IPaddress
LocalMask If the network is not divided intosubnets, use the default mask.
255.255.255.0
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click IPPort, and then click the DEVIP tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure6-60.
Figure 6-60 Configuring the DEVIP
Table 6-59 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configuration area for the device IP address
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-185
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
2 Configuration area for the VLAN service priority
Step 5 In area 1, select SubrackNo, and click . The Search Ethernet Port window is displayed.Select an IP port, and click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window.
Step 6 Select LocalIP , and click , the LocalIP & LocalMask dialog box is displayed. Set the localIP address and mask for the device, and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP TransportLayer window.
Step 7 Click to add the device IP address.
Step 8 (Optional) In area 2, select TrafficType, and click . Then, Set VLAN service priority
mapping according to the actual network planning. Click to save the settings.
----End
Adding a Timeslot Cross Channel (Initial, over ATM)This describes how to add a timeslot cross channel for the 2G equipment so as to transmit thedata of services on the 3G network.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l The timeslot cross channel can be configured on only the E1/T1 port 2 through 3 on the baseboards inslots 12 through 15.
l No IMA or UNI links can be added to the source E1/T1 link where the timeslots cross channel isconfigured.
l The source and destination ports of the timeslot cross channel must be different, and the same E1/T1port cannot be repeatedly used.
l When both E1/T1 2 and 3 use the timeslot cross channel, the timeslots of both links do not conflict.That is, the fractional ATM link timeslot that is configured to E1/T1 0 cannot conflict with the fractionalATM link timeslot that is configured to either E1/T1 2 or 3.
PrerequisiteThe negotiation and planned data is ready.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-186 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Preparation
Table 6-60 Negotiation and planned data of the timeslot cross links
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Source slotNo.
SlotNo Number of the slot that holdsthe NDTI or NUTIValue range: 12 through 15
13
Internalplanning
Sourceport No.
PortNo Number of the source E1/T1ports for timeslot cross linksValue range: 2 through 3
3
Sourcetimeslots
TSBitMap Value range: TS1 to TS31 TS16 to TS23
Destination slot No.
DestSlotNo
Number of the slot that holdsthe NDTI or NUTI (Thenumber must be identicalwith that of the SlotNo)Value range: 12 through 15
13
Destination port No.
DestPortNo
Number of the destinationE1/T1 ports for timeslotcross linksValue range: 0
0
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB ATM Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click Network, and then click the TSCross tab. The tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure6-61.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-187
Figure 6-61 Configuring the timeslot cross channel
Table 6-61 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Area for the destination port
2 Configuration area of the timeslot cross channel
Step 5 In area 1, select a destination port; In area 2, select TScrossNo, and then click , the SearchE1/T1 Port window is displayed. Select an E1/T1 port, and click OK to return to the NodeBATM Transport Layer window.
Step 6 Select TSBitMap, and then click . The TimeSlot Select dialog box is displayed. Select thetimeslot to be used, and then click OK to return to the NodeB ATM Transport Layer window.
NOTE
The CME automatically filters the timeslot that is already occupied or reserved on the same E1/T1 port.The available timeslots appear yellow. The used timeslots appear dark green.
Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add a timeslotcross channel.
----End
6.6.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial)This describes how to add an IP route for transmitting the NodeB IP data of the transmissioncontrol plane, the user plane, and the management plane.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-188 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
PrerequisiteThe physical links at the IP transport layer are configured. For details, refer to 6.6.1 Adding aLink at the Data Link Layer (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-62 Negotiation and planned data of the IP route
InputData
Field Name Description Example
Source
Port type ItfType Interface type of the route Optionalparameters:l ETH
l MLPPP
l PPP
l PPPoE
ETH
Networkplanning
Destination network
DestNet This parameter must meet all thefollowing requirements: Validnetwork address, except the defaultroute 0.0.0.0 IP AND mask must beequal to the IP address.
17.18.17.0
Destination mask
DestMask This parameter must meet all thefollowing requirements: IP ANDmask must be equal to the IP address.If the mask is converted into binaryvalue, 0 is not allowed to precede 1.
255.255.255.0
Next hopIP address
NextHop This parameter is valid only when theparameter InsertFlag is set to ETH.This parameter meets the followingrequirements:l Stays on the same network segment
as the LocalIP of the bearer link.l Has valid IP address of classes A,
B, and C.l The value cannot be
255.255.255.255.
12.11.12.1
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-189
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click IPRoute, as shown in Figure 6-62.
Figure 6-62 Adding an IP route
Table 6-63 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Physical link list of the configured IP transport layer
2 Configuration area of the IP route on the control plane, the userplane, and the management plane
Step 5 In area 1, select a physical bearer link; In area 2, select DestNet and then click , the DestNet& DestMask dialog box is displayed. Set the IP address and the mask for the destination network,and then click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-190 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
NOTE
l DestNet is the IP address of the destination network. Destination IP address AND subnet mask is theIP address of the destination network, that is DestIP & DestMask = DestNet.
l In area 1, select the physical link, that is, the out port of the route is determined.
Step 6 Select NextHop, and click , the NextHop dialog box is displayed. Set the IP address of thenext hop, and return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window.
NOTE
If the Iub interface is in layer 3 networking, the next hop IP address is the IP address of the router connectingto the NodeB, or the IP address of the port on the layer 3 switch connecting to the NodeB.
----End
6.6.3 Adding SCTP Links (Initial)This describes how to add SCTP links. The SCTP links are used to carry the IPCP, that is, theNBAP at the IP transport layer.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NOTE
A complete piece of information of an SCTP link contains the local IP address, the peer IP address, thelocal IP address of the second SCTP link, the peer IP address of the second SCTP link, the port number ofthe local SCTP link, and the port number of the peer SCTP link. The two SCTP links must be different incontent.
Prerequisitel The physical links at the IP transport layer are configured. For details, refer to 6.6.1 Adding
a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial).l The route to the destination IP address is configured. For details, refer to 6.6.2 Adding an
IP Route (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-64 Negotiation and planned data of the SCTP links
Input Data FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type ItfType Type of the interface that carries theSCTP links Optional parameters:l ETH
l MLPPP
l PPP
l PPPoE
PPP Internalplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-191
Input Data FieldName
Description Example Source
Local IPaddress
LocalIP At the NodeB, the IP address of theprimary physical link that carries theSCTP link.
17.17.17.111
Negotiation with thedestination
DestinationIP address
DestIP At the RNC, the IP address of theprimary physical link that carries theSCTP link.
14.1.1.4
The secondlocal IPaddress
SecLocalIP At the NodeB, the IP address of thestandby physical link that carries theSCTP link.The IP address 0.0.0.0 indicates thatthis address is not in use.
0.0.0.0
The seconddestinationIP address
SecDestIP At the RNC, the IP address of thestandby physical link that carries theSCTP link.The IP address 0.0.0.0 indicates thatthis address is not in use.
0.0.0.0
Local portnumber anddestinationport number
LocalPort Local port number of the SCTPValue range: 1024 through 65535
1024
Destinationport number
DestPort Destination port number of the SCTPValue range: 1024 through 65535
8021
Automatically switchesback to themaster IPaddress
IPAutoChange
After the fault of the master IPaddress is rectified, the services canbe automatically switched back tothe master IP address. Optionalparameters:l ENABLE
l DISABLE
ENABLE Internalplanning
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-192 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click SCTP, as shown in Figure 6-63.
Figure 6-63 Adding an SCTP link
Table 6-65 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configuration area for the SCTP links
2 Physical link list of the configured IP transport layer
3 Configured SCTP route list
Step 5 In area 1, click SCTPNo, and click .
Step 6 Select DestIP, and click . The Destination IP Address & Local IP Interface window isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 6-64. In area 1, select the network segment route, and set the peerIP address of the SCTP link in the upper middle part of the window. Click OK to return to theNodeB IP Transport Layer window.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-193
Figure 6-64 Configuring the destination IP address of the SCTP link
Table 6-66 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configuration area for the destination IP address of the SCTP
2 Physical link list at the IP transport layer
NOTE
l The local IP address of the SCTP link is the local IP address in area 1 of Figure 6-64. The peer IPaddress of the SCTP link is on the same network segment with DestNet.
l After the data link layer is configured, the CME automatically adds the network segment route that ison the same network segment as the local IP address of the data link. That is, the IP address of thedestination network and the local IP address of the data link are on the same network segment. Fordetails, refer to area 1 in Figure 6-64. (DestNet and LocalIP use the route of the same networksegment.)
l After the route is determined, the CME automatically traces route related physical link. As shown inarea 2 of Figure 6-64, this physical link cannot be changed.
Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add an SCTP link.
NOTE
Select the configured SCTP link, and the CME automatically traces the SCTP physical link and its relatedSCTP route, as shown in area 2 and 3 of Figure 6-63.
----End
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-194 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
6.6.4 Adding an IPCP (Initial)This describes how to configure the NodeB Control Port (NCP) and Communication ControlPort (CCP). These two ports are carried on the SCTP links.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NOTE
l One NodeB can be configured with the active and the standby NCPs or CCPs.
l Each SCTP link can be configured with only one NCP or CCP.
l The active and the standby NCPs or CCPs should be configured on different links. For example, if theactive one is configured on the SAAL, the standby one should be configured on the SCTP. Otherwisethe configuration is invalid.
PrerequisiteThe SCTP links are configured, as described in 6.6.3 Adding SCTP Links (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-67 Negotiation and planned data of the IPCP
Input Data FieldName
Description Example
Source
NCP
Port type PortType Optional parameters:l NCP
l CCP
NCP Internalplanning
SCTPnumber
SCTPNo SCTP number that carries theNCPValue range: 0 through 19
1 Negotiation withthedestination
Flag Flag Master/slave flag for thetransmission channels Optionalparameters:l SLAVE
l MASTER
MASTER
Internalplanning
CCP
Port type PortType Optional parameters:l NCP
l CCP
CCP Internalplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-195
Input Data FieldName
Description Example
Source
Port No. PortNo Number of the CCP port. Thisparameter is valid only whenPortType is set to CCP.Value range: 0 through 65535
0
Negotiation withthedestination
SCTPnumber
SCTPNo SCTP number that carries theCCPValue range: 0 through 19
2
Flag Flag Master/slave flag for thetransmission channels Optionalparameters:l SLAVE
l MASTER
MASTER
Internalplanning
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click IPCP, as shown in Figure 6-65.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-196 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-65 Configuring the NCP and the CCP
Table 6-68 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configured SCTP link list
2 Configuration area for the IPCP links (NCP, CCP)
Step 5 In area 1, select an SCTP link; in area 2, select PortType and then click . Configure related
parameters based on prepared data, and then click to add an NCP link.
Step 6 In area 1, select an SCTP link; in area 2, select PortType and then click . Configure related
parameters based on prepared data, and then click to add an CCP link.
----End
6.6.5 Adding Transmission Resource Group (Initial, over IP)This describes how to add the transmission resource group, which is used to allocates thebandwidth of the physical link to the transmission resource group for carrying the UE data. Eachresource group has its separate access control, congestion control, and HSPA flow control.
Scenario NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
Mandatory/Optional
Optional. This configuration is required when the IP path joins the transmissionresource group.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-197
NOTE
l Each physical link can be configured with a maximum of four transmission groups, that is, the totalnumber of transmission groups over ATM and IP.
l Each Iub interface board or BBU supports a maximum of 16 transmission resource groups over ATMor 8 transmission resource groups over IP.
l The transmit bandwidth of the transmission resource group should be not greater than the idlebandwidth at the physical links.
PrerequisiteThe physical links at the IP transport layer are configured. For details, refer to 6.6.1 Adding aLink at the Data Link Layer (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-69 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group (over IP)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type ItfType Type of the interface that carries the IPtransmission resource group Optionalparameters:l ETH
l MLPPP
l PPP
l PPPoE
ETH
Internalplanning
Resourcegroupnumber
RscgrpNo Value range: 0 through 3 0
Transmitbandwidth
TxBandwidth
The transmit bandwidth of theresource group cannot exceed thebandwidth of the port to which theresource group belong.l When the port type is ETH, the
value range is 8 through 100000.l When the port type is MLPPP, the
value range is 8 through 31744.l When the port type is PPP, the value
range is 8 through 1984.l When the port type is PPPoE, the
value range is 8 through 100000.
10000
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-198 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Receivebandwidth
RxBandwidth
Receive bandwidth of the resourcegroup.l When the port type is ETH, the
value range is 8 through 100000.l When the port type is MLPPP, the
value range is 8 through 31744.l When the port type is PPP, the value
range is 8 through 1984.l When the port type is PPPoE, the
value range is 8 through 100000.
10000
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click RSCGroup, as shown in Figure 6-66.
Figure 6-66 Adding the IP transmission resource group
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-199
Table 6-70 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Physical link list of the configured IP transport layer
2 Configuration area for the transmission resource group
Step 5 In area 1, select a physical bearer link; In area 2, select RscgrpNo and then click .
Step 6 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add a transmissionresource group over IP.
----End
6.6.6 Adding IP Path Data (Initial)This describes how to add an IP PATH for transmitting the user plane data.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NOTE
l One Iub interface board can be configured with a maximum of 16 IP paths.
l Each NodeB can be configured with a maximum of 32 IP paths. The total number the configured IPpaths and AAL2 paths of the HSPA type cannot exceed 16.
l The destination IP addresses for the IP PATH configured at the same transport layer link must be thesame.
l The values of the parameters DSCP and TrafficType configured for the IP path in the same transportlayer link must differ.
l If an IP link is configured with a transmission resource group, all IP path links configured at this IPlink must join the transmission resource group of the IP link.
l If a physical port is configured with AAL2 paths or IP paths, and the links are not in a resource group.No transmission resource group can be added to this physical port.
Prerequisitel The IP routes to destination addresses are configured, as described in 6.6.2 Adding an IP
Route (Initial).l The transmission resource group is configured, refer to 6.6.5 Adding Transmission
Resource Group (Initial, over IP).
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-200 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Preparation
Table 6-71 Negotiation and planned data of the IP PATH
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Port type ItfType Type of the interface that carries theIP PATH Optional parameters:l ETH
l MLPPP
l PPP
l PPPoE
ETH Internalplanning
Destination IPaddress
DestIP Destination IP address of the IP path 17.18.17.121
Negotiation withthedestination
DSCPpriority
DSCP Value range: 0 through 63 60 Networkplanning
Servicetype
TrafficType Optional parameters:l RT
l NRT
l HSPA_RT
l HSPA_NRT
RT
Negotiation withthedestination
Receivebandwidth
RxBandwith When PATH joins the resourcegroup, the receive bandwidth doesnot exceed the bandwidth of theresource group; when PATH doesnot join the resource group, thereceive bandwidth doe not exceed thebandwidth of the physical port.l When the port type is PPP, the
value range is 8 through 1984.l When the port type is PPPoE, the
value range is 8 through 100000.l When the port type is MLPPP, the
value range is 8 through 31744.l When the port type is ETH, the
value range is 8 through 100000.
1000
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-201
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Transmitbandwidth
TxBandwith When PATH joins the resourcegroup, the receive bandwidth doesnot exceed the bandwidth of theresource group; when PATH doesnot join the resource group, thereceive bandwidth doe not exceed thebandwidth of the physical port.l When the port type is PPP, the
value range is 8 through 1984.l When the port type is PPPoE, the
value range is 8 through 100000.l When the port type is MLPPP, the
value range is 8 through 31744.l When the port type is ETH, the
value range is 8 through 100000.
1000
Transmitcommittedburst size
TxCBS Value range: 15000 to 155000000.The recommended value is 1/2 of thetransmit bandwidth.Unit: bit
500000
Internalplanning
Transmitexcessiveburst size
TxEBS Value range: 0 through 155000000Unit: bit
1000000
Path check PathCheck Optional parameters:l ENABLE: Path check is enabled.
l DISABLE: Path check is disabled.
DISABLE
Join theresourcegroup
JoinRscgrp Specify whether the IP PATH shouldbe added to the resource group.Optional parameters:l DISABLE
l ENABLE
ENABLE
Resourcegroupnumber
RscgrpNo Number of the IP transmissionresource groupValue range: 0 through 3
0
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-202 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click IPPath, as shown in Figure 6-67.
Figure 6-67 Configuring the IP PATH
Table 6-72 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configuration area for the IP path
2 Physical link list of the configured IP transport layer
3 Transmission resource group carried on the corresponding physicallink
4 Configured IP path route list
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-203
Step 5 In area 1, click PathId, and click .
Step 6 Select DestIP, and click . The Destination IP window is displayed, as shown in Figure6-68. In area 1, select the network segment route, and set the peer IP address of the IP path inthe upper middle part of the window. Click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layerwindow.
Figure 6-68 Configuring the destination IP address of the IP PATH
Table 6-73 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configuration area for the destination IP address of the IP PATH
2 Physical link list at the IP transport layer
NOTE
l The local IP address of the IP PATH is the local IP address in area 1 of Figure 6-68. The peer IP addressof the IP PATH is on the same network segment with DestNet.
l After the data link layer is configured, the CME automatically adds the network segment route that ison the same network segment as the local IP address of the data link. That is, the IP address of thedestination network and the local IP address of the data link are on the same network segment. Fordetails, refer to area 1 in Figure 6-68. (DestNet and LocalIP use the route of the same networksegment.)
l After the route is determined, the CME automatically traces route related IP transmission resourcegroup. As shown in area 2 of Figure 6-68, this IP transmission resource group cannot be changed.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-204 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Step 7 (Optional) Set JoinRscgrp to ENABLE. Select RscgrpNo, and click , the Search ResourceGroup window is displayed. Select a transmission resource group, and click OK to return tothe NodeB IP Transport Layer window.
NOTE
The physical bearer type of the resource group is identical with that of the IP path. Figure 6-67 and Table6-72 show the matching relation.
Step 8 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add an IP path.
NOTE
Select the configured IP path, and then the CME automatically traces the related IP transmission resourcegroup and the IP path route, as shown in areas 3 and 4 of Figure 6-67.
----End
6.6.7 Adding an OMCH of the NodeB (Initial, over IP)This describes how to configure an OMCH of the NodeB in IP transport mode.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NOTE
l A maximum of two OMCH channels are added, that is, the master and the slave channels. You canalso configure only one OMCH channel. If it acts as the master channel, the data takes effect; if it actsas the slave channel, the data will not take effect.
l Local IP addresses of two OMCH channels cannot be on the same network segment.
Prerequisitel The physical links at the IP transport layer are configured. For details, refer to 6.6.1 Adding
a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial).l The IP routes to destination addresses are configured, as described in 6.6.2 Adding an IP
Route (Initial).
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-205
Preparation
Table 6-74 Negotiation and planned data of the OMCH (IP)
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Bind theroute
BindRouteValid
Determine whether to bind the route.Route binding is necessary when thepeer IP address of the OMCH is ondifferent network segments from theDestNet in the 6.6.2 Adding an IPRoute (Initial). Optional parameters:l NO
l YES
YES
Negotiation withthedestination
Port type ItfType Type of the interface that carries thebound routes Optional parameters:l ETH
l MLPPP
l PPP
l PPPoE
ETH
Bound IPaddress onthedestinationnetwork
BindDestIP This parameter is valid only when theparameter BindRouteValid is set toYES.
11.11.10.0
Bounddestinationmask
BindDestIPMask
This parameter is valid only when theparameter BindRouteValid is set toYES.
255.255.255.0
Bound nexthop IPaddress
NextHop This parameter is valid only when theport type is ETH.
12.11.12.1
Local IPaddress
LocalIP IP address at the NodeB for the OMCH 11.11.12.12
Localsubnetmask
Mask Mask of the IP address at the NodeBfor the OMCH
255.255.0.0
Destination IPaddress
DestIP Destination IP address of the OMCH,that is, the IP address of the LMT or theM2000.
11.11.11.12
Flag Flag Optional parameters:l MASTER (primary mode)
l SLAVE (secondary mode)
MASTER Internal
planning
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-206 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click OMCH, as shown in Figure 6-69.
Figure 6-69 Adding an OMCH
Table 6-75 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 OMCH configuration area
2 Type of the interface that carries the bound routes
3 Configured OMCH route list
Step 5 (Optional) Set the parameter BandRouteValid to YES. Then, select the parameterBandDestIP and click , the BandDestIP & BandDestIPMask dialog box is displayed. Set
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-207
the IP address and the mask for the binding destination network of the OMCH, and then clickOK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window.
NOTE
l The destination network segment of the binding route must differ from the network segment of theDestNet in 6.6.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial).
l The destination IP address of the OMCH can use the network segment where the binding route islocated.
Step 6 In area 1, select LocalIP, and click , the LocalIP & Mask dialog box is displayed. Set thelocal IP address and the mask for the OMCH, and then click OK to return to the NodeB IPTransport Layer window.
Step 7 Select DestIP, and click . The Destination IP Address window is displayed, as shown inFigure 6-70. Select the network segment route, and set the peer IP address of the IP OMCH inthe upper middle part of the window. Click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layerwindow.
Figure 6-70 Adding a destination IP address of the OMCH
NOTE
l If the BandRouteValid is set to YES(the route is bound), the CME system automatically generatesthe route to the bound destination network. For instance, the network IP address of Figure 6-70 is11.11.10.0, and the interface type is ETH.
l The destination IP address of the OMCH can be either on the same network segment as the DestNetin 6.6.2 Adding an IP Route (Initial), or on the same network segment as the BandDestIP.
Step 8 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add an OMCHlink.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-208 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
NOTE
Select the configured OMCH, the CME automatically traces the related OMCH route, as shown in area 3of Figure 6-69.
----End
6.6.8 Adding A Bound Destination Network Segment to theTransmission Resource Group (Initial, IP)
This describes how to add a bound destination network segment to the transmission resourcegroup. All data to the subnet from the port of the transmission resource group will be calculatedin the transmission resource group.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional. This configuration is required when the SCTP link or the OMCH linkjoins the transmission resource group.
NOTE
l Two transmission resource groups of the same physical port cannot be bound to the same destinationnetwork segment.
l The transmission resource group (IP as the bearer mode) to which the bound destination networksegment is added is already configured. Otherwise, the binding fails to proceed.
Prerequisite
The IP transmission resource group is configured, refer to 6.6.5 Adding TransmissionResource Group (Initial, over IP).
Preparation
Table 6-76 Negotiation and planned data of the transmission resource group whose destinationIP network segment is bound
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type ItfType Type of the interface that carries theresource group Optional parameters:l ETH
l MLPPP
l PPP
l PPPoE
ETH
Internalplanning
Resourcegroupnumber
RscgrpNo Number of the IP transmission resourcegroup that corresponds to the physicalbearer portValue range: 0 through 3
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-209
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Destination IPaddress
DestIP Bound destination IP address, that is,the IP address on the same networksegment with BindDestIP in 6.6.7Adding an OMCH of the NodeB(Initial, over IP) or the destination IPaddress of the SCTP link of 6.6.3Adding SCTP Links (Initial).
11.11.10.10
Destination mask
IPMask Bound destination mask 255.255.255.255
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click IP2RSCGroup, as shown in Figure 6-71.
Figure 6-71 Adding a bound destination network segment to the transmission resource group(initial, over IP)
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-210 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 6-77 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence ofdataconfiguration
Description
1 Configured IP transmission resource group
2 Configured route mapping the IP transmission resource group
3 Configuration area for adding a bound destination network segment to thetransmission resource group
Step 5 In area 1, select an IP transmission resource group; in area 2, select the IP address of the bounddestination network.
Step 6 In area 3, click SubrackNo, and click . Select DestIP, and click . The DestIP &Mask dialog box is displayed. To add a destination IP address, click OK to return to the NodeBIP Transport Layer window.
NOTE
l DestIP & DestMask = DestNet & DestMask; DestIP & IPMask = DestIP.
l If the SCTP link joins the resource group, the DestIP is the destination IP address of the SCTP link.
l If the OMCH link joins the resource group, the DestIP is the bound destination IP address of the OMCHlink. (The bound destination IP address and BindDestIP are on the same network segment).
Step 7 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data. Click to add a bound destinationnetwork segment to the transmission resource group.
----End
6.6.9 Adding IP Clock Links (Initial)This describe how to add IP clock links. The NodeB can obtain the clock signals from the clockserver through the IP link.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
CAUTIONl The timeslot cross channel over IP cannot be configured to the NUTI that uses the parameter
IPClockSwitch.
l When the IP clock link is added, you need to set the current ClockSource (clock resourcetype) to the IP (IP clock resource) mode before the NodeB is used by the IP clock. For details,refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-211
Prerequisitel The parameter IPClockSwitch on the NUTI is enabled. For details, refer to 6.2.2 Adding
the Boards in the Baseband Subrack (Initial).l The physical links at the IP transport layer are configured. For details, refer to 6.6.1 Adding
a Link at the Data Link Layer (Initial).l The IP routes to the server are configured, as described in 6.6.2 Adding an IP Route
(Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-78 Negotiation and planned data of the IP clock links
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Port type ItfType Type of the interface that carries the IPclock links Optional parameters:l ETH
l MLPPP
l PPP
l PPPoE
PPPoE Internalplanning
IP addressat the client
ClientIP Obtain the NodeB IP address of the IPclock
12.3.0.1
Networkplanning
IP addressat theserver
ServerIP IP address at the IP clock server 12.3.0.10
Priority Priority The clock links that has the highestpriority is used first. The number is ina negative relation with the prioritylevel.Value range: 0 through 1
0
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-212 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click IPCLKLNK, as shown in Figure 6-72.
Figure 6-72 Adding an IPCLKLNK link
Table 6-79 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configuration area for the IP clock link
2 Physical link list of the configured IP transport layer
3 Configured IP clock link route list
Step 5 In area 1, click SubrackNo, and click . Select ServerIP, and click . The Destination IPAddress & Local IP Interface window is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-73. In area 1, selectthe network segment route, and set the server IP address of the IP clock link in the upper middlepart of the window. Click OK to return to the NodeB IP Transport Layer window.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-213
Figure 6-73 Configuring the IP address at the IP clock link server
Table 6-80 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 Configuration area for the destination IP address of the IP clock link
2 Physical link list at the IP transport layer
NOTE
l The client IP address of the IP clock link is the local IP address in area 1 of Figure 6-73. The serverIP address of the IP clock link is on the same network segment with DestNet.
l After the data link layer is configured, the CME automatically adds the network segment route that ison the same network segment as the local IP address of the data link. That is, the IP address of thedestination network and the local IP address of the data link are on the same network segment. Fordetails, refer to area 1 in Figure 6-73. (DestNet and LocalIP use the route of the same networksegment.)
l After the route is determined, the CME automatically traces route related physical link. As shown inarea 2 of Figure 6-73, this physical link cannot be changed.
Step 6 Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add a clock link.
NOTE
Select the configured IP clock link, and the CME automatically traces the IP clock link and its related IPclock route, as shown in areas 2 and 3 of Figure 6-72.
----End
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-214 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
6.6.10 Modifying IP QoS Data (Initial)This describes how to modify the signaling and Operation and Maintenance (OM) priorities.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Optional
NOTE
l IP QoS is an IP network capability to provide specific services over the IP network thatuses multiple bottom-layer network technologies such as MP, FR, ATM, Ethernet, SDH,and MPLS.
l IP QoS supports the switching between the IP precedence and DSCP. The IP QoSconfiguration is flexible depending on actual requirements.
PrerequisiteNone.
Preparation
Table 6-81 Negotiation and planned data of the IPQoS
InputData
FieldName
Description Example Source
Priority rule PriRule Optional parameters:l IPPRECEDENCE
l DSCP
IPPRECEDENCE
Networkplanning
Signalingpriority
SigPri l In IPPRECEDENCE rule, the valuerange is 0 through 7.
l In DSCP rule, the value range is 0through 63.
7
OperationandMaintenance (OM)priority
OMPri l In IPPRECEDENCE rule, the valuerange is 0 through 7.
l In DSCP rule, the value range is 0through 63.
7
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-215
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB IP Transport Layer window isdisplayed.
Step 4 Click IPQos, as shown in Figure 6-74.
Figure 6-74 Configuring the Diffserv priority on the transport layer
Step 5 Select PriRule, and select a priority rule from the drop-down list.
Step 6 Select SigPri and OMPri, and then set the signaling and OM priorities.
Step 7 Click to save the settings.
----End
6.7 Refreshing the Transport Layer Data of the NodeB(Initial)
This describes how to refresh the transport layer data of the NodeB. The CME can simultaneouslyupdate the Iub data at the RNC and the NodeB sides. If the Iub interface data is configured atthe RNC side, the data at the NodeB side is updated at the same time. Thus, the Iub data at boththe RNC and the NodeB sides can be consistent.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration (The RNC and the NodeB is directly connectedwithout ATM switch inbetween.)
Mandatory/Optional
Optional. This function is customized. Therefore, it is not applied to all scenarios.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-216 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
NOTE
l Whether to connect the RNC and the NodeB directly depends on actual scenarios. The Iub refreshingfunction does not check whether the RNC and the NodeB are directly connected.
l When data on both the RNC and the NodeB is carried over E1/T1 or optical port in the ATM transportmode and the RNC is connected to the NodeB through an ATM switch. The Iub refreshing functiondetermines that the NodeB and the RNC are directly connected. The Iub refreshing function issupported. The accuracy of refreshed data, however, cannot be guaranteed owing to the ATM switch.Therefore, use the ATM switch with caution.
l Before the refreshing, consistency check will be executed over the Iub interface. That is, check that theversion of the RNC matches that of the NodeB. If the versions on both the NodeB and the RNC sidesmatch, the data over the Iub interface on the RNC side can be synchronized to the NodeB side. For thematching relations, refer to Figure 6-75.
Figure 6-75 Matching relations
Prerequisitel The Iub interface data at the RNC is configured. For details, refer to Adding Iub Interface
Data to the RNC (Initial, over ATM, CME).l To execute the refresh function, the physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to
6.2.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).l Ensure that the VPI of the PVC at the RNC side is in the VPI value range defined in the
baseband interface board at the NodeB side.l If the optical interface board is adopted, ensure that the NUTI is configured with the
corresponding sub-board.
Preparationl For the macro NodeB, the equipment layer is configured with the NDTI or the NUTI with
bearer type of ATM or IPv4. For details, refer to 6.2.2 Adding the Boards in the BasebandSubrack (Initial).
l For the distributed NodeB, the equipment layer is configured with the BBU with bearertype of ATM or IPv4. For details, refer to 6.4.2 Adding a BBU (Initial).
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-217
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Selection window is displayed.
Step 4 Determine the target NodeB to be refreshed.
Option Description
Only one target NodeB can be refreshedat a time.
Go to Step 5.
More than one target NodeB needs to berefreshed at a time.
1. In the NodeB Selection dialog box, clickFilter. The Select NodeB window isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 6-76.
2. In area 2, select multiple physical NodeBs,
and click . The physical NodeBsare added to area 1.
3. Click Close to return to the NodeBSelection window.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-218 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-76 NodeB Selection window
Table 6-82 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence of dataconfiguration
Description
1 List of candidate physical NodeBs
2 List of target physical NodeBs
Step 5 Click Next. The PortMatch window is displayed, as shown in Figure 6-77.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-219
Figure 6-77 Port Match window
NOTE
l The data in dark blue refers to the data at the RNC side, and that in green refers to the data at the NodeBside.
l Before the Iub refreshing, the CME automatically allocates the interconnection data such as NCN(cabinet number), NSBN(subrack number), NSN (slot number), and NPN (port number) at the NodeBside. You can also reallocate the data as required.
Step 6 (Optional) Select NCN, and click to modify the interconnection data at the NodeB side.
Step 7 Click Next, and the Confirmation dialog box is displayed.Click OK to execute datasynchronization. The Finish dialog box is displayed telling that the data is successfully refreshed.
Step 8 Click Finish to return to the Physical NodeB Basic Information window.
----End
6.8 Adding Radio Layer DataThis describes how to configure radio network layer data for the NodeB. The related activitiesinvolve adding sites, adding sectors, and adding local cells.
6.8.1 Adding SitesThis describes how to add a NodeB site. The NodeB modules that are in the charge of the samemain module are called a NodeB. They can be located in different places and connected to eachother through optical fibers and standard interfaces. Each module at a specific place can beplanned as a site.
6.8.2 Adding Sectors and Cells (Macro NodeB)This describes how to configure cells in local sectors, remote sectors, and distributed sectors ina macro NodeB. From the hardware perspective, the local sector needs the support from theMTRU and MAFU, and the remote and the distributed sector needs the support from the MRRU
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-220 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
or the PicoRRU (PRRU). The cells can be configured in the local sectors, remote sectors, ordistributed sectors.
6.8.3 Adding Sectors and Cells (Distributed NodeB)This describes how to add the remote sectors and distributed sectors for a distributed NodeB.The distributed NodeB supports only remote and distributed sectors. In terms of hardwaresupport, the remote sector and the distributed sector need the MRRU or PRRU (PicoRRU) RFunit. The cells can be configured only in remote sectors or distributed sectors.
6.8.1 Adding SitesThis describes how to add a NodeB site. The NodeB modules that are in the charge of the samemain module are called a NodeB. They can be located in different places and connected to eachother through optical fibers and standard interfaces. Each module at a specific place can beplanned as a site.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
Prerequisite
The physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a PhysicalNodeB (Initial).
Preparation
Table 6-83 Negotiation and planned data of the NodeB
InputData
Field Name Description Example Source
Site name Site Name The site is usually named afterthe geographical location.
Shanghai Networkplanning
Procedure
Step 1 On the main interface of the CME, click in the configuration object pane, and then clickNodeB CM Express in the configuration task pane. The NodeB CM Express window isdisplayed.
Step 2 Click . The Physical NodeB Basic Information window is displayed.
Step 3 Select a physical NodeB, and then click . The NodeB Radio Layer window is displayed,as shown in Figure 6-78.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-221
Figure 6-78 Adding Sites
Sequence of data configuration Description
1 Configuration area for sites
Step 4 In area 1, select SiteId, and click . Configure parameters SiteId and Site Name accordingto the prepared data.
NOTE
SiteId is unique in one NodeB.
Step 5 Click to add a site.
----End
6.8.2 Adding Sectors and Cells (Macro NodeB)This describes how to configure cells in local sectors, remote sectors, and distributed sectors ina macro NodeB. From the hardware perspective, the local sector needs the support from theMTRU and MAFU, and the remote and the distributed sector needs the support from the MRRUor the PicoRRU (PRRU). The cells can be configured in the local sectors, remote sectors, ordistributed sectors.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-222 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NOTE
l The MAFU or MRRU supports four carrier frequencies and the PRRU supports two carrier frequencies.
l The uplink and downlink frequencies of the cell configured in the same MAFU, MRRU, or PRRUmust be at the same frequency band, and the difference of frequency between cells should meet certainconditions.
l If the PA supports two carriers, the carriers are on the same PA. The frequency difference betweentwo local cells should not be smaller than 4.2 MHz (21 x 0.2 MHz), and not greater than 5 MHz(25 x 0.2 MHz).
l If the PA supports four carriers, the carriers are on the same PA. The frequency difference betweentwo local cells should not be smaller than 4.2 MHz (21 x 0.2 MHz), and not greater than 15 MHz(75 x 0.2 MHz).
l A represents TX/RX antenna.
l B represents RX antenna.
Prerequisitel The physical NodeB,that is the BTS3812AE, BTS3812A, or BTS3812E is configured. For
details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).l The remote and distributed sectors can be configured only when the BTS3812AE,
BTS3812A, or BTS3812E is configured with the MRRU or PRRU (PicoRRU). For details,refer to 6.2.4 Adding an RRU (Initial, Macro NodeB).
l The local sectors can use only the antenna channel on the MAFU module. For details, referto 6.2.5 Adding RF Modules (Initial).
l The sites are configured. For details, refer to 6.8.1 Adding Sites.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-223
Preparation
Table 6-84 Negotiation and planned data of the sector
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Number ofRX antennas
RxAntennaNum
The number of RX antennas ina sector is associated with theparameter DemMode set atthe NodeB equipment layer..You can define the number ofRX antennas beforeconfiguring antenna channelsfor the sectors. You need to,however, adhere to thefollowing principles:l If DemMode is set to four-
way demodulation mode orfour-way economicaldemodulation mode, onlyone or four RX antennas canbe configured.
l If DemMode is set to two-way demodulation mode,only one or two RXantennas can be configured.
2
Networkplanning
Transmitdiversitymode
TxDiversityMode
Diversity mode of the sector,which can be configuredbefore the antenna channel isconfigured. Optionalparameters:l NO_TX_DIVERSITY (no
transmit diversity): onesector uses one TX channel.
l TX_DIVERSITY (transmitdiversity): one sector usestwo TX channels.
l HALFFREQ (0.5/0.5frequency mode, which canbe configured only inremote sectors)
When the number ofconfigured RX antennas isone, the sector can work onlyin no transmit diversity mode.
TX_DIVERSITY
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-224 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Coveragetype
Cover Type This parameter is required forthe remote sector. It is validonly when the transmitdiversity mode isHALFFREQ. Optionalparameters:l SAMEZONE (same
coverage type)l DIFFZONE (different
coverage type)
-
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-225
Table 6-85 Negotiation and planned data of the cell
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Uplinkfrequency
UARFCNUpLink
The UL and DL frequencies ofa cell must be at the samefrequency band.Frequency (MHz) =(Frequency / 5) + offsetValue range: 0 through 65535l Band 1
Common frequencies: 9612through 9888 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: None.Offset: 0
l Band 2Common frequencies: 9262through 9538 inclusive.Offset: 0Special frequencies: {12,37, 62, 87, 112, 137, 162,187, 212, 237, 262, 287}.Offset:1850.1
l Band 3Common frequencies: 937through 1288 inclusive.Offset:1525Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 4Common frequencies: 1312through 1513 inclusive.Offset:1450Special frequencies: {1662,1687, 1712, 1737, 1762,1787, 1812, 1837, 1862}.Offset:1380.1
l Band 5Common frequencies: 4132through 4233 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: {782,787, 807, 812, 837, 862}.Offset:670.1
l Band 6Common frequencies: 4162through 4188 inclusive.Offset:0
9612
Networkplanning
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-226 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Special frequencies:{812,837}. Offset:670.1
l Band 7Common frequencies: 2012through 2338 inclusive.Offset:2100Special frequencies: {2362,2387, 2412, 2437, 2462,2487, 2512, 2537, 2562,2587, 2612, 2637, 2662,2687}. Offset:2030.1
l Band 8Common frequencies: 2712through 2863 inclusive.Offset:340Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 9Common frequencies: 8762through 8912 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-227
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Downlinkfrequency
UARFCNDownLink
The UL and DL frequencies ofa cell must be at the samefrequency band.Frequency (MHz) =(Frequency / 5) + offsetValue range: 0 through 65535l Band 1
Common frequencies:10562 through 10838inclusive. Offset:0Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 2Common frequencies: 9662through 9938 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: {412,437, 462, 487, 512, 537,562, 587, 612, 637, 662,687}. Offset:1850.1
l Band 3Common frequencies: 1162through 1513 inclusive.Offset:1575Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 4Common frequencies: 1537through 1738 inclusive.Offset:1805Special frequencies: {1887,1912, 1937, 1962, 1987,2012, 2037, 2062, 2087}.Offset:1735.1
l Band 5Common frequencies: 4357through 4458 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: {1007,1012, 1032, 1037, 1062,1087}. Offset:670.1
l Band 6Common frequencies: 4387through 4413 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: {1037,1062}. Offset:670.1
10562
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-228 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
l Band 7Common frequencies: 2237through 2563 inclusive.Offset:2175Special frequencies: {2587,2612, 2637, 2662, 2687,2712, 2737, 2762, 2787,2812, 2837, 2862, 2887,2912}. Offset:2105.1
l Band 8Common frequencies: 2937through 3088 inclusive.Offset:340Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 9Common frequencies: 9237through 9387 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
Uplinkresourcegroup ID
ULResourceGroupId
The cells within an uplinkresource group share theuplink resources. One ULresource group has amaximum of six cells. If theUL resource group has high-speed movement cells, itsupports a maximum of threecells.
0
Downlinkresourcegroup ID
DLResourceGroupId
When adding local cells, youneed to select the downlinkresource group. One local cellis only carried on a board of itsdownlink resource group.
0
Basebandresource pooltype
BbPoolType Optional parameters:GEN_POOL: general resourcepool, which consists of theboards located at slot 0 throughslot 9.
GEN_POOL
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-229
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Maximumtransmitpower
MaxTxPower The maximum transmit powerof a local or remote cell refersto that on the TOC. Thetransmit power must be withinthe range that is supported bythe power amplifier lest thecell is unavailable.l When the sector works in
NO_TX_DIVERSITYmode, the maximumtransmit power range of thecell is:[TOC maximum outputpower of the poweramplifier - 10 dB, TOCmaximum output power ofthe power amplifier]
l When the sector works intransmit diversity mode or0.5/0.5 frequency mode, themaximum transmit powerrange of the cell is:An intersection of [TOC1maximum output power - 7dB, TOC1 maximum outputpower + 3 dB] and [TOC2maximum output power -7dB, TOC2 maximumoutput power + 3 dB].
Value range: 0 through 500
430
Cell radius CellRadius The coverage is affected by thecell radius, which isrecommended to be set asdesigned according to thenetwork planning.Value range: 150 through180000
29000
Innerhandoverradius
CellInnerHandoverRadidus
The inner handover radius ofthe cell should not be greaterthan the cell radius. It isrecommended to be set asdesigned according to thenetwork planning.Value range: 0 through 180000
0
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-230 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Desensitization intensity
Desensy This parameter needs to be setonly in cells of local andremote sectors. It is the ratio ofuplink noise intensity tobackground noise of thereceiver. This value is not usedwhen the sector is a distributedone. The data is determined inthe network planning, and it isconsistent with that at theRNC.Value range: 0 through 30
0
High-speedmovementmode
Hispm The data is determined in thenetwork planning, and it isconsistent with that at theRNC. Optional parameters:l FALSE (not high speed)
l TRUE (high speed)
FALSE
Rate in high-speedmovementmode
Spr This parameter is valid whenthe Hispm is set to TRUE. Thedata is determined in thenetwork planning, and it isconsistent with that at theRNC. Optional parameters:l 250
l 400
l 500
-
Ratio of thedefaulttransmitpower to theRRU
DefPowerLvl Cells in distributed sectorsneed the configuration.Value range: 10 through 100
100
Procedurel Configure local sectors and cells.
NOTE
The local sector uses only the RF board, that is, MAFU.
1. In the NodeB Radio Layer window, click the Local Sector tab, and the tab page isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 6-79.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-231
Figure 6-79 Configuring local sectors and cells
Table 6-86 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence ofdataconfiguration
Description
1 Configuration area for the local sectors
2 Antenna channel list for the local sectors
3 Used antenna channel list
4 Cell configuration areas for the local sectors
5 List of available RF channels for cells
6 Used RF channel list
2. In area 1, click SectorNo, and click . Set parameters based on prepared data. Then,
click to add a local sector.3. In area 2, the available antenna channels that can be used by the local sectors are
filtered out. Select the antenna channel, and then click to configurethe antenna channel used by the local sector.
4. In area 4, click LoCell, and click .5. Set parameters UARFCNUpLink and UARFCNDownLink for the cell.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-232 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
6. Select ULResourceGroupId or DLResourceGroupId, and click . TheULGroup or DLGroup window is displayed. Select an uplink or a downlink resourcegroup, and click Close to return to the NodeB Radio Layer window.
7. Select INHBOARD, and click . The Mac Params Confige Form window isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 6-80. Modify Mac-hs and Mac-e related parameters,
and click . Then, click Close to return to the NodeB Radio Layer window.
Figure 6-80 Modifying Mac-hs and Mac-e related parameters
Table 6-87 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence ofdataconfiguration
Description
1 Modify Mac-hs scheduling parameters.
2 Modify Mac-hs resource limit parameters.
3 Modify Mac-hs SPI scheduling parameters.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-233
NOTE
l For the BTS3812AE, BTS3812A, or BTS3812E, if the previously mentioned parametersfor the specified local cells are modified, you must select the HSDPA Capability checkbox, and the INHBOARD is INHBOARD; if you deselect the HSDPA Capability checkbox, the INHBOARD is UNLIMITED.
l For the DBS3800, the status of the HSDPA Capability check box is unchangeable, that is,the check box can only be selected. The INHBOARD can only be INHBOARD.
8. Configure other parameters based on the prepared data, and then click to add acell.
9. In area 5, the available RF channels that can be used by the cell are filtered out. Select
the RF channel, and then click to configure the RF channel used bythe cell.
l Configure remote sectors and cells.
NOTE
l When the number of receive antennas is 2 or 4, only the RX/TX antenna channels on the MRRUconfigured on the main line of the RRU chain/ring can be used.
l When the number of receive antennas is 1, only the RX/TX antenna channels on the MRRU/PRRU configured on the main line of the RRU chain/ring can be used.
1. In the NodeB Radio Layer window, click the Remote Sector tab, the tab page isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 6-81.
Figure 6-81 Configuring remote sectors and cells
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-234 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 6-88 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence ofdataconfiguration
Description
1 Configuration area for the remote sectors
2 Available antenna channel list for remote sectors
3 Used antenna channel list
4 Configuration area for the cells of the remote sectors
5 List of available RF channels for cells
6 Used RF channel list
2. Perform Step 2 through Step 3 to configure remote sectors.
3. Perform Step 4 through Step 9 to configure cells of the remote sectors.
l Configure distributed sectors and cells
NOTE
l The TX/RX mode of distributed sectors is always unidirectional (TX/RX).
l The distributed sector uses only the RX/TX antenna channels on the MRRU or PRRU (includingthe PRRU configured on the RHUB) configured on the RRU chain/ring.
1. In the NodeB Radio Layer window, click the Distribute Sector tab, the tab page isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 6-82.
Figure 6-82 Configure distributed sectors and cells
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-235
Table 6-89 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence ofdataconfiguration
Description
1 Configuration area for the distributed sectors
2 Available antenna channel list for distributed sectors
3 Used antenna channel list
4 Configuration area for the cells of the distributed sectors
5 List of available RF channels for cells
6 Used RF channel list
2. Perform Step 2 through Step 3 to configure the distributed sectors.3. Perform Step 4 through Step 9 to configure cells of the distributed sectors.
----End
6.8.3 Adding Sectors and Cells (Distributed NodeB)This describes how to add the remote sectors and distributed sectors for a distributed NodeB.The distributed NodeB supports only remote and distributed sectors. In terms of hardwaresupport, the remote sector and the distributed sector need the MRRU or PRRU (PicoRRU) RFunit. The cells can be configured only in remote sectors or distributed sectors.
Scenario NodeB initial configuration
Mandatory/Optional
Mandatory
NOTE
l The MRRU supports four carrier frequencies and the PRRU supports two carrier frequencies.
l The uplink and downlink frequencies of the cell configured in the same MRFU, MRRU, or PRRU mustbe at the same frequency band, the uplink frequencies must be smaller than the downlink frequencies,and the difference of frequency between cells should meet certain conditions.
l If the PA supports two carriers, the carriers are on the same PA. The frequency difference betweentwo local cells should not be smaller than 4.2 MHz (21 x 0.2 MHz), and not greater than 5 MHz(25 x 0.2 MHz).
l If the PA supports four carriers, the carriers are on the same PA. The frequency difference betweentwo local cells should not be smaller than 4.2 MHz (21 x 0.2 MHz), and not greater than 15 MHz(75 x 0.2 MHz).
l A represents TX/RX antenna.
l B represents RX antenna.
Prerequisitel The DBS3800 related physical NodeB is configured. For details, refer to 6.2.1 Manually
Creating a Physical NodeB (Initial).
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-236 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
l The RRU sites are configured. For details, refer to 6.4.4 Adding an RRU (Initial,Distributed NodeB).
l The sites are configured. For details, refer to 6.8.1 Adding Sites.
Preparation
Table 6-90 Negotiation and planned data of the sector
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Number ofRX antennas
RxAntennaNum
The number of RX antennas ina sector is associated with theparameter DemMode set atthe NodeB equipment layer..You can define the number ofRX antennas beforeconfiguring antenna channelsfor the sectors. You need to,however, adhere to thefollowing principles:l If DemMode is set to four-
way demodulation mode orfour-way economicaldemodulation mode, onlyone or four RX antennas canbe configured.
l If DemMode is set to two-way demodulation mode,only one or two RXantennas can be configured.
2
Networkplanning
Transmitdiversitymode
TxDiversityMode
Diversity mode of the sector,which can be configuredbefore the antenna channel isconfigured. Optionalparameters:l NO_TX_DIVERSITY (no
transmit diversity): onesector uses one TX channel.
l TX_DIVERSITY (transmitdiversity): one sector usestwo TX channels.
l HALFFREQ (0.5/0.5frequency mode, which canbe configured only inremote sectors)
When the number ofconfigured RX antennas isone, the sector can work onlyin no transmit diversity mode.
TX_DIVERSITY
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-237
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Coveragetype
Cover Type This parameter is required forthe remote sector. It is validonly when the transmitdiversity mode isHALFFREQ. Optionalparameters:l SAMEZONE (same
coverage type)l DIFFZONE (different
coverage type)
-
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-238 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 6-91 Negotiation and planned data of the cell
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Uplinkfrequency
UARFCNUpLink
The UL and DL frequencies ofa cell must be at the samefrequency band.Frequency (MHz) =(Frequency / 5) + offsetValue range: 0 through 65535l Band 1
Common frequencies: 9612through 9888 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: None.Offset: 0
l Band 2Common frequencies: 9262through 9538 inclusive.Offset: 0Special frequencies: {12,37, 62, 87, 112, 137, 162,187, 212, 237, 262, 287}.Offset:1850.1
l Band 3Common frequencies: 937through 1288 inclusive.Offset:1525Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 4Common frequencies: 1312through 1513 inclusive.Offset:1450Special frequencies: {1662,1687, 1712, 1737, 1762,1787, 1812, 1837, 1862}.Offset:1380.1
l Band 5Common frequencies: 4132through 4233 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: {782,787, 807, 812, 837, 862}.Offset:670.1
l Band 6Common frequencies: 4162through 4188 inclusive.Offset:0
9612
Networkplanning
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-239
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Special frequencies:{812,837}. Offset:670.1
l Band 7Common frequencies: 2012through 2338 inclusive.Offset:2100Special frequencies: {2362,2387, 2412, 2437, 2462,2487, 2512, 2537, 2562,2587, 2612, 2637, 2662,2687}. Offset:2030.1
l Band 8Common frequencies: 2712through 2863 inclusive.Offset:340Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 9Common frequencies: 8762through 8912 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-240 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Downlinkfrequency
UARFCNDownLink
The UL and DL frequencies ofa cell must be at the samefrequency band.Frequency (MHz) =(Frequency / 5) + offsetValue range: 0 through 65535l Band 1
Common frequencies:10562 through 10838inclusive. Offset:0Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 2Common frequencies: 9662through 9938 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: {412,437, 462, 487, 512, 537,562, 587, 612, 637, 662,687}. Offset:1850.1
l Band 3Common frequencies: 1162through 1513 inclusive.Offset:1575Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 4Common frequencies: 1537through 1738 inclusive.Offset:1805Special frequencies: {1887,1912, 1937, 1962, 1987,2012, 2037, 2062, 2087}.Offset:1735.1
l Band 5Common frequencies: 4357through 4458 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: {1007,1012, 1032, 1037, 1062,1087}. Offset:670.1
l Band 6Common frequencies: 4387through 4413 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: {1037,1062}. Offset:670.1
10562
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-241
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
l Band 7Common frequencies: 2237through 2563 inclusive.Offset:2175Special frequencies: {2587,2612, 2637, 2662, 2687,2712, 2737, 2762, 2787,2812, 2837, 2862, 2887,2912}. Offset:2105.1
l Band 8Common frequencies: 2937through 3088 inclusive.Offset:340Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
l Band 9Common frequencies: 9237through 9387 inclusive.Offset:0Special frequencies: None.Offset:0
Uplinkresourcegroup ID
ULResourceGroupId
The cells within an uplinkresource group share theuplink resources. One ULresource group has amaximum of six cells. If theUL resource group has high-speed movement cells, itsupports a maximum of threecells.
0
Downlinkresourcegroup ID
DLResourceGroupId
When adding local cells, youneed to select the downlinkresource group. One local cellis only carried on a board of itsdownlink resource group.
0
Basebandresource pooltype
BbPoolType Optional parameters:GEN_POOL: general resourcepool, which consists of theboards located at slot 0 throughslot 9.
GEN_POOL
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-242 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Maximumtransmitpower
MaxTxPower The maximum transmit powerof a local or remote cell refersto that on the TOC. Thetransmit power must be withinthe range that is supported bythe power amplifier lest thecell is unavailable.l When the sector works in
NO_TX_DIVERSITYmode, the maximumtransmit power range of thecell is:[TOC maximum outputpower of the poweramplifier - 10 dB, TOCmaximum output power ofthe power amplifier]
l When the sector works intransmit diversity mode or0.5/0.5 frequency mode, themaximum transmit powerrange of the cell is:An intersection of [TOC1maximum output power - 7dB, TOC1 maximum outputpower + 3 dB] and [TOC2maximum output power -7dB, TOC2 maximumoutput power + 3 dB].
Value range: 0 through 500
430
Cell radius CellRadius The coverage is affected by thecell radius, which isrecommended to be set asdesigned according to thenetwork planning.Value range: 150 through180000
29000
Innerhandoverradius
CellInnerHandoverRadidus
The inner handover radius ofthe cell should not be greaterthan the cell radius. It isrecommended to be set asdesigned according to thenetwork planning.Value range: 0 through 180000
0
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-243
Input Data Field Name Description Example Source
Desensitization intensity
Desensy This parameter needs to be setonly in cells of local andremote sectors. It is the ratio ofuplink noise intensity tobackground noise of thereceiver. This value is not usedwhen the sector is a distributedone. The data is determined inthe network planning, and it isconsistent with that at theRNC.Value range: 0 through 30
0
High-speedmovementmode
Hispm The data is determined in thenetwork planning, and it isconsistent with that at theRNC. Optional parameters:l FALSE (not high speed)
l TRUE (high speed)
FALSE
Rate in high-speedmovementmode
Spr This parameter is valid whenthe Hispm is set to TRUE. Thedata is determined in thenetwork planning, and it isconsistent with that at theRNC. Optional parameters:l 250
l 400
l 500
-
Ratio of thedefaulttransmitpower to theRRU
DefPowerLvl Cells in distributed sectorsneed the configuration.Value range: 10 through 100
100
Procedurel Configure remote sectors and cells.
NOTE
l When the number of receive antennas is 2 or 4, only the RX/TX antenna channels on the MRRUconfigured on the main line of the RRU chain/ring can be used.
l When the number of receive antennas is 1, only the RX/TX antenna channels on the MRRU/PRRU configured on the main line of the RRU chain/ring can be used.
1. In the NodeB Radio Layer window, click the Remote Sector tab, the tab page isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 6-83.
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-244 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 6-83 Configuring remote sectors and cells
Table 6-92 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence ofdataconfiguration
Description
1 Configuration area for the remote sectors
2 Available antenna channel list for remote sectors
3 Used antenna channel list
4 Configuration area for the cells of the remote sectors
5 List of available RF channels for cells
6 Used RF channel list
2. Perform Step 2 through Step 3 in the 6.8.2 Adding Sectors and Cells (Macro
NodeB) to add remote sectors.3. Perform Step 4 through Step 9 in the 6.8.2 Adding Sectors and Cells (Macro
NodeB) to add cells of the remote sectors.l Configure distributed sectors and cells
NOTE
l The TX/RX mode of distributed sectors is always unidirectional (TX/RX).
l The distributed sector uses only the RX/TX antenna channels on the MRRU or PRRU (includingthe PRRU configured on the RHUB) configured on the RRU chain/ring.
1. In the NodeB Radio Layer window, click the Distribute Sector tab, the tab page isdisplayed, as shown in Figure 6-84.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
6-245
Figure 6-84 Configure distributed sectors and cells
Table 6-93 Description of the configuration pane
Sequence ofdataconfiguration
Description
1 Configuration area for the distributed sectors
2 Available antenna channel list for distributed sectors
3 Used antenna channel list
4 Configuration area for the cells of the distributed sectors
5 List of available RF channels for cells
6 Used RF channel list
2. Perform Step 2 through Step 3 in the 6.8.2 Adding Sectors and Cells (Macro
NodeB) to add distributed sectors.3. Perform Step 4 through Step 9 in the 6.8.2 Adding Sectors and Cells (Macro
NodeB) to add cells of the distributed sectors.
----End
6 Manually Adding a NodeB (Initial)NodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
6-246 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
7 Related Concepts of NodeB InitialConfiguration
About This Chapter
This provides the related concepts to be referenced during the process of the NodeB initialconfiguration.
7.1 Cell Related ConceptsThis provides the cell related concepts, including those of the sectors, carriers, cells, physicalresources of cells, local cells, and logical cells.
7.2 ATM Protocol-Related TermsThis describes the terms related to the ATM protocol. The reference model of the ATM protocolconsists of three planes and three function layers. The three planes are control plane, user plane,and management plane. The three function layers are physical layer, ATM layer, and ATMadaptation layer (AAL).
7.3 IP Protocol-Related TermsThis describes the terms related to the protocols of the data link layer, network layer, andtransport network layer when the Iub interface uses the IP transport.
7.4 NodeB Treelink PVCThe function of a NodeB treelink PVC is similar to that of the ATM switching. This describeshow to add a treelink PVC to the NodeB, that is, to add an ATM switching route to the NodeB(over ATM), so as to switch the PVC from one physical bearer to another.
7.5 NodeBs in Direct/Cascading ConnectionsThis defines the NodeBs in direct and cascading connections. In addition, it describes theconfiguration differences between these two connections.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
7-1
7.1 Cell Related ConceptsThis provides the cell related concepts, including those of the sectors, carriers, cells, physicalresources of cells, local cells, and logical cells.
7.1.1 Sector, Carrier, and CellThis describes the sector, carrier, and cell. A sector is the smallest radio coverage area unit,which is covered by one or more radio carriers. Each radio carrier occupies a frequency. A sectorand a carrier form a cell that is the smallest serving unit for UE access.
7.1.2 Physical Resources of CellsThis describes the physical resources of cells from the perspectives of RF resources of sectorsand resource pools of cells.
7.1.3 Local Cell and Logical CellThis describes local and logical cells. In the 3GPP protocols, a serving cell is called local celland logical cell at the implementation layer of physical layer and the management layer of logicalresources respectively.
7.1.1 Sector, Carrier, and CellThis describes the sector, carrier, and cell. A sector is the smallest radio coverage area unit,which is covered by one or more radio carriers. Each radio carrier occupies a frequency. A sectorand a carrier form a cell that is the smallest serving unit for UE access.
Sectors are classified into omnidirectional sectors and directional sectors. An omnidirectionalsector is used in small traffic areas. Centered around the omnidirectional RX/TX antenna, theomnidirectional sector covers 360o circular areas. When the traffic increases, the omnidirectionalsector is split into three or six directional sectors. The directional sectors are covered bydirectional antennas. For example, when there are three directional sectors, each set of directionalantenna covers a 120o area. When there are six directional sectors, each set of directional antennacovers a 60o area. In fact, the azimuth of the antenna is greater than the theoretical value, andtherefore there is overlap between the sectors.
Number of cells supported by a NodeB = number of sectors x number of carriers in each sector.Figure 7-1 shows the typical 3 x 2 configuration. The area is split into sectors 0, 1, and 2. Eachsector has two carriers, and each carrier forms a cell. There are six cells in total.
Frequency multiplexing is allowed in a WCDMA system if different downlink primaryscrambling codes are used in neighboring cells of different sectors that use the same frequency.In this way, the inter-cell interference is reduced.
7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial ConfigurationNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
7-2 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Figure 7-1 Relations among a sector, carrier, and cell
7.1.2 Physical Resources of CellsThis describes the physical resources of cells from the perspectives of RF resources of sectorsand resource pools of cells.
RF Resources of SectorsThe NodeB provides RF resources of cells. Figure 7-2 shows the physical RF resources mappedto a NodeB from sectors. Each sector uses one directional antenna. Each directional antennaprovides 2-way receive channels to enhance the receiving sensitivity, and the two channels workin mutual receive diversity mode.
l RF modules of a distributed NodeB are the RRU and PicoRRU (PRRU).
l RF modules of a macro NodeB are the MAFU and MTRU. The MAFU and MTRU workin pairs.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
7-3
Figure 7-2 Physical RF resources mapped from sectors onto NodeB
Figure 7-2 shows the mapping between the sectors and the RF module for a 2-carrier NodeB in2-way receive diversity mode. The mapping may vary with the NodeB configuration. Figure7-3 shows the rules of the mapping between BTS3812E sectors and MAFUs and MTRUs.
l 1MAFU+1MTRU for one sector: The NodeB supports 6 sectors. This mode supports 1-carrier or 2-carrier 1T2R configuration.
l 2MAFUs+2MTRUs for one sector: The NodeB supports three sectors. This mode supports1-carrier or 2-carrier 1T2R or 2T2R configuration, and 3-carrier or 4-carrier 1T2R
7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial ConfigurationNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
7-4 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
configuration. You may change the external interface connections of the MTRUs andMAFUs so that this sector mode can support 1-carrier or 2-carrier 2T4R configuration.
l 4MAFUs+4MTRUs for one sector: The NodeB supports one to three sectors. A combinedcabinet is required when there are more than one sector. This mode supports 3-carrier or4-carrier 2T4R configuration.
Figure 7-3 Rules of the mapping between NodeB sectors and MAFUs or MTRUs
Resource Pools of Cells
The macro NodeB sends the uplink or downlink signal processing resources to the resource pool.Cells in the resource pool can share the resources. When you configure the cell, specify the typeof resource pool that the cell belongs to. Two types of resource pools are as follows:
l GEN_POOL: indicates the uplink and downlink baseband resource pool that consists ofthe HBBI, HULP, and HDLP. This type of resource pool is commonly used. When theresource pool is used, you must specify uplink baseband resource groups.
l GRP_POOL: indicates the uplink and downlink baseband resource pool that consists of theHBOI in slot 15. When the resource pool is used, you do not need to specify uplink basebandresource groups.
The NodeB divides the uplink baseband resources into different groups, which are called uplinkbaseband resource groups. The uplink baseband resource groups have the following features andrequirements:
l One uplink baseband resource group consists of one or more uplink processing units. Oneuplink processing unit corresponds to one HBBI/HBOI/HULP board or one BBU module.
l The cells in one uplink baseband resource group share the uplink resources. Each uplinkbaseband resource group supports a maximum of 6 cells in 2-way and enhanced 2-waymodes. Each uplink baseband resource group supports a maximum of three cells in 4-wayand economic 4-way modes.
l The softer handover can be performed between the cells in the same uplink basebandresource group. You need to add the intra-frequency cells to the same group.
l Keep the number of resource groups as small as possible. For example, for a 3 x 4 NodeB,divide the resource pool into two groups, each of which supports 6 cells.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
7-5
7.1.3 Local Cell and Logical CellThis describes local and logical cells. In the 3GPP protocols, a serving cell is called local celland logical cell at the implementation layer of physical layer and the management layer of logicalresources respectively.
Local CellA local cell is a combination of physical resources, such as hardware and software resources, ina cell of a NodeB. A local cell is related to the physical implementation of a device.
NodeBs from different vendors have different ways of providing physical resources for cells.Therefore, the concept of logical cell is proposed in the 3GPP to ensure that the RNC can controlthe radio resources in certain cells through the standard Iub interface. These cells are carried onNodeBs from different vendors.
Logical CellA logical cell is a standard logical model that helps the RNC control the radio resources in acell. The model is independent of the implementation of local cells in the NodeB, and ensuresthat the Iub interface is an open interface.
The parameters of a local cell are configured at and managed by the NodeB. The parameters ofa logical cell are configured at and managed by the RNC. A logical cell and a local cell have theone-to-one correspondence.
7.2 ATM Protocol-Related TermsThis describes the terms related to the ATM protocol. The reference model of the ATM protocolconsists of three planes and three function layers. The three planes are control plane, user plane,and management plane. The three function layers are physical layer, ATM layer, and ATMadaptation layer (AAL).
Figure 7-4 shows the reference model of the ATM protocol.
Figure 7-4 Reference model of the ATM protocol
7.2.1 ATM User Plane, ATM Control Plane, and ATM Management Plane
7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial ConfigurationNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
7-6 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
This describes the functions of the ATM user plane, ATM control plane, and ATM managementplane.
7.2.2 ATM Physical Layer, ATM Layer, and AALThis describes the functions of the physical layer, ATM layer, and AAL.
7.2.1 ATM User Plane, ATM Control Plane, and ATM ManagementPlane
This describes the functions of the ATM user plane, ATM control plane, and ATM managementplane.
Table 7-1 describes the functions of the ATM user plane, ATM control plane, and ATMmanagement plane.
Table 7-1 Functions of the ATM user plane, ATM control plane, and ATM management plane
Plane Function
User plane The user plane transfers user data, such as protocol data and voicedata.
Control plane The control plane transfers signaling messages, such as connectionsetup and connection release.
Management Plane The management plane transfers network OM data. This plane isclassified into the layer management part and the plane managementpart. The former is responsible for intra-layer management, and thelatter for inter-layer management.
NOTE
As stated in the ATM protocols, the AAL and higher layers process the data on the control plane and theuser plane in different ways. The ATM layer and the physical layer, however, process the data on the twoplanes in the same way.
7.2.2 ATM Physical Layer, ATM Layer, and AALThis describes the functions of the physical layer, ATM layer, and AAL.
Table 7-2 describes the layers and functions of the reference model of the ATM protocol.
Table 7-2 Layers and functions of the reference model of the ATM protocol
Protocol Layer Function
AAL
CS The AAL is a higher layer of the ATM layer andperforms the adaptation from the upper layerapplications to the ATM layer. For various types ofservices, the AAL performs the adaptation in differentways. It segments data from the upper layer into SDUs.Each SDU has 48 bytes. The AAL reassembles and
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
7-7
Protocol Layer Function
SAR restores the SDUs from the ATM layer, and thentransfers them to the upper layer.The CS layer performs the convergence. The SARlayer performs the segmentation and reassembly.
ATM layer - ATM switching is a fast packet switching technology.In ATM switching, each 53-byte packet is called a cell.At the physical layer, the ATM layer communicateswith the peer layer through ATM cells.l Generic traffic control
l Cell header generation and extraction
l VPI and VCI translation
l Cell multiplexing and demultiplexing
Physical layer
TC (UNI, IMA,FractionalATM,Fractional IMA,or STM-1mode)
The physical layer provides channels for bit streams ofATM cells. During data transmission, the physicallayer adds the overhead to the ATM cells sent by theATM layer to form a consecutive bit stream. Then, thephysical layer puts the stream on a transport channel.During data reception, the physical layer selects validATM cells from the bit stream on the transport channeland then transfers these cells to the ATM layer. Thephysical layer consists of the PM sublayer and the TCsublayer.The TC sublayer performs the following functions:l Generation and recovery of transmission framesl Adaptation of transmission framesl Cell delimitationl Generation and verification of HEC header
sequencel Decoupling of cell rateThe PM sublayer performs the following functions:l Bit timingl Physical medium
PM (PDH overE1/T1, SDH)
7.3 IP Protocol-Related TermsThis describes the terms related to the protocols of the data link layer, network layer, andtransport network layer when the Iub interface uses the IP transport.
7.3.1 Data Link Layer Protocols
7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial ConfigurationNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
7-8 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
This describes the data link layer protocols related to IP transport.
7.3.2 IPThis describes the Internet Protocol (IP). It provides a connectionless service between networksand defines the rules and details for data communication. It is used along with the TransmissionControl Protocol (TCP) to provide guaranteed data transfer.
7.3.3 SCTPThis describes the Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP). It is mainly used fortransmitting reliable datagrams through an unreliable network.
7.3.1 Data Link Layer ProtocolsThis describes the data link layer protocols related to IP transport.
7.3.1.1 PPPThis describes the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP). The PPP is used at the data link layer. The PPPprovides standard methods for encapsulating the multi-protocol datagrams on point-to-pointlinks. These datagrams include IP, IPX, and Apple Talk.
7.3.1.2 MPThis describes the Multilink PPP (MP). With the wide application of the PPP, the MP emergesas an extended protocol of the PPP. The MP provides a large bandwidth to enable quick datatransfer. In addition, the MP dynamically allocates the link resources to effectively save thevaluable resources.
7.3.1.3 PPPoEThis describes the PPPoE protocol. It is a standard that defines how multiple hosts are connectedto a remote Access Concentration (AC) in a broadcasting-type network (for example Ethernet).When the PPPoE is used in the RAN system, multiple NodeBs are connected to the RNC throughthe access equipment.
7.3.1.4 EtherIPThis describes the EtherIP link. It is connected to the Ethernet, and the relay boards use the FEports.
PPPThis describes the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP). The PPP is used at the data link layer. The PPPprovides standard methods for encapsulating the multi-protocol datagrams on point-to-pointlinks. These datagrams include IP, IPX, and Apple Talk.
Figure 7-5 shows the hierarchy of the PPP.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
7-9
Figure 7-5 Hierarchy of the PPP
The PPP consists of the link control protocol (LCP), network control protocol (NCP), andextended protocols. They are described as follows:l LCP: used to configure, test, or remove a data link.
l NCP: used to configure parameters at the network layer for communications between theequipment.
l Extended protocols, such as the multilink protocol (MP): The PPP combines multiplephysical links into a logical link through the MP, thus providing a large bandwidth andenabling fast data transfer. Huawei RNC implements the MP by adding MLPPP data.
MPThis describes the Multilink PPP (MP). With the wide application of the PPP, the MP emergesas an extended protocol of the PPP. The MP provides a large bandwidth to enable quick datatransfer. In addition, the MP dynamically allocates the link resources to effectively save thevaluable resources.
The MP can flexibly arrange multiple independent physical links between point-to-pointsystems. It provides a virtual link for the whole system, and the bandwidth of the virtual link isthe sum of bandwidths of the N (N ≥ 1) physical links.
With the development of network technologies, bandwidth is no longer a bottleneck. Therefore,the extended protocols of the PPP are not required.
PPPoEThis describes the PPPoE protocol. It is a standard that defines how multiple hosts are connectedto a remote Access Concentration (AC) in a broadcasting-type network (for example Ethernet).When the PPPoE is used in the RAN system, multiple NodeBs are connected to the RNC throughthe access equipment.
In this network topology, all hosts can independently initialize PPP protocol stacks, and performcharging and management for the subscribers on this network. To set up and maintain the point-to-point relations between hosts and the AC in a broadcasting-type network, each host shouldbe able to set up a unique point-to-point session with the AC.
7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial ConfigurationNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
7-10 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
The procedure for setting up a PPPoE session is as follows:
1. When a host wants to start a PPPoE session, it searches for an AC in the network.2. If multiple ACs exist on the network, the host selects an AC based on the services provided
by the AC or the settings predefined by the subscribers.3. After an AC is selected, the host starts to set up a PPPoE session with the AC and assigns
a unique process ID.4. PPPoE session phase starts after the session is set up. During this phase, the two sides with
point-to-point connection exchange the datagrams by using the PPP to complete a seriesof PPP processes, and then transfer the network layer datagrams over this point-to-pointlogical channel.
EtherIP
This describes the EtherIP link. It is connected to the Ethernet, and the relay boards use the FEports.
When IP_RAN is selected as the transmission mode of the NodeB, the NodeB can be configuredwith the following four links:
l PPP
l MP
l PPPoE
l EtherIP
PPP and MP links are connected to the dedicated line network, and the relay boards use the E1/T1 ports. PPPoE and EtherIP links are connected to the Ethernet, and the relay boards use theFE ports.
7.3.2 IPThis describes the Internet Protocol (IP). It provides a connectionless service between networksand defines the rules and details for data communication. It is used along with the TransmissionControl Protocol (TCP) to provide guaranteed data transfer.
IPv4 and IPv6The current and most popular network layer protocol of the TCP/IP is IPv4, which was launchedin 1981. IPv6, which was launched in 1995, is gradually going to replace IPv4. Compared withIPv4, IPv6 has much more address space to meet more requirements for IP addresses.
Principles for IP Address Planning
When using the TCP/IP protocol for communication, each communication entity needs an IPaddress. In the application of the RAN, comply with the following principles when planning theIP addresses:l IP addresses and subnet masks must be valid. The network number is not all-zero and that
the host number is not all-zero or all-one.l The IP addresses of classes A, B, and C are valid, but those of classes D and E are invalid.
l Do not set the IP address to a loopback address of 127.X.X.X.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
7-11
IP Address StructureIn an IP network, IP addresses should be assigned to hosts. If you connect a computer to theInternet, you need to apply for an IP address from the Internet Service Provider (ISP).
The length of the IP address is 32 bits. The IP address consists of the following parts:l Network number (net-id): The first bits are called class segments (class bits) that are used
to identify the class of an IP address.l Host number (host-id): indicates different hosts in the same network.
IP Address ClassificationIP addresses are categorized into five classes, as shown in Figure 7-6. You can identify an IPaddress class by its first few bits.
Figure 7-6 Five classes of IP addresses
The IP addresses of classes A, B, and C are most commonly used. IP addresses of class D areused for multicasting. IP addresses of class E are reserved. For details, refer to the RFC1166Internet Numbers released by IETF.
IP Address RangeSome IP addresses are reserved for special purposes. Table 7-3 describes the ranges of IPaddresses.
7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial ConfigurationNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
7-12 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
Table 7-3 Classification and range of IP addresses
Networ
kTyp
e
Address Range Available Range Description
A 0.0.0.0 to127.255.255.255
1.0.0.0 to126.0.0.0
l An all-zero host number means thatthe IP address is the network addressfor network routing.
l An all-one host number means thatthe IP address is used to broadcastmessages to all the hosts on thenetwork.
l When the DHCP is used, the localhost can take 0.0.0.0 as thetemporary IP address but never asthe valid destination address.
l The IP address with networknumber of 0 represents the currentnetwork that can be referenced byother computers without knowingits network number.
l All the IP addresses in the127.X.X.X format are reserved forloopback testing. The packets sentto this address are not sent to lines.The packets are handled internallyas input packets.
B 128.0.0.0 to191.255.255.255
128.0.0.0 to191.254.0.0
l An all-zero host number means thatthe IP address is the network addressfor network routing.
l An all-one host number means thatthe IP address is used to broadcastmessages to all the hosts on thenetwork.
C 192.0.0.0 to223.255.255.255
192.0.0.0 to223.255.254.0
l An all-zero host number means thatthe IP address is the network addressfor network routing.
l An all-one host number means thatthe IP address is used to broadcastmessages to all the hosts on thenetwork.
D 224.0.0.0 to239.255.255.255
None. IP addresses of class D are used formulticasting.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
7-13
Networ
kTyp
e
Address Range Available Range Description
E 240.0.0.0 to255.255.255.255
None. Reserved. The IP address of255.255.255.255 is used forbroadcasting in the LAN.
7.3.3 SCTPThis describes the Stream Control Transmission Protocol (SCTP). It is mainly used fortransmitting reliable datagrams through an unreliable network.
Advantages of the SCTP Compared with the TCP
Compared with the TCP, the SCTP has the following advantages:l Supports the transmission of datagrams that are not delimitated by the upper layer.
l Provides better real-time performance.
l Provides higher security.
l Avoids the blocking of line headers.
l Supports the multi-homing function.
Provides the signaling transmission of higher requirements for real-time performance, security,and reliability.
SCTP Endpoint
The SCTP endpoint is the logical transmitter or receiver of SCTP packets.
The SCTP endpoint on a multi-homing host can be either a group of valid destination transportaddresses for data transmission to the peer host, or a group of valid originating transportaddresses for transmitting SCTP packets.
All the transport addresses used by an SCTP endpoint must use the same port number but canuse multiple IP addresses. The transport address used by an SCTP endpoint at a time must beunique.
A transport address is defined by the network layer address, transport layer protocols, and portnumber. When the SCTP protocol works on the IP transport layer, the transport address is definedby the IP address and SCTP port number. Then, the SCTP protocol acts as the transport layerprotocol.
SCTP Association
SCTP association is the mapping between two SCTP endpoints. It involves two SCTP endpointsand protocol status data. The protocol status data includes verification tag and transport sequencenumber.
7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial ConfigurationNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
7-14 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
SCTP association is uniquely identified by the transport address of the SCTP endpoint that usesthe SCTP association. There is a maximum of one SCTP association between two SCTPendpoints.
SCTP Message StructureThe SCTP message consists of the common header and the chunks. Figure 7-7 shows the SCTPmessage structure.
Figure 7-7 SCTP Message Structure
Multiple chunks can be bundled and transmitted in one datagram, thus saving the bandwidth.
7.4 NodeB Treelink PVCThe function of a NodeB treelink PVC is similar to that of the ATM switching. This describeshow to add a treelink PVC to the NodeB, that is, to add an ATM switching route to the NodeB(over ATM), so as to switch the PVC from one physical bearer to another.
Networking PrinciplesIf a NodeB is connected to a lower-level NodeB, this parent NodeB must be configured with atreelink PVC for transferring ATM cells to the lower-level node. The red dashed line in Figure7-8 represents the treelink PVC.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
7-15
Figure 7-8 Treelink PVC
The purpose of a treelink PVC is to switch the data of the lower-level NodeB to the upper-levelone through a hub NodeB. The treelink PVCs configured on a hub NodeB should be able toswitch all the data of the Iub interface to the upper-level node.
Figure 7-9 Treelink PVC principles
Relations Between Iub PVCs of Lower-Level NodeB and Treelink PVCsThe NCP, CCP, ALCAP, AAL2 PATH, IPoA, CES, and treelink PVC of the lower-level NodeBcorrespond to different PVCs. The method of adding a treelink PVC is the same as that of addinga PVC switching route. You need to add switching routes for all PVCs of the lower-level NodeB.
To add a PVC switching route, you can select either of the following methods:
l Through VCI switching: A treelink PVC corresponds to a PVC switching route. You needto specify the source (VPI, VCI) and the destination (VPI, VCI).
l Through VPI switching: A treelink PVC corresponds to multiple PVC switching routes.You need to specify only the source VPI and the destination VPI. The VCI is unchanged.
The amount of treelink PVCs depends on the amount of physical bearers, switching methods(VP or VC), and the amount of the upper-level applications.
l For VC switching, the amount of treelink PVCs depends on that of the PVCs of the upper-level node.
l For VP switching, the amount of treelink PVCs depends on that of the PVCs of the upper-level node and the VPI values of all PVCs. Assume that all the PVCs on the Iub interface
7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial ConfigurationNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
7-16 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
of a lower-level NodeB are carried on one ATM physical bearer, that is, the slot number,link type, link (group) number, and VPI of each PVC are the same as those of other PVCs.In this case, only one treelink PVC needs to be configured.
NOTE
By adjusting the interface board of a lower-level NodeB or hub NodeB, you can meet the requirements forthe VPIs and VCIs of treelink PVCs.
Comparison Between VP Switching and VC Switchingl The planning and configuration based on VP switching is easier.
l The configuration based on VC switching is more flexible.
7.5 NodeBs in Direct/Cascading ConnectionsThis defines the NodeBs in direct and cascading connections. In addition, it describes theconfiguration differences between these two connections.
7.5.1 Definitions of NodeBs in Direct/Cascading ConnectionsThe physical connections between an RNC and a NodeB are of two types: direct and cascadingconnections.
7.5.2 Configuration Differences Between NodeBs in Direct/Cascading ConnectionsNodeBy in cascading connection is connected to NodeBx through E1, in which case NodeBxworks as the transmission equipment between NodeBy and the RNC. In this sense, it is similarto configure NodeBs in direct or cascading connection. This, however, describes theconfiguration differences between direct and cascading connections.
7.5.1 Definitions of NodeBs in Direct/Cascading ConnectionsThe physical connections between an RNC and a NodeB are of two types: direct and cascadingconnections.
Direct ConnectionIn direct connection, the NodeB is connected to the RNC directly or through transport equipment.Figure 7-10 shows an example of direct connection between NodeBx and the RNC.
Cascading ConnectionIn cascading mode, the NodeB is connected to the RNC through another NodeB. Figure7-10shows an example of cascading connection between NodeBy and the RNC. In this case,NodeBx is called the NodeB that provides cascading connection for NodeBy.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
7-17
Figure 7-10 Direct and cascading connections
NOTE
Multi-level cascading is allowed. In multi-level cascading mode, NodeBy is connected to the RNC throughmultiple NodeBs that provide cascading connections. Each cascaded NodeB occupies a portion of thebandwidth between the RNC and the upper-level NodeB (that is, the NodeB that provides cascadingconnection). The bandwidth is also required by the upper-level NodeB. Therefore, multi-level cascadingis not recommended.
7.5.2 Configuration Differences Between NodeBs in Direct/Cascading Connections
NodeBy in cascading connection is connected to NodeBx through E1, in which case NodeBxworks as the transmission equipment between NodeBy and the RNC. In this sense, it is similarto configure NodeBs in direct or cascading connection. This, however, describes theconfiguration differences between direct and cascading connections.
NodeBx provides the cascading path for NodeBy in either of the following ways:
l NodeBx provides the E1/T1 timeslot cross function.
l NodeBx works as the ATM switching equipment, providing the VP/VC switching function,which is also called the treelink PVC function.
Table 7-4 lists the configuration differences between NodeBs in direct/cascading connections.
Table 7-4 Configuration differences between NodeBs in direct/cascading connections
NodeBxCascading Path
Prerequisites for NodeByConfiguration
Configuration differencesbetween NodeBy and theNodeB in direct connection
Timeslot cross. TheNodeBx works asthe equipment thatprovides thetimeslot crossfunction.
l NodeBx is connected to the RNCthrough E1/T1, including E1 overSDH.
l By default, NodeBx must beconnected to the RNC overfractional ATM. Besides, thereare redundant timeslots betweenNodeBx and the RNC.
l NodeBy must be connectedto NodeBx over fractionalATM and occupies only theredundant timeslots ofNodeBx.
l You need to configure thetimeslot cross connection onNodeBx.
7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial ConfigurationNodeB
NodeB Initial Configuration Guide
7-18 Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
Issue 01 (2008-06-25)
NodeBxCascading Path
Prerequisites for NodeByConfiguration
Configuration differencesbetween NodeBy and theNodeB in direct connection
ATM switching Redundant portions of thebandwidth are available betweenNodeBx and the RNC.
You need to add a treelink PVCto NodeBx.
As the ATM switching equipment, NodeBx is connected to the RNC by E1/T1 or SDH with theapplication as UNI, IMA, or STM-1. NodeBy may also be connected to NodeBx by E1/T1 withthe applications as UNI or IMA. This type of cascading path for the NodeB is recommended.
NodeBNodeB Initial Configuration Guide 7 Related Concepts of NodeB Initial Configuration
Issue 01 (2008-06-25) Huawei Proprietary and ConfidentialCopyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd
7-19